City of Shreveport, Louisiana

City of Shreveport, Louisiana

Department of Engineering and Environmental Services

Office of the City Engineer

BAR SCREEN REPLACEMENT PROJECT

CIP Project No. F11007

Funded By: 2015 URB

SPECIAL PROVISIONS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

100% SUBMITTAL NOVEMBER 2017

Page Intentionally Left Blank

Shreveport, LA 00000 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: Special Provisions

ALL Parts 40 – General Requirements

ALL

Division 1 – General Requirements STS01610 General Equipment Stipulations STS01820 Demonstration and Training

Division 2 – Sitework

ALL

Division 9 - Finishes ALL

Division 11 - Equipment ALL

Division 15 - Mechanical ALL


DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY

The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: Division 13 – Special Construction

ALL

hol07261

Snapshot


DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY

The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: Division 16 – Electrical

ALL


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

0010 Table of Contents SPECIAL PROVISIONS

SP100.2 Definitions

SP102.9.1 Evidence of Insurance

SP103.5 Guarantees

SP108.8.5 Indemnification

SP108.11 Overtime

SP110.1 Subletting of Contract

SP1202.1 Mobilization

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PARTS 40 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4010 Summary of Work

4014 Construction Sequence

4025 Measurement and Payment

4026 Pay Estimates

4035 Change Order Procedures

4038 Requests for Information

4045 Cutting Coring and Patching

4050 NOT USED

4110 NOT USED

4200 Project Meetings

4300 Submittals

4310 Construction Scheduling

4322 Photographic Documentation

4370 Schedule of Values

4400 Quality Control


4465 Testing and Startup

4480 NOT USED

4500 Temporary Facilities

4562 Dust Control

4580 Project Identification Signs

4600 Delivery Storage and Handling

4612 NOT USED

4614 NOT USED

4630 Substitutions and Product Options

4700 Contract Closeout

4710 Cleaning

4720 As-Built Drawings

4730 Operation and Maintenance Data and Training

4740 Warranties and Bonds

SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

STS01610 General Equipment Stipulations

STS01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria

STS01820 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK

STS02220 Facilities Demolition

STS02704 Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing

STS02930 Seeding

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

STS03302 Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete

STS03600 Grouting

STS03920 Concrete Surface Repair

STS03930 Concrete Crack Repair


DIVISION 4 – NOT USED

DIVISION 5 – METALS

STS05520 Metal Railings

STS05530 Metal Gratings

STS05550 Anchorage in Concrete

STS05990 Structural Metals

DIVISION 6 THROUGH DIVISION 8 – NOT USED

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

STS09940 Protective Coating


DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

STS11060 Equipment Installation

STS11312 Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screens

STS11313 Screenings Washer/Compactor Equipment


DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

STS13500 Instrumentation and Control System

STS13550 Software Control Block Description

STS13591 Metallic and Fiber Optic Communication Cable and Connectors


DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

STS15010 Valve Installation

STS15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation

STS15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

STS15140 Pipe Supports

STS15250 Mechanical Insulation


DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

STS16050 Electrical

STS16100 Electrical Equipment Installation

STS16220 Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment

Shreveport, LA SP100.2 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION SP100.2

DEFINITIONS The following revisions shall be made in Section 100.2 DEFINITIONS:

1. Insert the following sentence immediately following the last sentence of the definition for City. The terms City and Owner shall have the same meaning in the Contract Documents.

2. Add the following new definition for Design Engineer after the definition for Department.

Design Engineer. The project has been designed by Black & Veatch Corporation, 5400 LBJ Freeway Suite 975, Dallas, TX 75240, who is referred in the Contact Documents as Design Engineer.

3. Replace Standard Work Week with the following definition.

Standard Work Week. The standard work week for contract time on a calendar day basis is Monday through Saturday, excluding City observed Holidays. The standard working hours are between 7:00 am and 7:00 pm. The standard work week for contract time on a working day basis is Monday through Friday, excluding City observed Holidays, and the standard working hours are between 7:30 am and 4:30 pm.

END OF SPECIAL PROVISION

Shreveport, LA SP102.9.1 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION SP102.9.1

EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE Insert the following sentence immediately following the last sentence of Paragraph 102.9.1 Evidence of Insurance. Pursuant to INSURANCE/BOND/INDEMNIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF CONSTURCTION PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTORS, Contractor’s liability insurance policies shall name the Design Engineer as an additional insured.



SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION SP103.5

GUARANTEES Insert the following sentences immediately following the last sentence of item 1 of Paragraph 103.5 Guarantees. The manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided for the length of time specified in the Technical Specifications. If the Technical Specifications require a warranty period less than two years, a two year warranty period shall be provided.


Shreveport, LA SP108.8.5 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION SP108.8.5

INDEMNIFICATION Insert the following sentence immediately following the last sentence of first paragraph of Paragraph 108.8.5 Indemnification. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Design Engineer and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of the Design Engineer.



SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION 108.11

OVERTIME Replace Section 108.11 with the following Section 108.11: 108.11 OVERTIME. Overtime is the time worked outside of the Standard Work Week. Overtime requires written authorization from the Engineer. The Contractor must initiate the process by submitting an Overtime Authorization Request for the Engineer’s authorization at least 48 hours in advance of starting overtime work. Submit a specific description of anticipated work activities planned for each day of overtime. If overtime is authorized, the actual work activities shall be limited to the planned work activities for each day.



SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION SP110.1

SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT Replace the first sentence of the fifth paragraph of Paragraph 110.1 Submitting of Contract in its entirety with the following two sentences. The Contractor shall identify certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to City in advance for acceptance by City by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Contract using the forms in Section STS00440 and Section STS00450. City’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation.



SPECIAL PROVISION

SECTION 1202.1

MOBILIZATION Insert the following paragraph immediately following the last sentence of Paragraph 1202.1. This work includes the signs as specified in Section 4580 Project Identification Signs and preconstruction photographs and preconstruction video recordings specified in Section 4322 Photographic Documentation. This work does not include construction and maintenance of temporary erosion control features.



SECTION 4010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 LOCATION OF WORK

A. The work of this Contract is located in Shreveport, Louisiana at the Lucas Wastewater Treatment Plant (LWWTP) and North Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant (NRWWTP).

B. A non-mandatory pre-bid meeting and associated site walk(s) will be conducted at each of the WWTP facilities.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to replace existing bar screens and with mechanically cleaned bar screens in its entirety as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mobilization/Demobilization at each facility.

2. Removal and disposal of sludge and debris (sediment) in bar screen channels as required to complete work.

3. Demolition and replacement of existing bar screens and wash/compactors, washer compactor discharge chute, and associated structural and electrical and instrumentation appurtenances.

4. Demolition of existing potable water line connections to existing washer/compactors. Field route new potable water line and connect to new washer/compactors.

5. Demolition and replacement of existing grating and handrail in vicinity of bar screens and washer/compactors at both facilities. Installation of elevated control panel platform and modification to existing handrail at LWWTP. Modifications to existing grating and handrail, and relocation of stairs and ladder at NRWWTP for control panel installation.

6. Installation of all electrical and control appurtenances required to operate bar screens and wash/compactors as shown on contract drawings, and specs.

7. All incidental work required to complete work including, but not limited, to dewatering, bypass pumping, and flow diversion, as indicated in the Contract drawings and technical specifications.

1.03 WORK SEQUENCE (REFER TO SECTION 4014)

A. Work shall be performed in phases. Contractor shall coordinate construction schedule and operations with the City of Shreveport. Contractor shall submit a detailed Construction Sequencing Plan for each Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) to the City for review and approval before Construction in accordance with Section 4310 –


Construction Scheduling, which describes the method of construction associated with ensuring uninterrupted/continual plant operations during construction activities. Contractor shall submit Construction Sequencing Plan per Section 4300 – Submittals.

B. Construction Sequencing Plans shall be staged so that the headworks remains in service during construction. All work at the site which could potentially interfere with normal operations at the plant (and/or off-site facilities) or adversely affect hydraulic or process performance shall be coordinated with the plant supervisor. The Construction Sequencing Plan shall show no plant operations (or off-site facility operations) will be adversely affected for more than four (4) hours in any 24 hour period. All requests which impact the normal operation of the plant shall be submitted at least five (5) working days in advance of the proposed shutdown date. Approval for shutdown(s) may be dependent upon influent flow conditions (wet-weather vs. dry-weather) and capacity. The maximum entire plant shutdown period shall be no more than four (4) consecutive hours.

C. In general, construction should proceed in the order outlined below to provide

continuous, uninterrupted flow.

1. Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screens: Bar screens shall be removed in phases, only one bar screen channel shall be taken out of service at a time. The contractor shall demolish and replace the bar screen and wash/compactor press in the out of service channel including all electrical and controls appurtenances and place into service. All testing shall be completed and accepted by City. Once the bar screen and washer/compactor are running and tests are complete, the contractor can begin work in other channel.

2. Refer to the drawings and Section 4014 Construction Sequence for construction sequencing requirements and general recommendations.

D. When flow-diversion (bypass) pumping is required, pumping capacity shall be adequate to handle anticipated average and peak two-hour flows and shall comply with the following:

1. Submit diversion pumping plan, including flow and head condition, for approval by the City and Engineer prior to commencing work

2. Contractor shall use diesel engine driven pumps, rather than electric submersible pumps, where possible.

3. No separate payment will be made for costs associated with diversion pumping. Include incidental costs for diversion pumping in pay items for which diversion pumping is a component.

E. Contractor shall keep Construction Manager informed of all work activities, including daily notification of all crews performing work and the location thereof. To facilitate work planning, Contractor shall submit no later than 3:00 p.m. local time each Friday his work plan for the upcoming week which will identify the work to be performed each day and the location thereof.

1.04 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. Contractor shall coordinate the use of the premises with the City. Facilities, or Process Units requiring shutdown due to construction related activities shall be coordinated with the City as noted in writing one week prior to taking any Facility or Process Unit out of service.


B. Contractor shall maintain facility access and limit the use of the premises for its Work and for storage to allow for:

1. Work by other contractors.

2. City occupancy

C. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for security of all its subcontractors materials and equipment stored on the site.

D. Contractor is required to keep areas used for temporary storage parts and equipment clean and mow the grass around the area.

E. Construction Operations: Limited to the plant property and areas shown or described in the Contract documents.

F. If directed by the Engineer or Owner, move any stored items which interfere with operations of City or other contractors.

G. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to the City and private utility companies (when applicable), excluding weekends and holidays, in advance of required utility shutdown. Coordinate all work as required.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Comply with warranty requirements in accordance with Section 4740 – Warranties and Bonds and the technical specifications. Where warranties differ from that specified in Section 4740 and the technical specifications for mechanical, electrical, and SCADA equipment, Contractor shall provide a warranty with the longest duration and accompanying conditions.

B. Warranties shall commence only after the City has granted substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4014

CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Several areas of construction under this contract must be coordinated with the Operations Personnel and accomplished in a logical order to maintain the process flow and to allow construction to be completed within the time allowed by Contract Documents. Coordinate the activities with the other contractors, if any, to allow orderly and timely completion of all the work.

B. When access through construction areas must be disrupted, provide alternate acceptable access for the plant operators or other contractors.

C. Coordinate the activities in the interface or common areas with these other contractors and the field personnel. Submit to the Engineer a description and schedule as to how the common areas will be utilized, recognizing the required coordination with other contractors and the field personnel.

D. Various interconnections may depend on the closure of various valves and gates. Many of these valves and gates are old and may not seal properly. Coordinate with the Operations Personnel prior to attempting any such closure and provide any corrective measure of temporary facilities necessary to attain the shut-off needed to perform the work at no additional cost to the City and without interrupting the operation.

E. Various interconnections may require temporary partial power shutdown. Make every effort necessary to minimize the shutdown time and coordinate with the Operations Personnel and/or utility authorities prior to attempting any such power shutdown. Furthermore, provide any corrective measure or temporary facilities necessary to perform the work at no additional cost to the City and without interrupting the plant operation.

F. When the work requires an existing facility to be taken out of operation, temporarily or permanently, notify the Engineer in writing 1 week in advance.

G. Where water is required in large quantity for preoperational testing or other use, purchase it from the City. A meter will be installed at the water source by the City (at the Contractor's request). Pay all fees and water usage charges.

H. During Start-Up Testing, make available the manpower, materials, equipment and manufacturer's representatives required to make any necessary adjustments and training.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS

A. The following is a list of constraints to consider in developing the overall plan of construction. This list is not intended to release the Contractor from the responsibility to coordinate the work in any manner which will ensure project completion within the time allowed. Refer to the Section 4010 Summary of Work for detailed scope of work. The following areas are not necessarily listed in their required sequence of construction. A suggested sequence within each area, where necessary, is included.

B. Contractor may choose to work on both WWTP sites simultaneously, provided they have sufficient manpower and equipment to complete work at each facility in a timely manner in accordance with the constraints below.


C. LWWTP

1. Headworks shall be kept in service at all times during construction. Only one mechanical bar screen, washer/compactor, and grit system shall be taken out of service at a time to complete work: a) Shutdown Bar Screen/Grit Channel No. 1. Remove existing Bar Screen No. 1 and

Washer/Compactor No. 1.

b) Install, perform 14-day testing, and place into operation proposed Bar Screen No. 1 and Washer/Compactor No. 1.

c) Shutdown Bar Screen/Grit Channel No. 2. Remove existing Bar Screen No. 2 and Washer/Compactor No. 2.

d) Install, perform 14-day testing, and place into operation proposed Bar Screen No. 2 and Washer/Compactor No. 2.

2. Proposed bar screens and washer/compactors and controls shall be on-site before any

channel is taken out of service. All incidental work that can be completed prior to shutting down channels including electrical and instrumentation appurtenances shall be completed. Work days and hours shall be extended as necessary once screen removal and installation has begun to reduce duration out-of-service periods for channels, bar screens, or washer/compactors to the fullest extent possible. Only one bar screen/compactor shall be taken out of service at a time. Work the subsequent bar screen/compactor shall not begin until after successful start-up and completion of 14-day testing on adjacent bar screen/compactor.

3. Contractor shall submit plan for bypassing flow while working in bar screen channels. In general, bypassing of flow during dry-weather flow conditions shall occur in the following order of precedence, as necessary to complete work: a) Utilize available bar screen channel and screen/compactor to remain in service

while work occurs on adjacent bar screen channel.

b) If flow exceeds 50 MGD, open bypass channel and divert portion of flow to equalization basins through existing 60” piping until the basins are full. If the equalization basins reach full capacity, send full flow from both channels (bypass and available bar screen channel) to bioselector through existing 48” piping.

c) If flow exceeds 100 MGD, provide additional bypass pumping around closed bar screen channel.

d) Contractor shall monitor weather and incoming flow conditions and make provisions to postpone work if necessary. Remove personnel and equipment and open all channels as necessary to prevent potential overflows and damage in the event high wet-weather flows are anticipated.


D. NRWWTP

1. Headworks shall be kept in service at all times during construction. Only one screen and washer/compactor system shall be taken out of service at a time to complete work: a) Shutdown Bar Screen Channel No. 1. Remove existing Bar Screen No. 1 and

Washer/Compactor No. 1.

b) Install, perform 14-day testing, and place into operation proposed Bar Screen No. 1 and Washer/Compactor No. 1.

c) Shutdown Bar Screen Channel No. 2. Remove existing Bar Screen No. 2 and Washer/Compactor No. 2.

d) Install, perform 14-day testing, and place into operation proposed Bar Screen No. 2 and Washer/Compactor No. 2.

2. Proposed bar screens and washer/compactors and controls shall be on-site before any channel is taken out of service. All incidental work that can be completed prior to shutting down channels including electrical and instrumentation appurtenances shall be completed. Work days and hours shall be extended as necessary once screen removal and installation has begun to reduce duration of out-of-service periods for channels, bar screens, or washer/compactors to the fullest extent possible. Only one bar screen/compactor shall be taken out of service at a time. Work the subsequent bar screen/compactor shall not begin until after successful start-up and completion of 14-day testing on adjacent bar screen/compactor.

3. Contractor shall submit plan for bypassing flow while working in bar screen channels. In general, bypassing of flow during dry-weather flow conditions shall occur in the following order of precedence, as necessary to complete work: a) Utilize available bar screen channel and screen/compactor to remain in service

while work occurs on adjacent bar screen channel.

b) If flow exceeds 16 MGD, divert additional flow to equalization basins and Oxidation Ditch No. 1 basin until the basins are full. If the basins reach full capacity, additional flow can be diverted to high rate clarifier influent pump station for screening and then bypass pumped from the pump station to aeration basins. If additional bypass flow capacity is needed, provide additional bypass pumping around the closed bar screen channel.

c) Contractor shall monitor weather and incoming flow conditions and make provisions to postpone work if necessary. Remove personnel and equipment and open all channels as necessary to prevent potential overflows and damage in the event high wet-weather flows are anticipated.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 4025

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section includes requirements for the measurement and payment of various elements of the Work which are not already specified in the Standard Technical specifications.

1.02 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous Construction Items, if indicated in the Bid Form, is considered a provisional amount to be used only if needed. Miscellaneous Construction Items are exclusive of work indicated in the Contract Documents for which payment is included under other items in the Bid Form. No work may be performed under Miscellaneous Construction Items without prior written approval of the City Engineer.

B. Prior to final payment, the original amount provided for Miscellaneous Construction Items will be adjusted to actual costs by deductive Change Order, adjusting the Contract Amount, accordingly.

C. The Contractor shall make no claim, nor receive any compensation, for anticipated profits, loss of profit, damages, or any extra payment due to any unexpended portion of the Miscellaneous Construction Items.

D. Work authorized by the City under Miscellaneous Construction Items may be performed as a lump sum (negotiated before the fact), unit prices (when applicable), or time and material. For work performed under time and material, Contractor shall submit detailed verification (breakdown) of all costs, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTRACT ITEMS

A. ITEM S-001 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION LWWTP

1. Measurement

a. Mobilization/demobilization of all material, equipment, and labor as required to complete work at Lucas WWTP. This item shall be measured as a percentage of Lump Sum for mobilization/demobilization as identified in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.

2. Payment

a. Payment for shall be by the contract bid price per Lump Sum for the item.

B. ITEM S-002 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION NRWWTP

1. Measurement


a. Mobilization/demobilization of all material, equipment, and labor as required to complete work at North Regional WWTP. This item shall be measured as a percentage of the Lump Sum for mobilization/demobilization as identified in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.

2. Payment

a. Payment shall be by the contract bid price per Lump Sum for the item.

C. Technical Specification ITEM S-003 LUCAS WWTP IMPROVEMENTS

1. Measurement

a. LWWTP Improvements including but not limited to demolition and replacement of existing bar screens and washer/compactors at LWWTP, and associated structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation improvements as described in Section 4010. This item shall be measured as a percentage of the Lump Sum for LWWTP Improvements as identified in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.

2. Payment

a. Payment for the LWWTP Improvements shall be by the contract bid price per Lump Sum for the item. Contract bid price shall be full compensation for demolition, sludge removal, furnishing and installing bar screens and washer/compactor press, and all piping, and other structural, electrical and instrumentation appurtenances necessary to provide a complete and operable system in accordance with the contract documents.

D. ITEM S-004 NORTH REGIONAL WWTP IMPROVEMENTS

1. Measurement

a. NRWWTP Improvements including but not limited to demolition and replacement of existing bar screens and washer/compactors at NRWWTP, and associated structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation improvements as described in Section 4010. This item shall be measured as a percentage of the Lump Sum for NRWWTP Improvements as identified in the Contractor’s Schedule of Values.

2. Payment

a. Payment for the NRWWTP Improvements shall be by the contract bid price per Lump Sum for the item. Contract bid price shall be full compensation for demolition, sludge removal, furnishing and installing bar screens and washer/compactor press, and all piping, and other structural, electrical and instrumentation appurtenances necessary to provide a complete and operable system in accordance with the contract documents.

E. ITEM S-005 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ITEMS

1. Measurement and Payment

a. This is a lump sum Contract Item for contingency Work, if any, to be identified by the Engineer during construction. Measurement and payment will be identified with authorization to perform Work under this item.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4026

PAY ESTIMATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Pay Estimates will be prepared by the Engineer. Supporting documentation and other items shall be prepared by the Contractor.

B. Unit Price Work will be measured for payment as specified in Standard Technical specification Section 111.

C. Stockpiled or Stored Material will be measured for payment as specified in Standard Technical specification Section 111. Refer to Standard Technical specification Section 111.7 for minimum storage period, maximum percentage of contract price, and other requirements.

D. The accepted Schedule of Values, specified in Technical Technical specifications Section 4370, will be used as the basis of payment for Contract Items measured by lump sum.

1.02 PREPARATION OF PAY ESTIMATES

A. Daily reports will be prepared by the Engineer on each working day, listing quantities of Unit Price Work and percentages of work items in the Schedule of Values completed during each working day. Each daily report shall be signed by Engineer and Contractor, to acknowledge agreement on completed Work identified in daily report.

B. The cutoff date for pay estimates is the last day of each month. The Engineer will prepare the Pay Estimate based on a summary of completed work items recorded on the daily reports each month.

1.03 DOCUMENTATION ASSOCIATED WITH PARTIAL PAYMENTS

A. Prepare and furnish additional documentation to coincide with each partial payment. The value of each item of required documentation on a monthly basis, established in the approved Schedule of Values or in respective Contract Items, will be included in partial payments whenever the respective item is provided in a timely manner.

B. After receipt of the first partial payment and prior to receipt of subsequent payments, certify in writing that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid for work and materials from previous partial payments received (less any retainage) by the Contractor.

C. On a monthly basis, furnish a completed Monthly Subcontractor Payment and Utilization Report – FSC Form 5 for first-tier and second-tier subcontractors.

D. On a monthly basis, furnish an updated construction schedule as required in Technical Technical specification Section 4310.

E. Provide construction photographs in accordance with Technical Technical specification Section 4322.


1.04 STOCKPILED AND STORED MATERIALS

A. Furnish a monthly summary of stockpiled and stored materials in a format acceptable to the Engineer. Summary shall clearly indicate materials previously installed, materials received and installed during the current month, and net materials on hand during the current month. Summary shall identify the following information.

1. Contract Item number or scheduled item number.

2. Description of specific material

B. Furnish the following documentation for stockpiled and stored materials

1. Copies of invoices from supplier or manufacturer verifying the cost and quantity of material

2. If storage is on private property, a copy of the lease or agreement granting the Department right of entry to property

3. Certified copies of invoices from the supplier or manufacturer of each item for which payment has been made with the previous payment from the City. All such invoices shall state the amount received by the supplier or manufacturer as payment in full for the materials.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 4035

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Promptly implement change order procedures.

1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.

2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/ force account basis.

3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.

B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:

1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work.

2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the Work.

C. City will designate in writing the persons who are authorized to sign Field Orders, Miscellaneous Construction Authorizations, Work Change Directives, and Change Orders.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard Technical specification Section 100 Definitions and Abbreviations

B. Standard Technical specification Section 103 Scope of Work

C. Standard Technical specification Section 105 Changes in Work.

1.03 FIELD ORDER

A. Engineer may issue a Field Order for Contractor to proceed with a minor change which does not involve a change in Contract Amount or Contract Time.

B. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract Documents, order minor changes in the work, and/or memorialize trade-off agreements. Field Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments as necessary to define details of the change.

1.04 CONTRACT CHANGE REQUEST

A. City may initiate changes to plans, technical specifications, character of work, or quantity of work by submitting a Change Proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include:

1. Detailed description of the Change, Products and location of the change in the project.

2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Technical specifications.

3. The projected time span for making the change and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized.


4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.

5. Such request is for information only and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop work in progress.

B. Contractor may initiate changes in specified methods of construction and changes to plans and technical specifications which do not materially affect the Work, and which can be made at a reduction in cost or at no additional cost to the City, by submitting a written Change Proposal to the Engineer, containing:

1. Description of the proposed changes.

2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.

3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Amount and the Contract Time.

4. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Amount or Contract Time, as appropriate.

1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS

A. Support each quotation for a lump-sum proposal and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Engineer to evaluate the quotation.

B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations

1. Labor required.

2. Equipment required.

3. Products required.

a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.

b. Quantities required.

4. Taxes, insurance and bonds.

5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.

6. Overhead and profit.

7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

C. Support each claim for additional costs and for work done on a time-and-material/force account basis, with documentation as required in Standard Technical specification Section 105.3.2 Payment.

D. Document requests for Substitutions for Products as specified in Section 4630.

1.06 AUTHORIZATION OF CONTRACT CHANGES

A. City may authorize changes or extra work that involves changes to Contract Price or Contract Time with a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization, a Work Change Directive, or a formal Change Order.


B. City may issue a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization to authorize changes or extra work with payment from the Miscellaneous Construction Items, if indicated on the Bid Form, and changes to Contract Time. Authorization will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. It will designate the amount of payment and any change in Contract Time. A Miscellaneous Construction Authorization does not change the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. Authorized changes to Contract Time will be included in a subsequent Change Order.

C. City may issue a Work Change Directive for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order, either with or without initiating a change by first submitting a Change Proposal Request. Authorization will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Amount and any change in Contract Time. A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. Changes to the Contract Amount and the Contract Time will be included in a subsequent Change Order.

D. A formal Change Order is the only document that can change the Contract Amount and the Contract Time. City may issue a Change Order to change the Contract Time as authorized in a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization, to change the Contract Amount and Contract Time as designated in a Work Change Directive, and to authorize extra work and changes initiated by the City.

1.07 METHODS OF COMPENSATION FOR CHANGES

A. Content of Lump Sum/Fixed Price changes will be based on

1. Engineer’s Change Proposal Request and Contractor’s responsive Change Proposal as mutually agreed between City and Contractor

2. Contractor’s Change Proposal, as recommended by the Engineer

B. Content of Unit Price changes will be based on

1. Engineer’s definition of the scope of the changes

2. Contractor’s Change Proposal, as recommended by the Engineer

3. Survey of completed Work

C. Unit Prices will be those stated in the Contract or those mutually agreed upon between the City and the Contractor.

D. When the price for changes or extra work cannot be agreed upon, City will issue a Work Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed on the basis of time and materials/force account.

E. At the end of each day, submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in Standard Technical specification Section 105.3.2.1. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work.

1.08 ALLOWABLE COSTS FOR CHANGES

A. Allowable labor costs consist of payroll costs in the direct employ of the Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by the City and the Contractor. Such employees shall include superintendents, foremen, and


other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedules of jab classifications, are excluded from allowable labor costs. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expense of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, may be included in the above to the extent authorized by the City.

B. Allowable material costs consist of the cost of materials furnished and incorporated into the work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials shall accrue to the City, and the Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

C. Allowable labor costs for Subcontractors are the same as specified for the Contractor.

D. Allowable equipment costs for owned or rented equipment shall be paid by the following conditions.

1. Allowable rates for owned or borrowed equipment shall be the estimated cost reimbursement rates included within the original bid prices. If the Contractor’s established original bid rates are not available, the allowable rates shall not exceed those shown in the Rental Rate Guide Book for Construction Equipment (Blue Book) Volumes 1, 2, or 3 as applicable. If Blue Book rates are used, reimbursement will not be made for owned service trucks or other support equipment and vehicles, since their costs are normally included in equipment operating costs.

2. Owned pickups, if directly used in the performance of extra work, are eligible for reimbursement at the flat rate of $50.00 per day. If used by a superintendent or used primarily for transportation of employees, their costs are included in overhead and separate reimbursements will not be made.

3. Payment for owned or borrowed equipment will be made for the actual hours used in the extra work. Payment will not be made for time lost for breakdowns, repairs, or time after equipment is no longer needed for the extra work. If equipment is used intermittently while dedicated to the extra work, payment will be made for the duration that the equipment is dedicated to the extra work, but not more than 8 hours per day. While actually working during second and third shift work, payment will be made at one half the Blue Book ownership costs plus the estimated hourly operating costs. No reimbursement will be made while not actually working.

4. If ordered held available for extra work, idled owned or borrowed equipment will be paid for at an hourly standby rate computed as one half of the agreed working rate per hour, excluding operating costs. Reimbursement for standby will not be paid when the equipment would normally be idle, such as Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, days when weather conditions prevent working, during breakdowns or servicing, or


when the equipment has actually worked or been paid for 8 or more hours in the day or 40 or more hours in the week.

5. Rental rates for rented or leased equipment shall be as paid by the Contractor. The allowable reimbursement for rented equipment shall be the agreed invoice cost. The invoice shall be marked “PAID” and initialed or signed by the Contractor. Allowable reimbursement for operating costs shall be as agreed between the City and Contractor.

1.09 ALLOWABLE MARKUP FOR CHANGES

A. The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (markup) for Lump Sum/Fixed Price changes shall be a fee based on the markup provided in Standard Technical specification Section 105.3.2.4.

B. The requirements of this paragraph apply to Time and Materials/Force Account changes.

1. For allowable labor costs, the markup shall be [10] percent.

2. For allowable material costs, the markup shall be [10] percent.

3. For allowable subcontractor costs, the markup shall be [5] percent.

4. For owned, borrowed, or rented equipment, the markup shall be [10] percent.

1.10 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME

A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Changes to Contract Time identified in a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization or a Work Change Directive is evidence that City and Contractor expect that the change will be incorporated into a subsequently issued Change Order.

B. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delay beyond control of the Contractor, the Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay.

C. If anyone for whom the City is responsible delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then the Contractor will be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Time or both. The Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time.

D. If the Contractor is delayed in performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under control of the City, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of City and Contractor, then the Contractor will be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time, if such adjustment is essential to the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Such an adjustment shall be the Contractor’ sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this paragraph.

E. For the purpose of this technical specification, a delay extends the duration of critical path. With any request for changes to Contract Time, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sufficient documented evidence of the impact of a delay to the critical path. Documentation shall include identifying work activities affected by the delay, demonstrating that the affected work activities are critical path activities, and the impact to the critical path.


F. With any request for changes to Contract Time for delays related to abnormal weather conditions, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sufficient documented evidence to demonstrate the difference between normal and abnormal weather conditions for the Project location.

1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS

A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values to record each change as a separate item of work, and to record the adjusted Contract Amount.

B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.

1. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes.

C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in As-Built Drawings.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 4038

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of Requests for Information (RFIs).

1.02 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the Contractor believes that additional information or clarification of a contract requirement is needed, they may initiate an RFI.

B. The RFI process shall be limited to the clarification of technical and/or administrative matters. While the response to an RFI might lead to a change in the contract scope, cost or time, RFIs are not a substitute to the notification requirements stipulated in the General Provisions.

C. A response to an RFI is not an authorization to perform any additional work that would require a change order or written amendment to the contract. If the Contractor believes the response an RFI requires a change to the Contract, Contractor shall promptly provide written notice to the Engineer in accordance with the General Provisions.

D. RFIs are not a substitute for the Submittals process specified elsewhere.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ORIGINATION

A. The Contactor shall originate RFIs using the form appended to this Section.

1. RFIs shall be numbered consecutively. In the event that an answered RFI results in a follow-up inquiry, the follow-up shall maintain the same number as the original, appended with a suffix.

2. Include Technical specification Section(s), Drawing(s), or detail(s) for which information is requested.

3. Attach drawings, sketches, photographs or other relevant information.

4. If the question concerns an interpretation of the Contract Documents, enter the Contractor's interpretation.

5. Indicate the date by which the Contractor requests a reply.

6. Sign the upper portion of the form.

B. RFIs submitted directly to the Engineer by subcontractors or suppliers will not be accepted. When a subcontractor or supplier generates a request for information or clarification to the Contractor, Contractor shall incorporate such requests into the required format, assign the next number, and sign.


C. Contractor shall maintain a log of all RFIs including the date originated, date delivered, and date answered.

3.02 PROCESSING

A. Contractor shall submit all RFIs to the Engineer for processing.

B. All RFIs will be reviewed and answered by the Engineer.

C. The Engineer will generally respond to RFIs within seven calendar days of receipt – depending on the complexity of the inquiry.

3.03 RESPONSES

A. If the RFI contains sufficient clarity, the Engineer will insert a response in the lower portion of the RFI form, sign and date the response; and, return the completed form to the Contractor.

B. If the RFI does not contain sufficient clarity, the Engineer may request additional information from the Contractor.

C. Engineer will maintain a log of all RFIs including the date received and date returned to Contractor.

END OF SECTION (Standard RFI Form Follows)


Request for Information

Project Name:

City’s Project No.: Program Project No.:

Contractor:

RFI No.:

Date:

Subject:

Spec Section: Drawing: Detail:

QUESTION:

If the above question concerns an interpretation of the Contract Documents, the Contractor's interpretation is:

Please Respond by This Date:

Submitted by Contractor: Date:

Received by [ insert ]: Date:

RESPONSE:

By: Date:

Distribution: Contractor,City, Engineer, File, Field, RFI Notebook


SECTION 4045

CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section covers the cutting, coring, rough and finished patching of holes and openings Holes and opening maybe in existing construction, or in parts of new construction. Procedures for cutting and patching will be the same for either condition.

B. All cutting, coring, and finish patching shall be performed by the Contractor. Finish patching is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by the trade associated with the application of the particular finish.

C. Provide all cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the work or to:

1. Make its several parts fit together properly.

2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill timed or improperly scheduled work.

3. Remove and replace defective work.

4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.

6. Provide penetrations of structural surfaces and materials for installation of piping, ductwork, equipment and electrical conduit.

7. Provide penetrations of non-structural surfaces and materials for installation of piping, ductwork, equipment and electrical conduit. The determination of what is a nonstructural surface or material shall be made by the Engineer.

8. Remove, install, or relocate materials or equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 4300, a written request prior to executing any cutting or alteration which is not shown or detailed on the Contract Documents which affects or requires:

1. Cutting structural members.

2. Holes drilled in beams or other structural members.

3. Work of the City or any separate contractor.

4. Structural value or integrity of any element of the project.

5. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems.

6. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.


7. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

B. Request shall include:

1. Identification of the project.

2. Description of affected work.

3. The reason for cutting, alteration or excavation.

4. Effect on work of City or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of project.

5. Description of proposed work:

a. Method and extent of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.

b. Trades who will execute the work.

c. Products proposed to be used.

d. Extent of refinishing to be done.

6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.

7. If the work is considered out of scope, provide a cost proposal.

8. Confirmation of coordination with any separate contractor whose work will be affected.

9. Related shutdown requests if required to do the work.

10. Request for hot work permit if required to do the work.

C. Submit written notice to the Engineer designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.

D. When a written request is required, do not proceed with the work until a written notice to proceed is received from the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Comply with technical specifications and standards for each specific product involved. Where there is no equivalent technical specification, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer who will provide a technical specification for the materials to be used.

B. Materials for finish patching shall be equal to those of adjacent construction. Where existing materials are no longer available, use materials with equivalent properties and that will provide the same appearance. The materials are to be approved by the Engineer prior to their use.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of work.

C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Engineer in writing; do not proceed with work until the Engineer has provided further instructions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work.

B. Protect surrounding materials and equipment prior to starting work.

C. Contain and control cooling liquids and slurry produced by cutting and coring operations.

D. When cutting or coring will result in a structure or equipment being exposed, provide adequate weather protection.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.

B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. When excavating in close proximity to piping, duct banks or other items subject to damage, use hand excavation.

C. All equipment and workplace safety shall conform to OSHA standards and technical specifications pertaining to plugs, noise and fume pollution, wiring and maintenance.

D. Where possible, employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:

1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

E. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.

F. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:

1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.

2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

H. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises.


3.04 CORING

A. All coring shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching. Locate the rebar before coring to minimize cut-throughs

B. Coring shall be performed with an approved non-impact rotary tool with diamond core drills.

C. Size of holes shall be suitable for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment or mechanical seals to be installed.

D. Fit work to minimize space to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

E. Fit to pipes and other penetrations in tanks to be water tight using seals or other methods defined in the technical specifications.

F. All holes cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs or arches shall be core drilled unless otherwise approved. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in this type of work.

G. If holes are cored through floor slabs they shall be drilled from below where possible. If holes are drilled from above, provide protection and containment below the area being drilled to catch the plug and contain liquid and slurry.

3.05 CUTTING

A. All cutting shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching.

B. Fit work to minimize space to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

C. Cutting shall be performed with a concrete saw and diamond saw blades of proper size.

D. Provide for control of slurry generated by sawing operation on both sides of wall and from below if cutting a floor.

E. When cutting a reinforced concrete wall or floor, the cutting shall be done so as not to damage the bond between the concrete and reinforcing steel left in structure. Cut shall be made so that steel neither protrudes nor is recessed from face of the cut.

F. Adequate bracing of area to be cut shall be installed prior to start of cutting. Check area during sawing operations for partial cracking and provide additional bracing as required to prevent a partial release of cut area during sawing operations.

G. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel.

H. Saw cut concrete and masonry prior to breaking out sections.

I. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching.

J. All cutting of structural members shall be done in a manner directed by the Engineer.

K. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the equipment, ducting, piping or conduit.


L. When existing conduits or pipe sleeves are cut off at the floor line or wall line, they shall be filled with grout or suitable patching material.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

B. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work.

C. Maintain excavations free from water.

3.07 PATCHING

A. Rough patching shall be such as to bring the cut or cored area flush with existing construction unless otherwise shown.

B. Finished patching shall match existing surfaces as approved.

C. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed.

D. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better.

E. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed to include the joint between the existing material and the patch.

F. Equipment damaged during cutting and patching shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Engineer's sole discretion and at the expense of the Contractor doing the work.

G. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finishes using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted in accordance with the field painting requirements specified in Section STS09940 at no additional cost to the City.

H. Slurry or tailings resulting from coring or cutting operations shall be contained and vacuumed or otherwise removed from the area following drilling or cut.

I. Equipment shall be protected against mechanical and water damage during cutting and patching. Provide protective covers or use other means such as temporary relocation to protect equipment that is at risk of damage from the cutting and patching

J. Provide protection for existing equipment, utilities and critical areas against water or other damage caused by drilling operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4200

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Engineer will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work.

1. Prepare agenda for meetings.

2. Make physical arrangements for meetings.

3. Preside at meetings.

4. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions.

5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 15 working days after each meeting.

a. To participants in the meeting.

b. To parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

B. Representatives of Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

C. Attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Attend a preconstruction meeting.

B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Engineer.

C. Attendance

1. Engineer and his/her professional consultants.

2. Resident Project Representative.

3. Contractor.

4. Major Subcontractors.

5. Major suppliers.

6. Utilities

7. Others as appropriate.

D. Suggested Agenda Items

1. Introduction of key project personnel


2. Lines of communication/procedures

3. Preconstruction submittal requirements

4. Key contract dates

5. Correspondence routing and distribution

6. Payment procedures

7. Submittal and shop drawing procedures

8. Project progress meetings

9. Project progress reports

10. City requirements and special project procedures

11. RPR duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority

12. Permits and coordination with local building officials

13. Safety procedures

14. QM procedures

15. Construction work schedule (days, hours, holidays, overtime)

16. Control of work requirements

17. Fair Share reporting requirements (Form 5)

18. Material storage requirements

19. Contractor’s staging area

20. Field Offices

21. Coordination with utilities

22. Homeowner/business notification and citizen complaints

23. Construction photographs and record drawings

24. Testing laboratory procedures

25. Conformed documents

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Attend periodic meetings at regular intervals determined by the Engineer.

B. Attend called meetings as required by progress of the Work.

C. Location of the meetings: Project field office of Contractor or Engineer, or City Hall, or another location identified by the Engineer.

D. Attendance


1. Engineer and his/her professional consultants as needed.

2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.

3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.

4. Others as appropriate.

E. Suggested Agenda Items

1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.

2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.

3. Submittals

4. RFI’s

5. Field Orders, Work Change Directives, Change Orders

6. Field observations, problems and conflicts.

7. Current Construction Schedule.

8. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period.

9. Coordination of work activities.

F. Attend progress meetings and study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and equipment, progress of the Work, etc.

G. Provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting.

H. Provide an updated and accurate project schedule of work to be performed in the next 30 days.



END OF SECTION

Shreveport, LA 4300 11/08/2017

Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL

B&V PN 173506

SECTION 4300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the requirements for compiling, processing and transmitting submittals required for execution of the project.

B. The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings, working drawings, fabrication details, mix designs, control diagrams, product and material data as required in the Contract Documents.

All submittals and supporting data, catalogs, schedules, etc., shall be submitted as the instruments of the Contractor, who shall be responsible for their accuracy, completeness, and coordination. Such responsibility shall not be delegated, in whole or in part, to subcontractors or suppliers. These submittals may be prepared by the Contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers, but the Contractor shall confirm that materials, dimensions, catalog numbers, technical data and performance criteria meet all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, while conforming to structural, space, and access conditions at the point of installation. Designation of work “by others,” if shown in submittals, shall mean that the Work will be the responsibility of the Contractor rather than the subcontractor or supplier who prepared the submittals. The Engineer will not accept receipt of submittals directly from subcontractors or vendors.

The Contractor shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the Engineer in each case where its submittal may affect the work of another Contractor of the City. The Contractor shall ensure coordination of submittals among the related crafts and subcontractors.

Submittals shall be prepared in such form that data can be identified with the applicable specification. The data shall clearly demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and shall relate to the specific equipment or piece of work to be furnished. Where manufacturer’s standard drawings and catalog sheets are employed, they shall be marked clearly to show what portion of the data is applicable to this project.

C. Variances - Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of re-submittal (resubmission), of all deviations from previous submissions of that particular submittal, except those deviations which are the specific result of prior comments from the Engineer.

D. Submittals are categorized into two types: Action Submittals and Informational Submittals, as follows:

1. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by the Contractor that requires the Engineer's approval. The following are examples of action submittals:

a. Shop drawings.

b. Product data.

c. Samples.



B&V PN 173506

d. Operation & maintenance manuals.

2. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by the Contractor that does not necessarily require the Engineer’s technical review and approval. The following are examples of informational submittals:

a. Submittal Registry.

b. Construction Schedule.

c. Schedule of Values

d. Statements of Qualifications.

e. Health and Safety Plans.

f. Construction Photography and Videography.

g. Work Plans.

h. Proposed Testing Procedures.

i. Test Records and Reports.

j. Test and Start-Up Reports.

k. Certifications.

l. Outage Requests.

m. As-Built Drawings.

n. Warranties and Bonds.

o. Contract Close-out documents.

p. Submittals required by laws, regulations and governing agencies.

1.02 PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (UNIFIER)

A. Transmittal Procedures:

All submittals shall be transmitted electronically from the Contractor through the City’s Project Management Information System (PMIS) via the internet. Training on the PMIS will be provided to the Contractor free of charge prior to the start of the project.

B. Submittal Registry:

The Contractor shall submit a submittal registry listing all anticipated submittals for the project to the City at, or before the pre-construction meeting. The submittal registry will include, but not limited to; technical shop drawings, product data, samples, project baseline schedule and monthly updates, schedule of values, permit requirements, test results and certifications, operations and maintenance manuals, shutdown/outage requests, vendor training outline/plans, warranties and bonds, record drawings, and spare parts. After review and approval of the submittal registry, the City will load the list of submittals onto the PMIS. This step must be completed first in order to enable transmittal of all subsequent submittals.



B&V PN 173506

The Submittal registry list will have the following information:

1. Submittal Number – The submittal number will be made up of the applicable specification section number (3, 4 or 5 digits), a period, and the two digit number (XXXX.XX). The two digit number after the period is the sequential number for each item to be submitted under each specification section, in chronological order submitted, starting at .01.

2. Submittal Description – A description of what the submittal contains, or a list of items included in the submittal.

3. Substitution – Indicate if the item being submitted is a substitution from the specified product or vendor.

4. Submittal Date – Prepare a schedule indicating when submittals are required to support the as-planned construction schedule. The submittal schedule shall allow sufficient time for preparation and submittal, review and approval, and fabrication and delivery to support the construction schedule. Indicate the anticipated date for transmitting the submittal to the City.

5. Example:

Submittal # Description Substitution Date

2000.01 PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe NO 03/24/15

C. Submittals shall be clear and legible, and of sufficient size for legibility and clarity of

information and data. Submittals shall include the following information on a cover sheet or transmittal.

1. Product Description

2. Indication of Contractor's approval.

3. Contractor's Certification statement. (action submittals only)

4. Identification of variances, if any.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS.

A. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings may include, but are not necessarily limited to, custom prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled information, setting diagrams, actual shop work manufacturing instructions, custom templates, valve schedules, wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, equipment inspection and test reports, and performance curves and certifications, as applicable to the work.

2. Contractor shall verify all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and coordinate each item with other related shop drawings and the Contract requirements.

3. All details on shop drawings shall clearly show the relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure and where correct fabrication of the work



B&V PN 173506

depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted.

4. Detailed installation drawings (sewers, equipment, piping, electrical conduits and controls, HVAC work, and plumbing, etc.) shall be prepared and submitted for review and approval by the Engineer prior to installing such work. Installation drawings shall be to-scale and shall be fully dimensioned.

5. Piping working drawings shall show the laying dimensions of all pipes, fittings, valves, as well as the equipment to which it is being connected. In addition, all pipe supports shall be shown.

6. Equipment working drawings shall show all equipment dimensions, anchor bolts, support pads, piping connections and electrical connections. In addition, show clearances required around such equipment for maintenance of the equipment.

7. Electrical working drawings shall show conduits, junction boxes, disconnects, control devices, lighting fixtures, support details, control panels, lighting and power panels, and Motor Control Centers. Coordinate all locations with the Contract Documents and the Contractor's other working drawings.

B. Maintenance of Traffic Plans: Prepare and submit maintenance of traffic plans where and when required by the Contract Documents and by local ordinances or regulations.

C. Product Data: Product data include, but are not limited to, the manufacturer’s standard prepared data for manufactured products (catalog data), such as the product specifications, installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, rough-in diagrams and templates, product photographs (or diagrams), wiring diagrams, performance curves, quality control inspection and reports, certifications of compliance (as specified or otherwise required), mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions, recommended spare parts and product warranties, as applicable.

D. Samples.

1. Furnish samples required by the Contract Documents for the Engineer's approval. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in the work unless and until approved by the Engineer.

2. Samples specified in individual Specification Sections, include, but are not limited to: physical examples of the work (such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work), small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and other specified units of work.

3. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract Requirements.

4. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the Engineer or stored at the site of the work. Approved samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in Work shall match the approved samples. Samples which fail testing or are not approved will be returned to the Contractor at his expense, if so requested at time of submission.



B&V PN 173506

E. Contractor's Certification - Each submittal and sample shall have affixed to it the following Certification Statement:

"Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved submittals and all Contract requirements."

F. Project work, materials, fabrication, and installation shall conform to approved shop drawings, product data and applicable samples.

G. No portion of the work requiring a submittal or sample shall be started, nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed before approval of such item. Procurement, fabrication, delivery or installation of products or materials that do not conform to approved submittals shall be at the Contractor's risk. Furthermore, such products or materials delivered or installed without approved submittals, or in non-conformance with the approved submittals will not be eligible for payment until such time as the product or material is approved or brought into compliance with approved submittals. Engineer will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in assembled manuals as specified. Such manuals shall include detailed instructions for City personnel on safe operation procedures, controls, start-up, shut-down, emergency procedures, storage, protection, lubrication, testing, trouble-shooting, adjustments, repair procedures, and other maintenance requirements.

I. Site Usage: For Work on City property other than public rights-of-way, submit a proposed site staging plan including but not limited to the locations of office trailers, storage trailers, employee parking and material laydown. Such plan shall be a graphic presentation (drawing) of the proposed plan and shall include temporary utility connections and on-site traffic modifications as applicable.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Registry: Prepare and submit a submittal registry as specified in this section.

B. Construction Schedule: Prepare and submit construction schedules and monthly status reports as specified in Section 4310 Construction Schedules.

C. Schedule of Values: On projects consisting of lump sums (in whole or in part) submit a proposed schedule of values providing a breakdown of lump sum items into reasonably small components – generally desegregated by building, area, and/or discipline. Refer to Section 4370 Schedule of Values for additional requirements. The purpose of the schedule of values is for processing partial payment applications. If requested by the Engineer, provide sufficient substantiation for all or some items as necessary to determine the proposed schedule of values is a reasonable representation of the true cost breakdown of the Work. The schedule of values shall not be unbalanced to achieve early payment or over-payment in excess of the value of work or any other inequitable distribution of the costs. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the schedule of values is unbalanced, Contractor shall reallocate components to achieve a balanced schedule acceptable to Engineer.

D. Statements of Qualifications: Provide evidence of qualification, certification, or registration, as required in the Contract Documents, to verify qualifications of licensed land surveyor,



B&V PN 173506

professional engineer, materials testing laboratory, specialty subcontractor, technical specialist, consultant, specialty installer, and other professionals.

E. Health and Safety Plans: Prepare and submit a Health and Safety Plan (HASP) as specified in Section 4103.

F. Construction Photography and Videography: Provide periodic construction photographs and videography as specified in Section 4322 – including preconstruction photographs and/or video, monthly progress photos and/or video and post-construction photographs and/or video.

G. Work Plans: For Work in public rights-of-way and servitudes, prepare and submit work plans to indicate the number of simultaneous work sites, the planned sequence of construction, temporary street closures, and to demonstrate to the Engineer that Contractor has adequately planned the means and methods of construction to minimize unnecessary inconvenience to the public. Furnish updated work plans for each monthly progress meeting.

H. Storage of Materials on Private Property: If private property is used for storage purposes, furnish copies of written permission from owner and lessee as specified in Section 106.9.

I. Outage Requests: Provide sufficient notification of any outages required (electrical, flow processes, etc.) as may be required to tie-in new work into existing facilities. Unless specified otherwise elsewhere, a minimum of seven calendar days’ notice shall be provided.

J. Test Records and Reports: Provide copies of all test records and reports as specified in the various technical specifications.

K. Vendor Training Outlines/Plans: At least two weeks before scheduled training of City personnel, provide lesson plans for vendor training in accordance with the specification for O&M manuals.

L. Test and Start-up Reports: Manufacturer shall perform all pre-start-up installation inspection, calibrations, alignments, and performance testing as specified in the respective Specification Section. Provide copies of all such test and start-up reports.

M. Certifications - Provide various certifications as required by the specifications. Such certifications shall be signed by an officer (of the firm) or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Certifications may include, but are not limited to:

1. Welding certifications and welders qualifications

2. Certifications of Installation, Testing and Training for all equipment

3. Material Testing reports furnished by an independent testing firm

4. Certifications from manufacturer(s) for specified factory testing

N. As-Built Drawings: Before Final Completion, submit a record of all changes during construction as specified in Section 4720 As-Built Drawings.

O. Submittals required by laws, regulations and governing agencies.

1. Prepare and submit all documentation required by state or local law, regulation or government agency directly to the applicable agency. This includes, but is not limited



B&V PN 173506

to, notifications, reports, certifications, certified payroll (for projects subject to wage requirements) and other documentation required to satisfy all requirements. Provide to Engineer one copy of each submittal made in accordance with this paragraph.

2. Prepare and submit all documentation required by funding agencies. This includes, but is not limited to segregated pay estimates and change orders when required to properly allocate funds to different funding sources; and certified payrolls for projects subject to wage requirements. Provide one copy of each submittal made in accordance with this paragraph to the Engineer.

P. Warranties and Bonds: Assemble a booklet or binder of all warranties and bonds as specified in the various technical specifications and in accordance with the specification on Warranties and Bonds; and provide two originals to the Engineer.

Q. Contract Close-Out Documents: Submit Contract documentation as indicated in the specification for Contract Closeout.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SAMPLE TRANSMITTALS

A. Transmit submittal documents for each sample through the PMIS. Deliver samples directly to the City or the office of the Engineer, as indicated in the Contract Documents or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Prepare separate transmittal sheets for each sample with sufficient information to correctly associate the sample with the submittal documents.

3.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's Responsibilities

1. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work of other related Sections, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required). Coordinate with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequenced activities. Extensions to the Contract Time will not be approved for the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.

2. Prepare and transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to allow for possible need of re-submittals, including the specified review time for the Engineer.

3. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate submittals and O&M manuals that require review by more than one engineering discipline. Resubmittals will be subject to the same review.

4. Submittals of operation and maintenance data shall be provided within 30 days of approval of the related submittal(s).

5. Before submission to the Engineer, review submittals as follows:

a. make corrections and add field measurements, as required



B&V PN 173506

b. identify and describe each and every deviation or variation from Contract documents or from previous submissions, except those specifically resulting from a comment from the Engineer on a previous submission

c. include the required Contractor's Certification statement

d. provide field measurements (as needed)

e. coordinate with other submittals

f. indicate relationships to other features of the Work

g. highlight information applicable to the Work and/or delete information not applicable to the Work

6. If Contractor considers any correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, provide written notice thereof to the Engineer immediately; and do not release for manufacture before such notice has been received by the Engineer.

B. Engineer’s Responsibilities

1. Engineer will not review submittals that do not include the Contractor's approval stamp and required certification statement. Such submittals will be returned to the Contractor, without action, for correction.

2. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a submittal is incomplete, that submittal will be returned to the Contractor for completion. Such submittals may be returned with comments from Engineer indicating the deficiencies requiring correction.

3. If submittals meet the specified requirements, Engineer will forward copies to appropriate reviewer(s). Otherwise, noncompliant submittals will be returned to the Contractor without action.

4. Submittals which are transmitted in accordance with the specified requirements will be reviewed within 21 days. The time for review will commence upon receipt of the submittal in the PMIS.

5. Engineer may elect not to respond to Contractor regarding informational submittals meeting the Contract requirements. If an informational submittal does not comply with the Contract requirements, Engineer will respond accordingly to the Contractor within 21 days. Thereafter, the Contractor shall perform the required corrective action, including retesting, if needed, until the submittal, in the opinion of the Engineer, is in conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Review of Submittals

1. The review of shop drawings, working drawings, product data and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed:

a. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements

b. as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials



B&V PN 173506

c. as approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein

2. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.

3. If the submittals describe variations and indicate a deviation from the Contract requirements that, in the opinion of the Engineer are in the interest of the City and are so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed submittals without noting an exception.

4. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with one of the following codes.

a. "APPROVED" – This code is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the material for manufacture.

b. "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS NOT required. The Contractor may release the material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.

c. "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is assigned when a written confirmation of the notations and comments is required. The Contractor may release the material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. Written confirmation shall specifically address each notation and comment. Confirmation shall be furnished to the Engineer within 21 days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the confirmation.

d. "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is assigned when a written confirmation of the notations and comments is required and are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the entire package. This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal shall be furnished to the Engineer within 30 days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.

e. "NOT APPROVED" – This code is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the contract documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor.

f. “COMMENTS ATTACHED” – This code is assigned where there are comments attached to the returned submittal, which provide additional information to aid the Contractor.

g. "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED (Not subject to Engineer's Review or Approval)" – This code is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the Engineer's technical review and approval, and is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledging receipt of means and methods of construction work plans, field conformance test reports, and health and safety plans.



B&V PN 173506

5. Repetitive Reviews: Submittals will be reviewed no more than 3 times at the City's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at the Contractor's expense. Reimburse the City for all costs invoiced by Engineer for the forth and subsequent reviews.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review, a schedule that clearly shows the sequence and interdependencies of activities required for complete performance of the work required for this project, showing the order in which the Contractor and his Subcontractors propose to carry on the Work, and the dates upon which he proposes to start and complete the entire scope of work, including the dates for submittals and approval of samples and shop drawings, and the procurement of materials, plant, and equipment. The construction schedule shall consist of a critical path method (CPM) network presented in a time-scaled graphic (print-out).

B. The construction schedule shall, in general, determine the order in which the Work is to proceed. The Engineer shall review the Contractor’s approach to meet the specific requirements.

C. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating his own schedule as well as construction activities of others directed by his Subcontractors. The schedule shall include activities to be performed by Subcontractors and will demonstrate the coordination of their work. The contractor will maintain the overall project construction schedule, of which the Sub-contractor’s construction schedule will be a part.

D. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction equipment as may be necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the submitted schedule.

E. The Contractor shall designate the individual or an authorized representative who shall be responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and reports. This individual or representative of the Contractor shall have direct project control and complete authority for updating and maintaining the Contractor’s schedule.

F. Contract Time on a Working Day Basis or a Calendar Day Basis extends from the date of Notice to Proceed through the date of Final Completion. All Work, including activities such as testing, startup, training, 30-day performance tests, O&M Manuals, warranties, As-Built Drawings, etc. must be completed within the Contract Time. All Work shall be identified in the baseline schedule to be completed within the Contract Time.

G. If the latest version of Oracle Primavera P6 or Microsoft Project are not being used, Contractor will submit the qualifications of the scheduling software being proposed as an alternative. Engineer will review the alternative for use on the project.

1.02 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES

A. The schedule shall be organized by Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

B. Each Construction Activity’s duration will be no more than four weeks. Level of Effort (LOE) and procurement activities may have durations that are longer.

C. Specifically identify activities for the following list of structures or items, in addition to other structures or items as necessary.

1. Structural framing.


2. Material installations.

3. Finishings.

4. Instrumentation.

5. Painting.

6. Training.

7. Testing.

8. Startup.

9. Receipt of spare parts.

D. Include and explain the approach to allow for adverse weather interruptions that are normal for the project location. Normal weather shall mean seasonally average weather conditions, as recorded by NOAA.

E. The default calendar used shall be an 8 hour day 5 days a week (40 hour week) including City Holidays. Alternative calendars will be only used after explained and accepted by the Engineer.

F. Include plan for all long lead items and materials.

1.03 FORMAT OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare CPM schedules in the form of a Time Scale Logic Diagram (TSLD) including the following:

1. Show each activity within each WBS or item.

2. Include columns of information for:

a. Activity ID.

b. Activity Description.

c. Original Duration.

d. Early Start and Finish.

e. Late Start and Finish.

f. Total Float.

3. Include a horizontal time scale: At minimum, by year and month from the start of Contract Time.

4. Use no font smaller than 10 points.

5. Sheet size: 11 inches x 17 inches., 1 sided, color

B. TSLD should be sorted by WBS, Item, and Early Start


1.04 SUBMITTAL TYPES DEFINED:

A. Interim Schedule showing the planned activities for the first 60 days of the project will be submitted and discussed at the Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. Preliminary Baseline Schedule will be submitted within 14 daysafter notice-to-proceed (NTP). The Engineer will review and comment within 2 weeks for incorporation in Baseline Submittal.

C. Accepted Baseline (also known as “as-planned”) CPM schedule will incorporate the Engineer review comments and be submitted within 2 weeks of receipt of those comments.

D. Once the Baseline Schedule has been submitted and approved, revised monthly progress schedules and updated monthly narrative reports including graphics, reports, and narratives, will be submitted.

1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Narrative Report shall consist of a written report providing an overview of the schedule, specific to each submittal. The Narrative Reports for developmental submittals, e.g. Interim and Preliminary, shall describe the Contractor’s approach to executing the Work. The updated Narrative Reports provided with Monthly Status Reports shall include the items specified in Paragraph 1.06.

B. The Narrative for the Baseline Schedule shall:

1. Explain key activities and assumptions on which the schedule is based.

2. Describe the Critical Path.

3. Discuss key deliveries that might adversely affect the project schedule.

4. Explain the Contractor’s approach to adverse weather interruptions.

5. Time constraints should be kept to a minimum and the use of any time constraints must be explained why they were used or required.

C. The following reports are required for Baseline Submittal, with both hardcopy and PDF required to be submitted to the Engineer.

1. Activity – a report listing all activities, sorted only by Activity ID.

2. Early Start – a report listing all activities, sorted only by Early Start date.

3. Total Float – a report listing all activities, sorted by Total Float (ascending from low to high).

4. Predecessor/Successor – a report of all activities, sorted by Activity ID that lists the predecessor and successor activities for each activity.

1.06 PROGRESS REVISIONS

A. The construction schedule shall be kept up-to-date and the current updated schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer monthly. If the Contractor fails to submit the required updated schedule by the 10th day of the month, the Engineer may withhold a portion of payment until such time as the Contractor submits the required updated schedule.


B. Include the Physical Percent Complete – the Contractor’s estimated physical percent complete for each activity as of the data date for the respective report.

C. Each month, indicate progress of each activity to data date of submission.

D. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:

1. Major changes in scope.

2. Activities modified since previous submission.

3. Revised projections of progress and completion.

4. Other identifiable changes.

E. Provide an updated Narrative Report with each monthly status report describing:

1. Any changes to the critical path subsequent to the previous status report

2. Any changes to the CPM relationships

3. Loss or gain in the Total Float, with explanation of the main cause of such loss or gain (Variance Report)

4. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.

5. Remedial actions or recovery steps that will be employed to arrest and/or recover from delays

6. Schedule presentation of Look Back over update period and Look Ahead to next 2 update cycles.

7. Schedule report showing variance to Baseline.

8. Provide a list of all activities added, deleted, or modified since the last update


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly schedule that delays to the critical path have resulted, and hence, that the contract completion date will not be met or when so directed by the Engineer, he will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the City, submitting to the Engineer for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule.

1. Increased construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Engineer, any delays to critical path or construction completion.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Engineer, any delays to critical path or construction completion.


3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule to eliminate delays to the Critical Path and construction completion date.

3.02 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION TIME

A. If the Contractor desires to make changes which affect the approved schedule, he shall notify the Engineer in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Engineer takes no exception to these changes, the Contractor shall revise, without additional cost to the City, all of the affected portion of the schedule.

B. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may deem necessary for a determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this contract. Engineer will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provisions of this contract, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently approved schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the schedule do not have any effect on the contract comple-tion date or dates, and therefore, will not be the basis for a change therein.

C. From time to time, it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be adjusted to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City or its representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the Contractor shall reschedule the work and/or con-tract completion time to reflect the changed conditions, and shall revise its schedule accordingly. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available float time in the schedule may be used by the City, as well as by the Contractor. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the early start date, and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the schedule.

D. Total Float in the approved CPM network is for the mutual benefit of the Project, i.e. either the City or the Contractor may take advantage of available Total Float. Therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the schedule, the City may initiate changes to the Work that absorb float time. Contractor-initiated changes that reduce the project total float time identified in the approved schedule may be accomplished with the Engineer's concurrence.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4322

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide photographic documentation of the Project as specified herein.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Periodic construction photographs.

3. Final construction photographs.

4. Preconstruction video recordings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for loca-tion and direction of each photograph. Include same information as corresponding photo-graphic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within 14 days of taking photographs.

1. File Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

2. Submit digital photographs in data disc format acceptable to Engineer.

a. Full-size (12-cm / 4.7-inch diameter) CD-R, DVD-R and DVD+R single-use re-cordable discs are acceptable.

b. No other disc types (including but not limited to CD-RW, DVD-RW, or any 8-cm / 3.1-inch diameter Mini CD or DVD) or storage media (including but not lim-ited to USB drives) will be accepted.

c. Package each disc in a hard plastic case, clearly and indelibly labeled using self-adhesive labels specifically designed for labeling of discs. Include on the label the project name and the time period covered by the photographs contained on the disc.

d. Transmittal of image files by electronic mail is unacceptable.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name of Contractor.


c. Date and time photograph was taken.

d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

e. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

3. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Photographs:

1. Provide digital photographs produced by a dedicated, fixed- or interchangeable-lens digital camera. Images made with cell phones, tablets, webcams, and wearable cam-eras are not acceptable.

2. Digital Camera: Have a minimum image resolution of 15 megapixels, and produce images in JPEG (.JPG) format with image dimensions of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

B. Digital Video Recordings:

1. Provide video recordings made with a dedicated digital video camera specifically made for video recordings. Video recordings made with cell phones, tablets, webcams, and wearable cameras are not acceptable.

2. Digital Video Camera: Have a minimum resolution of 720p (1280 x 720, progressive).

3. Provide video recordings in a common digital video format such as .MP4 or .WMV. The minimum resolution of all video files shall be 720p (1280 x 720, progressive). Submit video files on a digital video disc in format acceptable to Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs that clearly show the Work. Exhibit correct exposure and fo-cus, accurate color balance, maximum depth of field, minimal optical distortion, and mini-mal noise. Photographs that, in the Engineer’s opinion, do not meet these quality criteria will not be accepted and shall be re-taken at no additional cost to the City.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each pho-tographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.


2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Engineer.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

1. Flag construction limits before taking preconstruction photographs.

2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurate-ly record physical conditions at start of construction.

4. Take additional photographs as necessary to record any known or apparent defects existing on the site including settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction.

b. Above-grade structural framing.

c. Exterior building enclosure.

d. Interior Work, through date of Final Acceptance.

F. Final Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Final Acceptance for submission as project record documents. Engineer will inform photographer of desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Videographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record preconstruction video.

B. Video Recordings:

1. Produce bright, clear, sharp pictures with accurate colors and free from distortion, excessive shake, or any other form of picture imperfection. The audio track of each video recording shall reproduce precise and concise explanatory notes by the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and freedom from distortion and interference. Video recordings that, in the Engineer’s opinion, do not meet these quality criteria will not be accepted and shall be re-recorded at no additional cost to the City.

2. Mount camera on tripod before starting recording unless otherwise necessary to show area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at Project site.


C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in location, describe vantage point, location, direction (by com-pass point), and elevation or story of construction.

1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording.

2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name, and Project location.

D. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment.

E. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting construction, record video of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

1. Flag construction limits before recording preconstruction video.

2. Show existing conditions adjacent to Project site before starting the Work.

3. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining Project site to accurately record physi-cal conditions at the start of construction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED.

A. Submit a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, as specified in Section 4300.

B. Upon request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness.

C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Pay Estimates.

1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES.

A. Type schedule on an 8-1/2-in by 11-in white paper. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by the Engineer upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:

1. Title of Project and location.

2. Project number.

3. Name and Address of Contractor.

4. Contract designation.

5. Date of submission.

B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item.

D. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

E. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Amount.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED).

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED).

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK.

A. This Section includes requirements of a general nature related to the Contractor's responsibility for quality control involving inspections, tests, certifications, and reports. Refer to Section 4410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services for additional requirements related to quality control.

B. Unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications, only new materials shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials furnished by the Contractor to be incorporated in the Work shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be processed for, or delivered to the Site without prior approval by the Engineer.

1.02 INSPECTIONS.

A. The Engineer shall have the right to inspect all materials at all stages of collection and processing, and shall be allowed access to the site and to the Contractor's and supplier's facilities to conduct such inspections. Onsite work shall be subject to continuous inspection. Inspection by the Engineer shall not release the Contractor from responsibility or liability with respect to material.

B. When local codes or laws require approval and inspection of the work by other agencies or organizations the Contractor shall obtain such approval and submit one signed original and three copies of the approval to the City.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONTROL OF INSTALLATION.

A. The Contractor shall monitor quality control over suppliers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions where Work is to be performed and notify the Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

D. The Contractor shall request clarification from Engineer if manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, and shall not proceed with the affected Work before receiving clarification.

E. The Contractor shall comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

F. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.


1.04 REFERENCES.

A. The Contractor shall comply with the reference specifications and standards at a minimum.

B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. The Contractor shall be familiar with applicable standards, and shall obtain copies of these standards where required by product specification sections.

D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or influence otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 INSPECTING AND PHYSICAL TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

A. Laboratory will be provided by the City as specified in Section 4410.

1.06 REPORTS.

A. The Contractor may, in lieu of the specified tests and at the option of the Engineer, submit for review a Certificate of Compliance in the form of a letter from the manufacturer. The Certificate shall state the following:

1. Manufacturer has performed all required tests.

2. Materials supplied meet all test requirements.

3. Tests were performed within six months of submittal of the Certificate.

4. Materials that were tested are the same type, quality, manufacture, and make as those specified.

5. Include identification of the materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED).

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED).

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4465

TESTING AND STARTUP

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide a competent field services technician of the manufacturers of all materials furnished under the technical specifications to supervise installation, adjustment, initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing and startup of the materials.

B. Perform specified field performance tests, final acceptance tests and startup services.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name, address and resume of proposed field service technicians at least 10 days in advance of the need for such services.

B. Submit, in accordance with Section, detailed testing procedures for shop tests, field performance tests and final acceptance tests as specified in the various equipment sections. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Test procedures shall be submitted at least 10 days in advance of the proposed test dates and shall include at least the following information:

a. Name, classification, model and serial number of equipment to be tested, including reference to technical specifications by section number and title.

b. Schedule of proposed dates and times for testing.

c. Summary of needs for power, lighting, chemical, water, sludge, gas, etc., and identification of who will provide them.

d. Outline specific assignment of the responsibilities of the Contractor and manufacturers' factory representatives or field service personnel.

e. Detailed description of step-by-step testing requirements, with reference to appropriate standardized testing procedures and laboratory analyses by established technical organizations (e.g., ASTM, WPCF Standard Methods, etc).

f. Samples of forms to be used to collect and record test data and to present tabulated test results.

2. Copies of test reports upon completion of specified shop, performance and acceptance tests. Test reports shall incorporate the information provided in the test procedures submittals and modified to reflect actual conduct of the tests and the following additional information:

a. Copy of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses.

b. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements vs. actual test results.

c. If actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance requirements, describe action to be taken prior to re-testing the materials.


3. Copies of the manufacturer's field service technician's report summarizing the results of his/her initial inspection, operation, adjustment and pre-tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions to be taken for proper maintenance, and the material supplier's Certificate of Installation in the format attached to the end of this section.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Field service technicians shall be competent and experienced in the proper installation, adjustment, operation, testing and startup of the materials and systems being installed.

B. Manufacturers' sales and marketing personnel will not be accepted as field service technicians unless they can prove their qualifications.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS

A. After installation of the materials has been completed and the materials are presumably ready for operation, and before the materials are operated by others, the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the materials and perform Installation Checks and Functional Tests. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable:

1. Soundness (without crack or otherwise damaged parts).

2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required.

3. Correctness of setting, alignment and relative arrangement of various parts.

4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.

B. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as necessary to prove that the materials have been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified.

C. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit a signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments and tests.

3.02 WITNESS REQUIREMENTS

A. Shop tests or factory tests may be witnessed by the City, as required by various technical specifications.

B. Field performance and acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the City.

3.03 STARTUP OF FACILITIES AND SYSTEMS

A. General Requirements.

1. Successfully execute the step-by-step procedure of startup, normal operation, shutdown, and performance demonstration specified herein.

2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to Final Completion of the facility or system.


3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled with the Engineer at least 10 working days in advance or as otherwise specified. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified.

B. Preparation for Startup.

1. All mechanical and electrical materials shall be checked to ensure that they are in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary run-ins of the various pumps, compressors, and other remaining materials shall be made. All systems shall be cleaned and purged as necessary. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, pump wells and pipelines which are hydraulically checked or tested shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete.

2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full range. All other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made.

3. Perform all other tasks needed for preparing and conditioning the facility or system for proper operation.

4. No testing or operation shall commence until the Contractor has verified that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in good working order.

5. No testing or equipment operation shall take place until the Contractor has verified that all lubricants, tools, maintenance materials, spare parts and approved operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified.

C. Facility and System Startup.

1. Startup period shall not begin until all systems and materials have been checked and tested as specified with the associated specifications and are ready for operation. The City shall receive spare parts, safety equipment, tools and maintenance materials, lubricants, approved operation and maintenance data and the specified operation and maintenance instruction prior to the startup. All specified valve tagging shall also be complete prior to this startup.

2. Demonstrate a fourteen (14) consecutive, 24 hour day period of successful operation of the facility or system as a prerequisite of Final Completion.

3. In the event of failure to demonstrate satisfactory performance of the facility on the first or any subsequent attempt, all necessary alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements shall be made. When the facility is again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and a new test shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for the specified duration.

4. The City will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor's or subcontractor's service personnel) needed to operate the facility or system during the final test period; however, said personnel will perform their duties under Contractor's direct supervision. Until performance tests are completed and units and systems are accepted by the City as complete, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the operation and maintenance of all new facilities and systems.

5. The City will provide all necessary chemicals and electricity. However, the Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel of the various construction trades, i.e., electricians, plumbers, etc, and field service personnel of the major equipment suppliers on an 8 hour per day basis at the facilities and on a 24 hour per day basis locally during the startup period. Major suppliers shall include, but not be limited to, the following:


a. Instrumentation and Control Materials

b. All Pumping Materials

c. Generator Materials

d. Intake Screens or other screening devices

e. Conveyance Systems

6. Do not, at any time, allow the facility or system to be operated in a manner which subjects materials to conditions that are more severe than the maximum allowable operating conditions for which the materials were designed.


MATERIAL SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION

Owner - CITY OF SHREVEPORT

Project __________________________________________________________________________

Contract No. ___________________________________________________________________

MATERIAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTION __________________________________________________

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ___________________________________________________________

I ______________________________________________________, Authorized representative of

(Print Name)

________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer's ________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

hereby CERTIFY that ________________________________________________________________

(Print material name and model with serial no.)

________________________________________________________________________________

installed for the subject project has (have) been installed in a satisfactory manner, has (have) been tested and adjusted, and is (are) ready for final acceptance testing and operation on:

Date_____________

Time_____________

CERTIFIED BY: ______________________________________________________ (Signature of Manufacturer's Representative)

Date:_____________

END OF SECTION



B&V PN 173506

SECTION 4500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals necessary and provide separate temporary facilities for the Contractor's use and the Engineer's use, as specified herein and as shown in the contract documents.

B. Operate and maintain temporary facilities for the duration of the project and as directed by the Engineer. All cost and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Amount.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data, in accordance with Section 4300, showing materials of construction and details of installation for:

1. Engineer's Field Office: Dimensioned floor plan, office systems, furnishings, and equipment.

2. Temporary Fence: Layout drawings which indicate dimensions, access to fire hydrants, gate locations and opening sizes, and other site specific requirements.

3. Contractor Sign: Layout, graphics, and wording.


A. Temporary facilities shall comply with all applicable state and local ordinances, codes and regulations.

B. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction to inspect (and test if required) temporary facilities.

C. Obtain all required permits for temporary facilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE

A. Provide minimum 12 ft X 50 ft office trailer for the Engineer's exclusive use for the duration of the project. Field office trailer shall have at least one office, one conference room, one bathroom, and two exterior doors.

B. The bathroom shall include a toilet, sink and faucet, medicine cabinet, and exhaust fan.

C. The conference room shall include a built-in plan table.

D. The Engineer's field office shall be weather-tight construction with floor, walls, and ceiling completely insulated. Each room shall have at least one operating window. Each window shall have a venetian blind and full insect screen. Furnish two sets of keys for each exterior door. Provide fully insulated skirting on all sides of the field office trailer. Provide steps, platforms, handrails, and boot scrapers for each exterior door.



B&V PN 173506

E. Field office trailer shall be Mobile Mini, ModSpace, Williams Scotsman, or equal. Converted storage or box containers will not be acceptable.

F. Furnishings

1. Provide the following furnishings for the Engineer's temporary field office for the duration of the project. All furnishings shall be new – or in very good condition – subject to approval of the Engineer.

a. Two 60-in by 30-in desks with file drawer and 5 drawers, all lockable. New upholstered swivel type chair with arms for each desk.

b. Six armless side chairs (stacking type)

c. One file cabinet, 4 drawer

d. Two wastebaskets

e. One steel bookcase units, 4 shelves high,

f. Fire Extinguishers: Provide portable, UL-rated with class and extinguishing agent required by locations and classes of fire exposure. Provide at least one for each trailer/office.

g. Two smoke detectors, with batteries

h. One wall-mounted first aid kit, McMaster-Carr 9501T1 or equal, OSHA (1910.151.b) and ANSI (Z308.1-2003) compliant, [suitable for ten people].

i. One dry erase boards, aluminum frame, 36-in by 60-in, markers and eraser, Quartet Model No. TS-S 535 or equal

G. Services

1. Provide the following services for the duration of the project. Services shall include all costs for installation, use, maintenance, and removal of all products, services and equipment billed by each provider for each service specified herein.

2. Field office shall have complete and fully functional electrical, plumbing, and HVAC systems. Perform all scheduled and unscheduled maintenance for all systems and as directed by the Engineer.

3. Electrical System: Provide connection to temporary electric service. Comply with the electrical requirements of the furnished office trailer. Provide main circuit panel, sufficient GFCI outlets and lighting in each room, exterior lights at each exterior door, and proper grounding of entire electrical system.

4. Plumbing system: Connect to existing potable water supply. Provide water heater and hot and cold water to each fixture. Connect waste pipes to existing sanitary system or a waste holding tank. Heat trace and insulate exterior piping to prevent freezing.

5. HVAC System: Provide central heating and air conditioning system with programmable thermostat. System shall be capable of maintaining an interior temperature of 70°F when the exterior temperature is 0°F and an interior temperature of 75°F when the exterior temperature is 100°F.



B&V PN 173506

6. Bottled water service: Provide bottled water service complete with dispenser with hot and cold water taps and regular bottle and cup replenishment as directed by the Engineer.

7. Janitorial service: Provide janitorial services (at least weekly) that include dusting, sweeping, vacuuming, mopping, disinfection, and trash removal.

8. Sanitary service: Provide regular pumping of waste holding tank, if applicable, as needed.

H. Office Supplies: Provide the following supplies for the duration of the project: copy paper, toner, toilet paper, paper towels, soap, light bulbs, and other consumables as required by the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ENGINEER'S OFFICE

A. Engineer's trailer shall be set up and ready for occupancy within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work at the site. All systems, furnishings, equipment, and services specified herein shall be furnished, installed, and completely operational for the field office to be considered established.

1. Provide regular office cleaning services for the duration of the project.

2. Provide supplies including, but not limited to restroom supplies (toilet tissue paper, paper towel, and soap), as well as light bulbs, air conditioner filters, etc.

3. Provide office supplies for printers and fax machines, etc.

4. Supply all fuel for heating and pay all utility bills.

B. Install field office plumb and level.

C. Engineer's trailer shall be removed and the site shall be cleaned up and restored before Final Completion.

3.02 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE

A. Provide a temporary field office(s) for the Contractor's use for the duration of the project. An authorized representative of the Contractor shall be present at all times while the Work is in progress. Instructions received at the Contractor’s field office from the Engineer shall be considered delivered to the Contractor.

B. Locate field office(s) in accordance with approved shop drawings and as directed by the City.

C. Establish and occupy field office within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or the City.

3.03 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

A. Furnish temporary light and power, complete with wiring, lamps and similar equipment as required to adequately light all work areas and with sufficient power capacity to meet the project needs. Make all necessary arrangements with the local electric company for temporary electric service and pay all expenses in connection therewith.



B&V PN 173506

B. Provide connections to existing facilities sized to provide service required for power and lighting. Contractor shall pay the costs of power used.

C. Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. For connection of power tools and equipment, provide outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light.

D. Provide grounded extension cords. Use heavy duty cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if more than one length is required.

E. Provide general service incandescent lamps as required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

3.04 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. Provide heat as may be necessary for heating materials and for proper execution, protection and drying-out of the Work.

3.05 TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER

A. Provide all air and water, including temporary piping and appurtenances required for cleaning and testing pipelines and equipment. Remove temporary piping and appurtenances upon approval of equipment being tested.

3.06 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide self-contained, single occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed in a fiberglass or other approved nonabsorbent shell.

3.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

A. Provide temporary elevators, hoists, cranes, scaffolding and platforms as necessary to perform the Work. Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Protect permanent stairs from damage from construction operations.

3.09 VEHICLE ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Provide temporary access roads, parking areas, traffic control devices and staging areas as approved by the Engineer.

B. Provide minimum 12-ft by 24-ft by 6-in deep dense graded crushed stone or paved parking area adjacent to Engineer's field office for exclusive use by the Engineer for the duration of the project.

3.10 TEMPORARY FENCE

A. Provide temporary fence as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as the Contractor requires for site security.

1. Provide 6-ft high chain link fence with at least two vehicle and two pedestrian access gates. Gates shall be equipped with locking hardware and padlocks. Furnish two sets of keys to Engineer and the City. Coordinate with local first responders for access during non-work hours.



B&V PN 173506

2. Fence installation shall comply with requirements of Standard Technical specification Section 803.

3. Perform daily inspections of fence and immediately repair or replace damaged or compromised sections and as directed by the Engineer.

3.11 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Provide covered dumpster, minimum 4-cubic yards, dedicated for field office waste. Provide separate covered dumpster of adequate size for construction debris. Empty dumpsters on a regular basis and as directed by the Engineer. Dumpsters shall not exceed their capacities at any time.

3.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Provide, install, and maintain signs as specified in Technical Specification Section 4580 Project Identification Signs.

B. Remove signs at Final Completion.

3.13 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION

A. Remove each temporary facility complete when need for its service has ended and as approved by the Engineer. Coordinate removal of temporary facilities with authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4562

DUST CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Perform dust control operations, in an approved manner, whenever necessary or when directed by the City, even though other work on the project may be suspended.

B. Dust control shall be generally accomplished by cleaning, sweeping, and sprinkling with water. The use of water resulting in mud will not be permitted as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. Calcium chloride may be used when necessary to control dust nuisance.

C. Methods of controlling dust shall meet all air pollutant standards as set forth by Federal and State regulatory agencies.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Calcium chloride shall conform to AASHTO M144, Type I except the requirements for "total alkali chlorides" and other impurities shall not apply.

2.02 SWEEPING EQUIPMENT

A. When identified in the contract documents, furnish operate a self-loading motor sweeper with spray nozzles at least once each working day to keep paved areas acceptably clean wherever construction, including restoration, is incomplete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE

A. Abate dust nuisance throughout all phases of construction until final acceptance of the Project.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4580

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide and maintain a Contractor Sign.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit details of Contractor Sign in accordance with the requirements of Section 4300. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering if used.

1.03 CONTRACTOR SIGN

A. Provide one sign at plant location shown on the Drawings unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

B. Construct signs with new materials in accordance with details shown on the Drawings. Maintain signs to present a clean and neat appearance throughout the Project duration.

C. Signs shall be painted and lettered by an experienced professional in the type of work required.

D. Payment for furnishing and maintaining Contractor Sign(s) will be considered incidental to the cost of the Project (no direct payment). If the Contractor fails to properly install or maintain the sign(s), a penalty of $100 per day per sign will be assessed, and the sum of penalties will be deducted from any payments due the Contractor

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTRACTOR SIGN MATERIALS

A. Sign Posts: 4”X 4” pressure treated wood posts, 12 feet long (minimum) for in-ground mounting.

B. Fasteners shall be galvanized steel. Attach sign to posts with ½”X 5-1/2” button head carriage bolts and secure with nuts and washers. Cover button heads with reflective film or coating to match the sign background.

C. Sign: 4’X 8’ X ¾” exterior B-C plywood. Do not piece plywood sheets to fabricate a sign face.

D. Coating: White industrial grade, fast-drying, oil-based paint with gloss sheen for posts and sign. Paint both sides and all edges of sign prior to adding adhesive applications.

E. Sign Background: Reflective white 3M Scotchlite Engineer Grade, Pressure Sensitive Sheeting (White) or equal

F. Lettering: 3M Scotchcal Pressure Sensitive Films (Black), or equal, for lettering.

G. City will furnish an electronic City Seal for use by the Contractor.


2.02 CONTRACTOR SIGN LAYOUT

A. Lettering Style, Size, and Spacing: Helvetica Regular.

B. Condensed style text may be utilized if necessary to maintain sign composition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install Contractor Sign(s) prior to mobilization, at locations shown on the Drawings unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Position each sign so it is fully visible and readable to the general public.

B. Install signs level and plumb. Sink posts 3 feet to 4 feet below grade and stabilize posts to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above grade for mounting sign.

3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair deterioration and damages to structure, framing and sign.

B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of at least 2 feet below grade upon completion of the Project. Restore area to a condition better than or equal to the existing condition prior to construction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4600

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

PART GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage and protection for all items required in the construction of the Work. Specific requirements, if any, are specified with the related item.

1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY

A. Transport and handle items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Schedule delivery to reduce long term on-site storage prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall materials be delivered to the site more than 1month prior to installation without written authorization from the Engineer.

C. Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration.

D. Deliver products to the Site in manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems, complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

E. All items delivered to the Site shall be unloaded and placed in a manner which will not hamper the Contractor's normal construction operation or those of subcontractors and other contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic.

F. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload all items delivered to the Site.

G. Promptly inspect shipment to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and items are undamaged. For items furnished by others (i.e., City, other Contractors), perform inspection in the presence of the Engineer. Notify Engineer verbally, and in writing, of any problems.

H. If any item has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the City.

1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Storage instruction shall be studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer. Carefully follow storage instructions and maintain written documentation of compliance. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection.

B. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

C. Cement and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural, miscellaneous and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, there is excessive rust formed on reinforcing steel, it shall not be


used. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, cracking and spalling to a minimum.

D. All mechanical and electrical materials subject to corrosive damage by the atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) shall be stored in a weathertight building to prevent injury. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but it must be satisfactory to the Engineer. Building shall be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer.

1. All materials shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

2. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the materials, the Contractor shall start the materials, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use.

3. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. New lubricants shall be put into the equipment at the time of acceptance.

4. Prior to acceptance of the materials, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

E. All paint and other coating products shall be stored in areas protected from the weather. Follow all storage requirements set forth by the paint and coating manufacturers.

END OF SECTION

Shreveport, LA 4630 11/082017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SECTION 4630

SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The requirements of this Section apply to proposed Substitute Items. If in the sole discretion of the Engineer an item of material or equipment proposed by the Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, it will be considered a proposed Substitute Item. This Section includes supplementary requirements to those in the General Provisions.

B. The requirements of this Section do not apply to potential Suppliers or Bidders. Proposed Substitute Items will be accepted only from the Contractor.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. In order for proposed Substitute Items to be considered, the Contractor shall submit, at the time of bid opening, complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of all proposed Substitute Items identified on the list. Proposed substitutions will not be considered unless the Contractor provides all of the required information at the time of bid opening.

B. Furnish a separate submittal for each proposed Substitute Item. Each submittal shall include the following information.

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed Substitute Item with requirements stated in Contract Documents:

a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.

b. Manufacturer’s literature; identify:

i Product description.

ii Reference standards.

iii Performance and test data.

iv Operation and maintenance data.

c. Samples, as applicable.

d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation.

2. Itemized comparison of the proposed Substitute Item with product specified. List significant variations. Substitution shall not change design intent and shall perform equal to that specified.

3. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasioned by the proposed substitution.

4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts.

5. List of changes required in other work or products.


6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.

a. Amount of any net change to Contract Amount.

7. Designation of required license fees or royalties.

8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials.

1.04 EVALUATION OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE ITEMS

A. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without detailed supporting documentation.

2. They are requested directly by a Subcontractor or Supplier.

3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

B. Requests for substitutions which are not included on the list of proposed Substitute Items will not be considered unless evidence is submitted to the City that all of the following circumstances exist:

1. The specified product is unavailable for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. Such reasons shall consist of strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, or acts of God.

2. The Contractor placed, or attempted to place, orders for specified products within 30 days after Notice to Proceed

3. Request for substitution is made in writing to the Engineer within 10 days of the date on which the Contractor ascertains that it cannot obtain the specified item.

4. Complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of the proposed substitution is submitted with the request.

C. The Engineer’s decision regarding evaluation of substitutions shall be considered final and binding. Requests for time extensions and additional costs based on submission of, acceptance of, or rejection of substitutions will not be allowed. All approved substitutions will be incorporated into the Contract by Change Order.

D. Cost for the Engineer’s review time for a proposed substitution that is not accepted shall be paid by the Contractor. The cost for the review time will be billed to the Owner by the Engineer for the actual hours required for the review. Cost for the additional review shall be paid to the Owner by the Contractor.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION

A. In making formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that:

1. It has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified.

2. It will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.

3. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.


4. It waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his/her Contract, but not:

a. Costs under separate contracts.

b. City's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents.

1.07 ENGINEER DUTIES

A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 4700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies administrative, verification and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to:

1. Final cleaning (Section 4710).

2. As-Built Construction Schedule (Section 4310).

3. As-Built Drawings (Section 4720).

4. Warranties, guarantees, and bonds (Section 4740).

5. Spare parts and maintenance materials (as specified).

6. Reconciliation of final accounting and summary change order.

7. Letter of Final Completion.

8. Final Acceptance and Payment.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Completion (Standard Technical specification Section 110.12).

B. Acceptance and Final Payment (Standard Technical specification Section 111.8).

1.03 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Complete all Work, correct all deficiencies, and furnish all deliverables as specified, prior to Final Completion. The following list is not intended to be comprehensive, but includes examples of services and documentation which are part of the Work.

1. Field services by material suppliers and manufacturers

2. Initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing

3. Startup and performance demonstration

4. Operating and maintenance instructions and manuals

5. Vendor training/instructions to City personnel

6. Online training services

7. Spare parts and maintenance materials


8. As- Built Drawings

9. As-Built Construction Schedule

10. Warranties, guarantees, and bonds

11. Final cleaning and site restoration

12. Removal of project signs and temporary facilities

B. Furnish submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities having applicable jurisdiction including but not limited to permit close out information, certificates of occupancy, etc.

C. When the Contractor determines that the Work is complete, it shall notify the City Engineer in writing that the Work will be ready for final inspection on a definite date. The notice shall bear the signed concurrence of the Engineer having charge of inspection and construction and shall be given at least 10 days prior to the date stated for final inspection. If the City determines that the Work is as represented, it will make arrangements to have final inspection commenced on the date stated or as soon thereafter as practical.

D. If the final inspection discloses any Work as being unsatisfactory, the Engineer will give the Contractor the necessary instructions for correction. Upon correction of the Work, another inspection will be made, and will constitute the final inspection if the Work has been satisfactorily completed.

E. When the Work is found to be complete, the City will notify the Contractor and issue a Letter of Final Completion. The Contractor shall record the Letter of Final Completion with the Clerk of Court in Caddo Parish no later than 45 days after the date of Final Completion. The recording date begins the “45 day lien free period” which is the last 45 days during which anyone may file a lien against the contract.

F. The date of Final Completion is the end of accrual of Contract Time and Liquidated Damages. The following date is the beginning of time for warranties, guarantees, and the maintenance and repair period.

1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT

A. If necessary to reconcile estimated and actual quantities of Contract Items, the City will prepare and execute a summary change order.

B. Contractor shall furnish all releases or waivers on buildings, wells, utilities, and railroads, as well as any maintenance bonds, certificates from the Health Department, tracings, brochures, or other items required by the Contract before Final Payment.

C. The City will acknowledge Final Acceptance of the Work and make final payment to the Contractor within 45 days following receipt of a clear lien certificate.

D. For a paving assessment project, the City Council must approve and accept the Work and authorize final payment.




END OF SECTION


SECTION 4710

CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Maintain the Site clean and free from rubbish and debris, including existing rubbish and debris identified in the Contract Documents to be removed. Execute cleaning of components of the Work during construction until final completion of the Project. No direct payment will be made for Work specified in this Section.

1.02 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING

A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-pollution laws.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned.

C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by manufacturer of the cleaning material.

D. Earth dams will not be permitted at catch basin openings, local depressions, or elsewhere, except in time of emergency. Temporary dams of sand bags, asphaltic concrete, or other acceptable material may be permitted when necessary to protect the Work, provided their use does not create a hazard or nuisance to the public. Such dams shall be removed from the Site as soon as their use is no longer necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION

A. Remove all existing waste material, rubbish and windblown debris identified in the contract documents from the work site prior to construction.

3.02 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the Work, the Site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.

C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the Site.

D. Remove materials and equipment from the Site as soon as they are no longer necessary.


E. Remove excess materials from excavation of catch basins and similar structures immediately. Sufficient materials which meet the specified requirements for backfill may remain.

F. Remove forms and form lumber from the Site as soon as practicable.

3.03 DUST CONTROL

A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished.

B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces.

3.04 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.

B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

C. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors.

D. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.

E. Ventilating Systems:

1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction.

2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.

G. Prior to final completion or City occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed [nterior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4720

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall keep and maintain, at the job site, a copy of the Drawings, marked up and annotated to indicate all changes made during the course of a project, as specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall keep and maintain, at the job site, a copy of Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams for control systems, marked up and annotated to indicate all changes made during the course of a project, as specified herein.


A. Contractor shall maintain an as-built copy of the following documents, marked up to indicate all changes made during the course of a project:

1. Drawings

2. Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams

3. Panelboard Circuit Directories

B. Measure and record coordinates representing the horizontal and vertical locations of all buried pressure pipelines 4 inches in diameter or larger. Measure horizontal and vertical locations of all fittings, valves, manholes and changes in horizontal direction and record the coordinates that these locations represent.

C. Utilize equipment with sufficient horizontal positional accuracy to measure horizontal coordinates of each point so that the specific locations can be subsequently marked. The specific location of a pipeline is defined as an area not wider than the width of the pipeline plus 18 inches on either side. Measure and record the elevation of pipelines at each specific location to the nearest whole foot. The specific location of a structure corner is defined as an area within an 18-inch radius of the actual corner.

D. Measure and record coordinates based on the Louisiana Coordinate System of 1983 North Zone. Measure and record elevations in Mean Sea Level datum.

E. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. The Contractor shall annotate (mark-up) the Drawings to indicate all project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations that vary from the original Drawings. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, buried or concealed construction, and utility features that are revealed during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the locations (horizontal and vertical) and material of all buried utilities that are encountered during construction – whether or not they were indicated on the Drawings. The as-built information added to the drawings may be supplemented by detailed sketches, if necessary, clearly indicating, the Work, as constructed.


2. These annotated Drawings constitute the Contractor's As-Built Drawings and are actual representations of as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by change orders, design modifications, requests for information and field orders.

3. As-Built Drawings shall be accessible to the Engineer at all times during the construction period.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Store As-Built Drawings in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for storage of the As-Built Drawings.

B. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible, condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

C. Make documents available for inspection by the Engineer at all times.

3.02 MARKING METHOD

A. Use the color Red (indelible ink) to record information on the Drawings.

B. Label each document "AS-BUILT" in neat large printed letters.

C. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, notations shall be affixed to hardcopies of documents.

D. Record information contemporaneously with construction progress.

E. Legibly mark drawings with as-built information:

1. Elevations and dimensions of structures and structural elements.

2. All underground utilities (piping and electrical), structures, and appurtenances

a. Changes to existing structure, piping and appurtenance locations.

b. Record horizontal and vertical locations of underground structures, piping, utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

c. Record actual installed pipe material, class, size, joint type, etc

d. Record specific locations of buried pressure pipelines 4 inches in diameter or larger and corners of new, major structures in tabular form. Reference each specific location on the annotated Drawings.

3.03 AS-BUILT INFORMATION COMPILATION

A. Do not conceal any work until the required information is acquired.

B. Items to be recorded include, but are not limited to:

1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction – referenced to visible and accessible features.


2. Field changes of dimensions and/or details

a. Interior equipment and piping relocations.

3. Changes made by Field Order or Change Order

4. Clarifications made from RFI’s

5. Details not indicated on the original Drawings

6. Notes regarding liners installed or other trenchless pipeline rehabilitation or repair

7. Coordinates of pipelines, manholes, bends, valves, horizontal changes in direction, and vertical changes in direction.

3.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to Final Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall finalize and deliver a complete set of As-Built Drawings to the Engineer conforming to the construction records of the Contractor. The set of drawings shall consist of corrected and annotated drawings showing the recorded location(s) of the Work. As-Built Drawings shall be in the form of a set of prints with annotations carefully and neatly superimposed on the drawings in red.

B. The information submitted by the Contractor into the As-Built Drawings will be assumed to be correct. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information, and shall bear the costs resulting from the correction of incorrect data.

C. Delivery of As-Built Drawings to the Engineer will be a prerequisite to Final Completion.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4730

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND

TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for compiling and submitting operation and maintenance data, and vendor training and instructions to City personnel.

1.02 OPERATING MANUALS

A. Provide specific operation and maintenance instructions for all electrical, mechanical, instrumentation & controls items furnished under various technical technical specifications. Furnish separate manuals for each item, or each Section number.

B. Prepare separate transmittal sheets for each manual. Each transmittal sheet shall include at least the following information: Contractor’s name and address, City of Shreveport, project name, project number, submittal number, description of submittal and number of copies transmitted.

C. Furnish 5 hard copies of each manual using the following materials.

1. Binders

a Commercial quality three ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers

b Maximum ring width capacity: 3 inches

c When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings/volumes.

2. Identification: Identify each volume on the cover and spine with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". Include the following:

a Title of Project.

b Identify the general subject matter covered in the manual.

c Identify structure(s) and/or location(s), of the item provided.

d Technical specification Section number.

3. 20 lb. loose leaf paper, with hole reinforcement

4. Page size: 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch

5. Provide heavy-duty fly leafs (section separators), matching the table of contents, for each separate product, each piece of operating equipment, and organizational sections of the manual

6. Provide reinforced punched binder tab; bind in with text


7. Reduce larger drawings and fold to the size of text pages – but not larger than 11 inches X 17 inches – or provide a suitable clear plastic pocket (with drawing identification) for each such folded drawing.

D. Provide 2 electronic copies of each manual. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, O&M manuals may not be transmitted by electronic means other than USB flash drive. Electronic O&M manuals shall meet the following conditions:

1. The specified transmittal form is included

2. With the exception of the transmittal sheet, the entire submittal is included in a single file.

3. Files are Portable Document Format (PDF) – with printing function enabled.

4. All scanned manufacturer’s O&M manuals must be quality checked after scanning to ensure the pages are not crooked and all information is legible.

5. The electronic copy of the O&M Manual must be identical in organization, format, and content to the hard copies of the manual.

6. The electronic O&M manual must be bookmarked identically to the paper manual table of contents to allow quick access to information. Electronic submittals that require extensive scrolling will not be accepted. The document must be indexed and searchable.

E. Contents:

1. A table of contents/Index, divided into section reflective of the major components provided.

2. Specific description of each system and components

3. Name, address, telephone number(s) and e-mail address(es) of vendor(s) and local service representative(s)

4. Specific on-site operating instructions (including starting and stopping procedures)

5. Safety considerations

6. Project specific operational procedures and recommended log sheet(s).

7. Project specific maintenance procedures

8. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions – specific to the project

9. Copy of each wiring diagram

10. Copy of approved shop drawing(s) and Contractor's coordination/layout drawing(s)

11. List of spare parts and recommended quantities

12. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

13. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams


14. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified.

15. Warranties and Bonds, if required

F. Manuals for Systems – in addition to the requirements listed above, provide the following information for each system:

1. Overview of system and description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. Include legible performance curves, with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

2. Panelboard circuit directories including electrical service characteristics, controls and communications and color-coded wiring diagrams as installed.

3. Operating procedures: include start-up, break-in and routine normal operating instructions and sequences; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions; and summer, winter and any special operating instructions.

4. Maintenance Requirements

a. Procedures and guides for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions

b. Alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions

c. Servicing and lubrication schedule and list of recommended lubricants

d. Manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions

e. Sequence of operation by instrumentation and controls manufacturer

f. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance

5. Control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed (as-built)

6. Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams, as installed (asbuilt)

7. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Include equipment and instrument tag numbers on diagrams.

8. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage

9. Test and balancing reports, as required

10. Additional Requirements as specified in individual product technical specification

11. Design data for systems engineered by the Contractor or its Suppliers



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Furnish preliminary copies of each manual to the Engineer, no later than 60 days following approval of the respective shop drawings. Provide final copies of each completed manual prior to shipping.

B. The Engineer will review Operation and Maintenance manuals submittals for operating equipment for conformance with the requirements of the applicable technical specification Section. The review will generally be based on the O&M Manual Review Checklist appended to this Section.

C. If during test and start-up of equipment, any changes were made to the equipment, provide two hard copies of as-built drawings or any other amendments for insertion, by the Contractor, in the previously transmitted final manuals. In addition, provide one revised electronic version including the as-built drawings and any other amendments. The manuals shall be completed, including updates, if any, within 30 days of start-up and testing of the facility.

3.02 VENDOR TRAINING/INSTRUCTIONS (TO CITY'S PERSONNEL)

A. Before final initiation of operation, Contractor's vendors shall train/instruct City's designated personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems as recommended by the respective manufacturers at times convenient to the City. Training may not proceed until the O & M manual has been approved. Contractor’s vendors will use the approved O & M annual during training as reference material.

B. Unless specified otherwise under the respective equipment technical specification section, vendor training/instruction shall consist of eight hours of training for each type of equipment. Such training/instruction shall be scheduled and held at times to accommodate the work schedules of City's personnel, including splitting the required training/instruction time into separate sessions and/or presented at reasonable times other than the Contractor's "normal working hours" or the City's normal day shift.

C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Train/instruct the City's personnel, in detail, based on the contents of manual explaining all aspects of operation and maintenance of the equipment. If the respective equipment is inter-related to the operation of other equipment, all interlock, constraints, and permissives shall be explained.

D. At least two weeks prior to the scheduled date for vendor training, a detailed lesson plan, representative of the material to be covered during instruction, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Lesson plans shall consist of in-depth outlines of the training material, including a table of contents, resume of the instructor, materials to be covered, start-up procedures, maintenance requirements, safety considerations, and shut-down procedures.

E. Prepare and insert additional data in each Operation and Maintenance Manual when the need for such data becomes apparent during training/instruction.

F. Vendor's training/instruction will be considered acceptable based on the completed City Acknowledgement of Manufacturer's Instruction at the end of this Section.


3.03 VIDEOGRAPHY OF VENDOR TRAINING/INSTRUCTION

A. Audio/video (A/V) record (in DVD format) training/instructions as they are being provided to the City's personnel. Such recording shall include the entire training/instruction session(s) as well as all questions and answers. A/V recording shall be performed by a professional organization experienced in the production of such recordings. Self-recording by the Contractor may be considered, provided that Contractor can demonstrate, in advance, proficient examples of such recordings.

B. To avoid audio problems, training/instruction shall be held in a location sufficiently removed from construction activity, insulated from the noise of construction activity, or during a time when construction activity is not occurring in the vicinity.

C. The audio portion of the A/V recording should be done with a microphone (wired or wireless) attached to the trainer/instructor to maximize the quality of speech.

D. Each A/V recording should have "chapters" to segregate the distinct portions of the training/instruction, or have visual cues at the start of a change in subject.

E. Two copies of the A/V recordings shall be submitted to the Engineer on DVD disk(s). The DVDs will become the property of the City.

F. The video camera will record the presentation material (close up) with the audio portion to simulate the presentation. When a physical demonstration is being conducted the camera will be repositioned to capture that portion as well

3.04 FACE TO FACE TRAINING REVIEW

A. Online Training Service personnel involved in the writing of the courseware shall attend a training session provided by each manufacturer. The purpose is to document any additional information stated but not captured in the O&M manual as well as to identify any discrepancies or contradictions with the materials. These trips will coincide with the data capture visits.

B. Provide comments and notes to the Engineer. The Engineer will decide if the contradictions or discrepancies warrant a return visit from the manufacturer’s representative to clarify comments.

END OF SECTION


O&M Manual Review Checklist

Submittal No.: Project No.: Manufacturer:

Item Submitted: Technical specification Section: _________________ Date of Submittal:

General Data

1. Are the area representative's name, address, e-mail address and telephone number included?

2. Is the nameplate data for each component included?

3. Are all associated components related to the specific equipment included?

4. Is non-pertinent data crossed out or deleted?

5. Are drawings neatly folded and/or inserted into packets?

6. Are all pages properly aligned and scanned legibly?

7. Is the .PDF document bookmarked according to the table of contents?

Operations and Maintenance Data

8. Is an overview description of the equipment and/or process included?

9. Does the description include the practical theory of operation?

10. Does each equipment component include specific details (design characteristics, operating parameters, control descriptions, and selector switch positions and functions)?

11. Are alarm and shutdown conditions specific to the equipment provided on this project clearly identified? Does it describe possible causes and recommended remedies?

12. Are step procedures for starting, stopping, and troubleshooting specific to the equipment provided included?

13. Is a list of operational parameters to monitor and record specific to the equipment provided included?

14. Is a proposed operating log sheet specific to the equipment provided included?

15. Is a spare parts inventory list included for each component?

16. Is a lubrication schedule for each component specific to the equipment provided included - or does it clearly state “No Lubrication Required"?

17. Is a maintenance schedule for each component specific to the equipment provided included?

18.. Is a copy of the warranty information included?


Review Comments

Is the submittal fully approved (yes/no)?

If not, the following points of rejection must be addressed and require resubmittal by the Contractor:

Item No.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

Reviewed By Date:

Legend

1 = OK

2 = Not Adequate

3 = Not Included

Note: This submittal has been reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents.


CITY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTION

CITY OF SHREVEPORT PROJECT :

________________________________________________________________

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTION ___________________________________

SUBJECT DESCRIPTION ____________________

TRAINING DATES AND TIMES _________________________________________________

TRAINING PROVIDED BY

Name__________________________________________________

Company_______________________________________________

Contact Information_______________________________________

CITY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

The City of Shreveport acknowledges receipt of training and instruction as recommended by the manufacturer(s) for the subject items.

City Representative (Sign, Print Name and Title)

Date_____________

END OF SECTION


SECTION 4740

WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the City prior to the date fixed by the City for Final Completion. If the Certificate of Final Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Final Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer.

B. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the City, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the City within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

C. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive 8-1/2in by 11-in paper.

D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Contract Documents, with each item identified with the number and title of the Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item.

E. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer.

F. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name and the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor.

G. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction,

provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

H. Schedule of Special Warranties

1. General Provision 103.5- Guarantees

I. Maintenance Bond: Furnish a two-year 10 percent maintenance bond as required in Special Conditions for Streets/Storm Drainage and Water/Sewer 5.4.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.


B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract

Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the City has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. City's Recourse: Written warranties made to the City are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the City can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

E. Rejection of Warranties: The City reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the City.

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the City.



END OF SECTION

Shreveport, LA STS01610 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

Section STS01610 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS

1. SCOPE. When an equipment technical specification section in this Contract references this section, the equipment shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section, except as otherwise specified in other sections.

2. COORDINATION. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Drawings or Technical Specifications. 3. SUPPLIER'S EXPERIENCE. Unless specifically named in the Technical Specifications, a supplier shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 4. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. When dissimilar metal components are used, consideration shall be given to prevention of galvanic corrosion. 5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. All equipment, including non-structural components and non-building structures as defined in ASCE 7, and their anchorage, shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section.


6. LUBRICATION. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. Lubricants of the types recommended by the equipment supplier shall be provided in sufficient quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. Lubricants for equipment where the lubricants may come in contact with water before or during a potable water treatment process or with potable water, shall be food grade lubricants. This includes lubricants for equipment not normally in contact with water, but where accidental leakage of the lubricants may contaminate the water. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position. 7. ELEVATION. The elevation of the site shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished shall be designed to meet stipulated conditions and to operate satisfactorily at the specified elevation. 8. ELECTRIC MOTORS. Unless otherwise specified, motors furnished with equipment shall meet the requirements specified in Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section or specified in specific equipment sections. 9. DRIVE UNITS. The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service. 9.01. Gearmotors. The use of gearmotors sharing an integral housing or cutgears into the motor output shaft, or that require removal of lubricant from the gear reducer to change out the motor will not be acceptable. 9.02. Gear Reducers. Each gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit with oil or grease lubricated, rolling element, antifriction bearings throughout. Unless superseded by individual technical specification requirements each helical, spiral bevel, combination bevel-helical, and worm gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 1.50 based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Cycloidal gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 2.0


based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Shaft-mounted and flange-mounted gear reducers shall be rated AGMA Class III. Helical gear reducers shall have a gear strength rating to catalog rating of 1.5. Each gear reducer shall be designed and manufactured in compliance with applicable most current AGMA standards, except the L10 bearing life shall be 200, 000 hours. The thermal horsepower rating of each unit shall equal or exceed the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. During continuous operation, the maximum sump oil temperature shall not rise more than 100°F above the ambient air temperature in the vicinity of the unit and shall not exceed 200°F . Each grease lubricated bearing shall be installed in a bearing housing designed to facilitate periodic regreasing of the bearing by means of a manually operated grease gun. Each bearing housing shall be designed to evenly distribute new grease, to properly dispose of old grease, and to prevent overgreasing of the bearing. The use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be acceptable in large sized reducers. In small reducers, similar to basin equipment, permanently sealed grease lubricated bearings rated L10 200,000 hour life may be provided at the supplier’s option. An internal or external oil pump and appurtenances shall be provided if required to properly lubricate oil lubricated bearings. A dipstick or a sight glass arranged to permit visual inspection of lubricant level shall be provided on each unit. Gear reducers which require the removal of parts or the periodic disassembly of the unit for cleaning and manual regreasing of bearings will not be acceptable. Certification shall be furnished by the gear reducer supplier indicating that the intended application of each unit has been reviewed in detail by the supplier and that the unit provided is fully compatible with the conditions of installation and service. 9.03. Adjustable Speed Drives. Each mechanical adjustable speed drive shall have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. A spare belt shall be provided with each adjustable speed drive unit employing a belt for speed change. Unless specifically permitted by the detailed equipment technical specifications, bracket type mounting will not be acceptable for variable speed drives. 9.04. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. 10. SAFETY GUARDS. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage thick or thicker galvanized,


aluminum-clad sheet steel, or stainless sheet steel or from 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal, or pultrusion molded UV resistant materials. Each safety guard shall be reinforced or shaped to provide suitable strength to prevent vibration and deflection and shall comply with OSHA. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. 11. ANCHOR BOLTS. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolt materials shall comply with the Anchorage in Concrete section, and sleeves shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be at least 3/4 inch in diameter. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. 12. EQUIPMENT BASES. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on concrete bases at least 6 inches high. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all components, and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in the Grouting section. 13. SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. 14. SHOP PAINTING. All iron and steel surfaces of the equipment shall be protected with suitable protective coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces of the equipment that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed


components shall be shop primed or finished with an epoxy or polyurethane enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system. Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint supplier for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of a universal primer. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound as recommended by the equipment supplier. 15. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. Equipment shall be prepared for shipment as specified in the Delivery Storage and Handling section. 16. STORAGE. Handling and storage of equipment shall be as specified in the Delivery Storage and Handling section. 17. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. Installation and operation shall be as specified in respective equipment sections and the Testing and Startup section. 18. OBSERVATION OF PERFORMANCE TESTS. Where the Technical Specifications require the presence of Design Engineer, initial tests shall be observed or witnessed by Design Engineer. Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor for all costs of subsequent visits by Design Engineer to witness or observe incomplete tests, retesting, or subsequent tests. 19. PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE. Programming software shall be provided for any equipment which includes a programmable logic controller (PLC) or other digital controller that is user-programmable. The software shall be suitable for loading and running on a laptop personal computer operating with a Windows-based operating system. A copy of the supplier's original operating logic program shall be provided for use in maintaining and troubleshooting the equipment. Where multiple pieces of equipment, from the same or different vendors, use the same programming software, only one copy of the software need be provided.

End of Section


Section STS01611

METEOROLOGICAL AND SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

1. SCOPE. Buildings, non-structural components and non-building structures shall be designed in accordance with this section. In the event of conflict with requirements in other sections, the more stringent criteria shall be followed. 2. DESIGN CRITERIA. Buildings, non-structural components, non-building structures including anchorage of such items, shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria.

General Design Data:

Building code and references IBC 2012, ASCE 7-10 “Minimum Design Loads

for Buildings and Other Structures”, AISC 360

“Technical Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings”, AISC 341 “Seismic Provisions for

Structural Steel Buildings”

Site elevation, above mean sea level (ft)

175.50 (Lucas WWTP)

157.00 (North Regional WWTP)

Wind Design Data:

Basic wind speed, V (mph) 120

Exposure category C

Risk category III

Building enclosure classification

Partially Enclosed

Snow Design Data:

Ground snow load, Pg (psf) 5

Importance factor (snow loads), I

1.1

Exposure factor (Ce) 1.0

Thermal factor (Ct) 1.0


Seismic Design Data

Mapped MCE short period spectral response acceleration, SS

0.126g

Mapped MCE one second period spectral response acceleration, S1

0.071g

Design short period spectral response acceleration, SDS

0.135g

Design one second period spectral response acceleration, SD1

0.113g

Risk Category III

Building Importance factor, I 1.25

Building Seismic Design Category B

3. WIND ANCHORAGE. Equipment that is to be located outdoors shall have anchor bolts designed for the effects of wind forces, as determined in accordance with ASCE 7, Chapters 26-31. Design of anchorage into concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318 Appendix D, shall consider concrete to be cracked, and shall not include the strengthening effects of supplementary reinforcement or anchor reinforcement unless approved by Design Engineer. Design of anchorage into masonry shall be in accordance with ACI 530. Post-installed anchors into concrete or masonry may be used only when approved by Design Engineer, and shall be designed in accordance with the anchor supplier’s research report. Shop drawings shall include full anchor bolt details, and shall be sealed by a professional Design Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Calculations shall be furnished when requested by Design Engineer. 4. SEISMIC DESIGN. 4-1. General. Structural systems shall provide continuous load paths, with adequate strength and stiffness to transfer all seismic forces from the point of application to the point of final resistance. 4-2. Pre-Engineered Buildings. Not used. 4-3. Non-Structural Components. Not used. 4-4. Non-Building Structures. Not used.

End of Section


Section STS01820

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION. This section contains requirements for training the Owner’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed under this contract. 1.02 GENERAL. As required by the specifications, the manufacturer’s representative shall provide on-the-job training of the Owner’s personnel. The training sessions shall be conducted by qualified, experienced, factory trained representatives of the various equipment manufacturers. Training shall include instruction in both operation and maintenance of the subject equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with the provisions of the Submittals section. The material shall be submitted not less than 4 weeks prior to the provision of training.

1. Lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and other reference materials for each training session to be conducted by the manufacturer’s representatives.

2. Subject of each training session, identity and qualifications of individuals to be conducting the training, and tentative date and time of each training session.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL. Where specified, the Contractor shall conduct training sessions for the Owner’s personnel to instruct staff on the proper operation, care, and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed under this contract. Training shall take place at the site of the work and under the conditions specified in the following paragraphs. Approved operation and maintenance manuals shall be available at least 30 days prior to the date schedule for the individual training session. 2.02 LOCATION. Training sessions shall take place at the site of the work at a location designated by the Owner.


2.03 LESSON PLANS. Formal written lesson plans shall be prepared for each training session. Lesson plans shall contain an outline of the material to be presented along with a description of the visual aids to be utilized during the sessions. Each plan shall contain time allocation for each subject. One complete set of originals of the lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids and reference materials shall be the property of the Owner and shall be suitable bound for proper organization and easy reproduction. The Contractor shall furnish ten copies of necessary training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and reference materials at least 1 week prior to each training session. 2.04 FORMAT AND CONTENT. Each training session shall include classroom and time at the location of the subject equipment or system. As a minimum, training sessions shall cover the following subjects for each item of equipment or system:

1. Familiarization

a. Review catalog, parts lists, drawings, etc, which have been previously provided for the plan files and operation and maintenance manuals.

b. Guided inspection of the subject equipment. c. Demonstration of the subject equipment and how operation in

accordance with the specified requirements.

2. Safety

a. Review and demonstration of safety procedures and related documentation.

b. Inspection and discussion of hazardous components of the subject equipment.

3. Operation

a. Review of subject equipment operations literature and theory of

operation. b. Overview of equipment operation and function. c. Explanation and demonstration of all modes of operation including

start up, shut down, normal, and emergency operation, and manual and automatic operation through the plant control system.

d. Explanation of all hardwired interlocks. e. Explanation and demonstration of equipment related valves and

their purpose.


f. Explanation of all equipment related instruments including primary element, instrument indicator, purpose, and interpretation of information.

g. Check out of Owner’s personnel on proper use of the equipment.

4. Preventive maintenance

a. Review preventative maintenance documentation and discussion of maintenance require at various intervals; e.g. daily, weekly, monthly, annually.

b. Demonstrate performance of each preventive maintenance task. c. Identification of indicators of equipment problems. d. Discussion of corrosion protection and lubrication requirements. e. Requirements for periodic exercise of equipment and

demonstration of equipment exercise where required. f. Identification of inspection points and demonstration of inspection

covers removal and routine disassembly and assembly of equipment.

5. Corrective Maintenance and Equipment Repair

a. Discussion of common repairs and identification of special

problems. b. Explanation and demonstration of equipment inspection and

troubleshooting. c. Demonstration of calibration procedures. d. Demonstration of repair procedures where practical.

6. Parts

a. Discussion of the parts list and ordering of parts. b. Review of spare parts provided with the equipment and

identification of other recommended spare part.

7. Local Representatives

a. Name, address, telephone of local representative. b. Review of contact information for providers of routine and

emergency repair and operational assistance.

8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

a. Review of O&M manual content and organization. b. Update O&M material as required.

2.05 VIDEO RECORDING. Refer to the requirements in Section 4730.


PART 3 – EXECUTION Training shall be conducted in conjunction with the operational testing and commissioning periods. Classes shall be scheduled so that training is performed when equipment is available for operation. The Contractor shall arrange to have the training conducted on consecutive days, with no more than 6 hours of class scheduled for any one day. Concurrent classes will not be permitted.

End of Section


Section STS02220

FACILITIES DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Demolishing and removing existing structures, equipment, and materials.

B. Disposing of demolished materials and equipment.

1. Specific Items to be Salvaged by Owner will include:

a. Motors

b. Gearboxes/Gear Reducers

C. Removal and disposal of waste, sediment, and debris.

1.02 UNIT PRICES

A. Unless indicated in the Unit Price Schedule as a pay item, no separate payment will

be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost of work performed

under this Section in pay items for which this work is a component. Price shall

include, but is not limited to labor, materials, equipment, testing, and disposal costs.

The Owner will not pay additional costs associated with material failing the paint

filter upon arrival at the landfill or costs associated with overweight loads.

B. Dewatering of piping/structures, sediment, and debris material is considered

incidental to work described in this section unless otherwise noted. Include cost of

work performed under this Section in pay items for which this work is a

component.

1.03 REFERENCES – Not Used

1.04 SUBMITTALS


A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Submittals section.

B. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials, and sequence of operations for

cleaning and demolition of structures. Describe coordination for shutting off,

capping, and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary

disruption of utilities to existing facilities. Provide landfill name, owner/operator, and

location.

C. Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Owner in

writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition and cleaning.

D. Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Fire Department prior to

commencement of demolition operations.

E. Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required.

F. Submit copies of all required licenses and permits for each solids transportation rig.

G. Submit copies of OSHA confined space entry certificates, Category "C", for all

workers that will be entering the structure/pipe during operating conditions.

H. Submit copies of waste manifest and weight tickets.

1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Owner shall have the first right of refusal to retain or salvage all items shown

to be demolished and/or removed. Prior to initiating demolition work, the

Contractor and Owner shall make a joint inspection of each site to identify all

equipment to be retained by the Owner for salvage or refuse. It is the Contractor’s

responsibility to remove all other items, which are not retained by the Owner, from

the site.

B. Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property

of the Contractor.

1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of

installation.


B. Deliver items to be salvaged to Owner property storage areas approved by Plant

Operations. Items will be unloaded by Owner personnel. Motors and Gearboxes

shall be salvaged.

C. Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste

and debris resulting from demolition activities. Remove material as work

progresses to avoid clutter.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

A. Minimize spread of dust and flying particles. If required by governing regulations,

use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to prevent the spread of

dust, dirt and debris.

B. Use appropriate controls to limit noise from demolition to levels designated in

Owner ordinances.

C. Do not use water where it can create dangerous or objectionable conditions, such

as localized flooding, erosion, or sedimentation of nearby ditches or streams.

D. Stop demolition and notify Owner if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos,

PCBs, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered.

E. Dispose of removed equipment, materials, waste, sediment and debris in a manner

conforming to applicable laws and regulations.

F. Obtain proper permits, as required, for lead removal for all equipment to be

demolished/removed.

G. Contractor shall be responsible for testing equipment, materials, waste, sediment,

and debris removed for classification prior to disposal. Contractor shall dispose of

removed equipment, materials, waste, sediment, and debris in a manner conforming

to applicable Owner, State, and Federal laws and regulations.

H. All TCLP tests, paint filter tests, and other tests required shall be performed by a

designated Owner lab.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION

A. Use equipment and materials approved under Paragraph 1.04, Submittals.

B. Fires are not permitted.

C. Do not use a "drop hammer" where the potential exists for damage to underground

utilities, structures, or adjacent improvements.

D. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the supplier

or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are

potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

E. Diversion Pumps & Piping: If required, pumps shall be self-priming type or

submersible electric, in good working order, with a working pressure gauge on the

discharge. Pumps shall meet the requirements of the Noise and Sound Level

Regulations. Design piping, joints, and accessories to withstand at least twice the

maximum system pressure or 50 psi, whichever is greater.

F. Disposal Means: Roll off dumps, dump trailers, or dump trucks utilized for hauling

and disposal shall be watertight and comply with Federal, State, and local regulation

for transport. Provide maintenance of trucks and trailers as well as all required

licenses, insurance, and inspections. Transport containers shall be equipped with

tarpaulin cover, excluding enclosed containers, and shall be covered while not in

use and during transportation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Design Engineer to determine the

condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for

demolition.

B. Design Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the

Owner.


C. Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint

inspection and subsequent authorization by Owner.

3.02 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Provide safe working conditions for employees throughout demolition and removal

operations. Observe safety requirements for work below grade.

B. Maintain safe access to adjacent property and buildings. Do not obstruct roadways,

sidewalks, or passageways adjacent to the work.

C. The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment (gas masks, supply air,

forced ventilation, etc.) as required by OSHA Federal Regulations Part 29 CFR

1910.146 for entering and working in confined spaces with a hazardous atmosphere.

All work performed shall be in accordance with OSHA.

D. Perform demolition in a manner to prevent damage to adjacent property. Repair

damage to Owner property or adjacent property and facilities. The Contractor shall

be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for

any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring

necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be

endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been

taken.

E. Erect and maintain enclosures, barriers, warning lights, and other required

protective devices.

F. Schedule cleaning operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to

existing facilities.

G. Construct temporary flow diversion channels, temporary separation walls, or

temporary dams as necessary to facilitate debris removal.

H. Take all necessary precaution to prevent leakage or spills of any kind. In the event

of accidental spill or overflow during cleaning operations, immediately take action to

clean up and disinfect the spill. Promptly notify the Owner within 2 hours of the

event or observance.


3.03 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over

communications, pipelines, and electrical distribution services.

B. Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when

temporary interruption of utility service is necessary.

3.04 PREPARATION FOR SLUDGE/SEDIMENT REMOVAL

A. Detailed measurements have not been taken and the Contractor should expect

heavy accumulation of sediment. Prior to initiating work, an initial estimate shall be

made by the Contractor. The estimate shall be calculated by measuring the interior

surface dimensions of each process unit and dropping a measuring device into the

unit at various locations in order to determine the average depth of solids in each

unit.

B. Dewater grit, sludge, and sediment 24 to 48 hours prior to removal to prevent

excess water disposal. Drain and dewater the basin/pipe, collect debris by any

suitable means, and allow excess water to drain out of debris within the basin/pipe.

The dewatering method shall consistently achieve a solids capture rate of at least

95%.

C. Collect and analyze a representative sample(s) of solids to be removed. The

following analyses will be performed on this sample(s) using EPA approved

procedures.

1. ToxiOwner Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

2. Ignitability

3. Corrosivity

4. Reactivity

3.05 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FOR SLUDGE/SEDIMENT REMOVAL

A. Debris removal shall include the removal of all loose debris of all sizes, including any

rubbish, litter, grit, sediments, and any other foreign substances that may be

deposited within the structure/pipe.


B. The level of grit remaining in the basin shall be less than an average depth of 1-inch

over the bottom of the basin.

C. Debris removal shall include low pressure washing of all surfaces that is sufficient to

remove caked-on grit and sediments without causing damage to the existing surface

coatings. Cleaning does not include the removal of grime or stains.

D. Removed material shall be immediately placed in transport containers and shall not

be stockpiled in the basins, channels, wet wells, etc.

E. If rainfall or high flows are anticipated, the Contractor shall return the Owner

process unit that was taken out of service to a serviceable condition within three

(3) hours after notified to do so by the Owner. The Contractor shall remove all of

its equipment, materials, supplies, etc. from the process unit/wet well in this time

frame. The Owner will assume no liability for any damage to the Contractors

equipment that is not removed within the specified time.

3.06 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION – Not Used

3.07 DISPOSAL

A. Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated

for reuse or salvage.

B. Collect and dispose of all waste material, sediment, and debris present in structures.

Load into truck or trailer for transport and disposal in an approved landfill.

C. Prior to transportation, sludge/sediment material from each load shall be sampled

and analyzed using SW-846 paint filter test procedures and results recorded on the

waste manifest for the associated load.

D. Trash and loose debris shall not be permitted to accumulate at the Project site

including that generated from sludge and settled debris removal. Contractor shall

be responsible for removal and disposal of all waste materials regularly to an

approved site.

E. Follow methods of disposal as required by the applicable regulatory agencies.


3.08 BACKFILL – Not Used

3.09 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS

A. Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps,

motors, equipment, and other appurtenances. It includes cutting, capping, and

plugging required to restore use of existing utilities.

B. Remove existing process, water, chemical, and other piping not required for new

work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere

with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not

interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support, capped,

and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical lines. Verify that such lines are

safe prior to removal or capping.

C. Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap

piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be

capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated.

B. When underground piping is to be altered or removed, cap the remaining piping.

Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new

work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in

diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place.

C. Remove equipment, ducts, and all associated accessories, hangers and supports in

areas to have new equipment and ductwork to be installed. Drawings may not

show all demolition work prior to installations, but should be considered part of

the project.

D. Seal openings where ductwork has been demolished and all or part is not required

for new ductwork.

3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS

A. Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear,

distribution switchboards, control panels, bus duct, conduits and wires, panelboards,

lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment.


B. Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow

continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the

grounding systems.

C. Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Drawings.

Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that

power is properly de-energized and disconnected.

D. Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems.

Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts that are

not to be reused at entry to buildings.

E. Refer to Electrical Sections and Drawings for additional requirements.

F. Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes.

END OF SECTION


Section STS02704

PIPELINE PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing of piping. The term "piping" shall be used in this section to refer to piping systems, pipelines, or sections thereof.

A. Testing of other piping is covered in the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section.

1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall coordinate pressure and leakage testing with adjacent work as necessary to preclude work interferences or duplication of effort and to expedite the overall progress of the work.

A. Contractor shall provide all necessary piping, piping connections, temporary valves, backflow preventers, and all other items of equipment or facilities necessary to complete the pressure and leakage testing.

B. In all cases where it is necessary to interrupt service, permission of Owner shall

be obtained at least two days before the service will be interrupted. In all cases where it is necessary to interrupt service to water customers, permission of the Owner shall be obtained and each customer affected shall be notified of the proposed service interruption and its possible duration in accordance with the Project Requirements section.

C. Design Engineer or Design Engineer's representative shall have the option to be

present during testing and shall be notified of the time and place of testing at least 3 days prior to commencement of testing. All testing shall be performed to the satisfaction of Design Engineer, and in accordance with all governing standards and regulations.

1-2.01. Testing Schedule and Procedure. A testing schedule and procedure shall be submitted to Design Engineer for review and acceptance not less than 7 days prior to commencement of testing. The schedule and procedure shall include, but not be limited to the following information for each pipe section to be tested:

limits of each pipe test section; proposed time and sequence; physical locations and set positions of all valves;


locations of temporary bulkheads, stops, caps, restraints, supports, and other temporary equipment needed;

manner of filling and source of water; method and location of gauging pressures; and method and location of disposal of test water.

1-2.02. Special Testing Requirements. Not used. 1-2.03. Water. Water for testing shall be furnished as stipulated in the Temporary Facilities section. As a conservation measure, the water shall be collected for reuse in subsequent testing. Unless otherwise permitted, the water shall be kept out of the remainder of the piping. Following completion of testing, the water shall be disposed of in accordance with the requirements of regulatory agencies and in a manner acceptable to Design Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary connections between the piping to be tested and the water source, together with pumping equipment, water meter, pressure gauges, backflow prevention, and all other equipment, materials, and facilities required to perform the specified tests, shall be provided. All required blind flanges, valves, bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and other sectionalizing devices shall also be provided. All temporary sectionalizing devices shall be removed upon completion of testing. Vents shall be provided in test bulkheads where necessary to expel air from the piping to be tested.

A. Test pressure shall be applied by means of a force pump sized to produce and maintain the required pressure without interruption during the test.

B. Water pressure gauges shall be accurately calibrated and shall be subject to

review and acceptance by Design Engineer.

C. Permanent or temporary gauge connections shall be installed at each location where test gauges are connected to the piping during the required test. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls will not be permitted. Upon successful completion of testing, each permanent gauge connection shall be fitted with an isolation valve and a permanent gauge, and each temporary gauge connection, if used, shall be fitted with a permanent sealed plug or cap acceptable to the Design Engineer.

D. Permanent or temporary fill and vent connections shall be installed as needed for

the required test. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls will not be permitted. Upon successful completion of testing, each permanent fill and vent connection shall be fitted with the permanent fill or vent piping, and each temporary fill and vent connection, if used, shall be fitted with a permanent sealed plug or cap acceptable to the Design Engineer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. FILLING AND VENTING. Before filling the piping with water, care shall be taken to ensure that all air release valves and other venting devices are properly installed and operating properly. Hand-operated vent valves shall not be closed until an uninterrupted stream of water is flowing from each valve. The rate of filling the piping with water must not exceed the venting capacity of the installed air vent valves and devices. 3-2. BLOCKING AND BACKFILLING. Piping shall be adequately blocked, anchored, and supported before the test pressure is applied. All piping may be tested after backfilling. 3-3. PRESSURE TESTING. After the piping to be tested has been filled with water, the test pressure shall be applied and maintained without interruption within plus or minus 5 psi [35 kPa] of test pressure for 2 hours plus any additional time required for Design Engineer to examine all piping being tested and for Contractor to locate any defective joints and pipe materials. The test pressure shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for pipeline or plant piping. 3-4. PLANT PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING. All plant piping shall be watertight and free from leaks. Each leak which is discovered during testing and warranty shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor.

End of Section


Section STS02930

SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers seeding to be performed after backfilling and final grading are complete. All areas disturbed by construction operations shall be treated as specified herein. All lawn, ditch, and street shoulder areas within street right-of-way and temporary construction easements that are damaged during the Work shall be restored, after completion of construction, to the complete satisfaction of Owner. All areas disturbed by Contractor outside the temporary construction easements shall be restored, at Contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the property owner, except that if the temporary construction easement through the ownership is sodded all disturbed areas outside the construction easement shall also be sodded. Occupying areas outside temporary construction easements, street right-of-way, and utility easements for any purpose shall be done only with the written approval of the property owner. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Governing Standard. The governing standard for the seeding and sodding Work shall be the City of Shreveport. 1-2.02. Experience. All Work shall be performed by a licensed landscaping Contractor who is licensed in the State of Louisiana. 1-2.03. Completion. At Owner's option, a portion of the final payment not to exceed one (1) percent of the contract price may be retained until an acceptable stand for all grass/ground cover is established. Seeding requirements are as follows:

Locations to be seeded. North Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant and Lucas Wastewater Treatment Plant

Area to be seeded. 0.5 acres 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Soil Test. Soil shall be tested to determine nutrient needs by the state Extension Service or an independent agricultural soil testing lab. Composite sample(s) shall be collected and submitted in accordance with lab instructions. Lab report and nutrient recommendations shall be provided to the Design Engineer.


1-3.02. Invoices and Analysis Labels. A copy of supplier’s invoices for all seed, mulch, and fertilizer which shows the quantity by weight purchased for the project and representative labels bearing the supplier’s or vendor’s guaranteed statement of analysis shall be submitted to Design Engineer for review and approval to assure compliance with specified requirements for quality and application rates. 1-4. GUARANTEE. 1-4.01. Seeding. Contractor shall guarantee a uniform stand of seeding, free of weeds to the extent practical, and acceptable to Owner. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. Prior to use, all products shall be kept dry and in a weatherproof location so that their effectiveness will not be impaired. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. All materials shall conform to the requirements of the Governing Standard, except where otherwise specified. 2-1.01. Starter Fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be a complete pelleted or granulated fertilizer. The analysis in percent by weight shall be as follows:

Seeded Areas

Nitrogen 12%

Phosphorus 12%

Potassium 12% 2-1.02. Seed. The standard seed mixture shall be 100% Hulled Bermuda, if field conditions warrant other types of seed, such as rye grass, may be used with permission of the Design Engineer. 2-1.05. Topsoil. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil, typical of the locality, free from stones, roots, sticks, clay, peat, weeds, and sod, and obtained from naturally well drained areas. It shall not be excessively acidic or alkaline nor contain toxic material harmful to plant growth. Stockpiled topsoil may be used but the Contractor shall furnish additional topsoil at his own expense if required.


2-1.05. Mulch. Mulch shall be a specially processed cellulose fiber containing no growth or germination inhibiting factors, or shall consist of straw from hay and shall include a tackifier. Mulch for hydroseeding operation shall be a wood mulch or combination wood and paper mulch in accordance with the Governing Standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL. Execution of seeding and sodding Work shall conform to the Governing Standard, or shall be as specified herein, whichever is the most stringent. 3-1.01. Clearing Prior to finish grading, areas to be seeded or sodded shall be cleared to remove stumps, stones larger than 3 inches [75 mm], roots, cable, wire, debris or other materials that might hinder seeding and/or sodding and future turf maintenance. 3-1.02. Finish Grading. Seeding and/or sodding shall not be started until all earthwork has been substantially completed. Backfills and fills shall be allowed to settle, the topsoil spread, and finish grading completed before the Work is started. Finish grading shall result in a surface conforming to the contours indicated on the Drawings. 3-1.03. Application of Fertilizer and pH Adjustment. After finish grading, any fertilizer or chemicals for pH adjustment specified shall be applied uniformly to areas to be seeded. Chemicals for pH adjustment shall be applied at a rate based on a soil test for pH. The rate shall be adequate to neutralize the soil. 3-1.04 Final Preparation Following application of additives and/or fertilizers the areas to be seeded and/or sodded shall be tilled to a true depth of 6 inches [150 mm] by disking, harrowing, or other accepted methods to thoroughly incorporate the additives and fertilizer, destroy vegetation, and pulverize the soil. After tilling, the bed shall be smoothed by dragging or floating. The surface shall be cleared of all stones, stumps or other objects larger than 1 1/2 inches [38 mm] in thickness or diameter; roots, wire, grade stakes, and other objects that might hinder future turf maintenance operations. When results are not satisfactory because of drought, excessive moisture or other causes, the Work shall be stopped until such conditions have improved or have been corrected. When possible, operations shall be performed parallel to the contour lines and operations uphill and downhill shall be avoided. 3-2. SEEDING. 3-2.01 Seed Application. Seed shall be applied within 72 hours after preparation of the seedbed. Seed shall be applied with equipment designed to give uniform application. Any method or combination of methods which uniformly distributes the seed directly in


contact with the soil, covers the seed, and firms the bed, may be selected. Seed shall be placed approximately 1/4 inch [6 mm] below the surface at a rate of 30 lbs/acre. 3-2.02. Mulching. All seeded areas shall be mulched within 24 hours following seed application. The mulching operation shall be in accordance with the Governing Standard. 3-3. HYDROSEEDING. 3-3.01. Seed Application. Seed shall be applied within 72 hours after preparation of the seedbed. The wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be applied at the minimum rate of 30 lb/acre in two separate operations. Ten percent of the specified rate of fiber mulch shall be applied with the seed and the remainder applied after seeding. 3-5. WATERING. 3-5.01. Seeded Areas. Watering for seeded areas will not be required. 3-6. REPLANTING. 3-6.01. Seeded Areas. Unacceptably seeded areas shall be overseeded or completely reseeded as instructed by Design Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted by Design Engineer, reseeding shall be performed during the next planting season. 3-7. MAINTENANCE. All areas shall be maintained until final acceptance of the project. 3-7.01. Seeded Areas. Maintenance shall include any necessary reseeding, repair of erosion damage, and replacement of displaced mulch until covered with seedlings. In the event erosion occurs from either watering operations or rainfall, such damage shall be repaired.

End of Section


Section STS03302

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers all cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcing steel, forms, finishing, curing, and appurtenant work. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. All submittals of drawings and data shall be in accordance with the Submittals section. The following items shall be submitted for review:

Aggregate reports (ASTM C33)

Source and type

Gradation

Deleterious materials

Alkali-aggregate reactivity

Cement mill report

Fly ash or slag cement test report

Admixture data sheets

Proposed mixture proportions

Concrete compressive strength at 28 days

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. LIMITING REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall be controlled within the following limiting requirements:

Cement Content At least 526 lbs per cubic yard.

Maximum Water-Cement Ratio

The maximum water-cement ratio shall be 0.42 on a weight basis, or, if fly ash or slag cement are used, the combined mass of cement plus fly ash or slag cement shall be used to determine the water-cementitious materials ratio.


Fly Ash or Slag Cement Content

At the option of Contractor, fly ash or slag cement may be substituted for portland cement, on the basis of 1.0 lb added for each 1.0 lb of cement reduction. Fly ash replacement shall be within a range of 15 to 25 percent. Slag cement replacement shall be within a range of 25 to 50 percent.

Concrete Strength 4,500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days.

Air Content 6 percent ±1.5 percent.

Coarse Aggregate Maximum nominal coarse aggregate size, 1 inch.

Admixtures A water-reducing admixture and an air-entraining admixture shall be included in all concrete. No calcium chloride or admixture containing chloride from sources other than impurities in admixture ingredients will be acceptable.

Consistency Workable, without segregation, with slump not more than 5 inches when concrete is placed.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Cement ASTM C150, Type II or l/ll, low alkali.

Fly Ash ASTM C618, Class F, except loss on ignition shall not exceed 4 percent.

Slag Cement ASTM C989, Grade 100 or Grade 120.

Fine Aggregate Non-reactive, clean, natural sand, ASTM C33.

Coarse Aggregate Non-reactive crushed rock, washed gravel, or other inert granular material conforming to ASTM C33, class 4S, except that clay and shale particles shall not exceed 1 percent.


Water Potable. Water from concrete mixing operations shall not be used.

Admixtures

Water-Reducing ASTM C494, Type A or D.

Air-Entraining ASTM C260.

High-Range Water Reducing

ASTM C494, Type F or G.

Reinforcing Steel

Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185 or A497.

Bar Supports CRSI Class 1, plastic protected; or Class 2, stainless steel protected.

Mechanical Connectors Splicing system meeting Type 2 tensile requirements of ACI 318. Products shall have a current evaluation report verifying testing per ICC-ES AC 133. Use only where indicated on the drawings.

Form Coating Nonstaining and nontoxic after 30 days. Product shall not exceed VOC limits established by the federal, state, or local regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project site.

Evaporation Reducer Dayton Superior “AquaFilm Concentrate J74”, Euclid "Eucobar", L&M Chemical "E-Con", BASF "MasterKure ER50", or Sika "SikaFilm".

Membrane Curing Compound and Floor Sealer

ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, minimum 25 percent solids, acrylic, non-yellowing, unit moisture loss 0.40 kg/m2 maximum in 72 hours. Product shall not exceed VOC limits established by the federal, state, or local regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project site.


Polyethylene Film Product Standard PS17 or ASTM D4397, 6 mils or thicker.

2-3. MIXTURE DESIGN AND TESTING. All reports and tests required for Design Engineer acceptance of materials and concrete mixtures shall be made at the expense of Contractor. Mixtures shall be adjusted in the field as necessary, within the limits specified, to meet the requirements of these technical specifications. If the source of any concrete materials is changed during the contract, concrete work shall pause until the new materials and the new mixture design are acceptable to Design Engineer. 2-3.01. Review of Materials. The source and quality of concrete materials shall be submitted to Design Engineer for review before concrete is placed. 2-3.02. Proposed Mixture Proportions. Proposed proportions of concrete shall meet the limiting requirements indicated herein. 2-3.03. Field Test Record Data. Concrete mixtures may be qualified based on field test record performance data. Field test data records shall be from the production facility being used on the current Project and shall have been performed in the past 12 months. Field test records shall represent a single group of at least 10 consecutive strength tests for one mixture, using the same materials, under the same conditions, and encompassing a period of not less than 45 days. 2-4. FORMS. Forms shall be designed to produce hardened concrete having the shape, lines, and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and shall be maintained in proper position and accurate alignment. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated before concrete is placed. Form-facing materials shall be selected in accordance with ACI 347.3R, based upon the applicable formed concrete surface category. Formed concrete surface categories vary by structure and application, and shall be as indicated in the Finishing Formed Surfaces paragraph. 2-5. REINFORCEMENT. Reinforcement shall be accurately formed and positioned, and shall be maintained in proper position while the concrete is being placed and compacted. Reinforcement shall be free from dirt, loose rust, scale, and contaminants. Mechanical connectors shall be used only as indicated on the drawings.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. BATCHING, MIXING, AND DELIVERY. Concrete shall be furnished by an acceptable ready-mixed concrete supplier, and shall conform to ASTM C94 except as indicated otherwise in this technical specification. 3-2. PLACEMENT. Concrete shall be conveyed to the point of final deposit and placed by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of the ingredients. During and immediately after placement, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and worked around all reinforcement and embedments and into the corners of the forms. Unless otherwise authorized, compaction shall be by immersion-type vibrators. The use of "jitterbug" tampers to compact concrete flatwork will not be permitted. 3-2.01. Polyethylene Film. Where concrete is placed against gravel or crushed rock which does not contain at least 25 percent material passing a No. 4 sieve, such surfaces shall be covered with polyethylene film. Joints in the film shall be lapped at least 6 inches and taped. 3-2.02. Cold Weather Concreting. Except as modified herein, cold weather concreting shall comply with ACI 306.1. 3-2.03. Hot Weather Concreting. Except as modified herein, hot weather concreting shall comply with ACI 305.1. 3-3. FINISHING. 3-3.01. Finishing Formed Surfaces. Formed concrete surfaces shall meet all criteria of the relevant formed concrete surface category (CSC), as defined in ACI 347.3R, except as indicated otherwise herein. Surfaces shall be assigned to CSC’s as indicated.

Formed Concrete Surface Category

Applicable Surfaces Mockup Required

CSC1 Formed concrete surfaces that will be in permanent contact with earth backfill.

No

CSC2 All other formed concrete surfaces not designated otherwise.

No

Unless otherwise specified, unformed surfaces shall be given a float finish. 3-3.02. Application of Evaporation Reducer. Concrete flatwork subject to rapid evaporation due to hot weather, drying winds, and sunlight shall be protected


with an evaporation reducer. The evaporation reducer shall form a continuous film on the surface of fresh, plastic concrete to reduce evaporation. Immediately following screeding, evaporation reducer shall be sprayed over the entire surface of fresh, plastic concrete flatwork at a rate of not less than 200 square feet per gallon, in accordance with the supplier's recommendations. The spray equipment shall have sufficient capacity to continuously spray the product at approximately 40 psi with a suitable nozzle as recommended by the supplier. The sprayable solution shall be prepared as recommended by the supplier. Under severe drying conditions, additional applications of evaporation reducer may be required following each floating or troweling, except the last finishing operation. 3-4. CURING. Concrete shall be protected from loss of moisture for at least 7 days by membrane curing or by water curing, except that when concrete is being protected from low temperatures, the duration of water curing may be shortened to one day less than the duration of the cold weather protection. Membrane curing compound shall be applied as recommended by the supplier. Water curing shall be in accordance with ACI 308.1.

End of Section


Section STS03600

GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers procurement and installation of grout. Unless otherwise specified, only nonshrink grout shall be furnished. Epoxy grouting of anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and reinforcing bars is covered in the anchorage in concrete and masonry section. Grouting of masonry is covered in the building masonry section. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. A letter of certification indicating the types of grout to be supplied and the intended use of each type shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage of any kind. Materials shall be protected from moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS.

Nonshrink Grout Precision cementitious grout with demonstrated non-shrinking properties, minimum 28 day compressive strength of 9000 psi; L&M "Crystex", BASF "Masterflow 928”, Sika “SikaGrout 328”, or Dayton Superior "Sure-Grip High Performance Grout".

Fast-setting Nonshrink Grout

Sika “SikaGrout 428FS” or approved equal.

Water Clean and free from deleterious substances. 2-2. CEMENTITIOUS GROUT. Cementitious grout shall be furnished factory premixed so that only water is added at the jobsite. 2-3. EPOXY GROUT. Epoxy grout shall be used in lieu of cementitious grout when required by the equipment supplier for performance or warranty requirements. Epoxy grout products and installation procedures shall be submitted to Design Engineer for approval.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. PREPARATION. The concrete foundation to receive nonshrink grout shall be saturated with water for at least 12 hours preceding grouting unless additional time is required by the grout supplier. 3-2. INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. Mixing. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. No more water shall be used than is necessary to produce a flowable grout. 3-2.02. Placement. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, grout under baseplates shall be 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] thick. Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with the directions of the supplier so that all spaces and cavities below the baseplates are completely filled without voids. Forms shall be provided where structural components of baseplates will not confine the grout. 3-2.03. Edge Finishing. In all locations where the edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the grout shall be finished smooth after it has reached its initial set. Except where shown to be finished on a slope, the edges of grout shall be cut off flush at the baseplate. 3-2.04. Curing. Nonshrink grout shall be protected against rapid loss of moisture by covering with wet cloths or polyethylene sheets. After edge finishing is completed, the grout shall be wet cured for at least 3 days and then an acceptable membrane curing compound shall be applied.

End of Section


Section STS03920

CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the repair of existing concrete surfaces as indicated on the drawings, as specified, or as required to complete the Work. This technical specification covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment and materials required to repair, rehabilitate or reconstruct spalled, deteriorated, or structurally damaged concrete surfaces. Depth of repairs shall be adequate to restore concrete members to original dimensions and surface profiles. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Technical specifications and data covering physical properties, the mixtures, application procedures, and curing procedures of the materials proposed shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals shall include the approvals required from the material supplier. 1-3. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-3.01. Supplier's Field Services. The material supplier shall provide engineering field services to review the project and the selected material application prior to any preparation; to approve the applicator, the material used, and the procedure to be used; to observe and approve surface preparation; and to observe application and curing procedures. The field representative of the material supplier shall submit, in writing through Contractor, approvals of proposed materials, surface preparation, applicator, and application procedures. The field representative shall instruct the applicator, as needed, to assure that handling, mixing, placing, finishing, and curing of materials are in accordance with technical specifications and supplier’s requirements. The field representative shall be an employee of the material supplier. 1-3.02. Applicator. The repair contractor shall have experience and proficiency specific to the repair type and shall be acceptable to Design Engineer and the material supplier. The applicator shall submit, through Contractor, a satisfactory experience record including references for previous application of the specified materials to concrete structures of similar design and complexity. 1-3.03. Pre-construction Meeting. At least 30 days prior to planned performance of the Work, Contractor shall conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for the Work. Site conditions, surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing and finishing procedures, and curing methods shall be discussed and approved by Design Engineer and by the supplier’s field representative. Contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties, including but not limited to Contractor’s superintendent, repair


contractor if applicable, supplier’s field representative and proposed equipment supplier representative. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by Contractor and distributed to all parties, including Design Engineer, within 5 days after the meeting. 1-3.04. Site Conditions. Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material placement within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions or unexpected additional deterioration uncovered during the course of Work by Contractor shall be brought to Design Engineer’s attention for analysis and disposition. These conditions include but are not limited to poor quality base concrete, severely corroded reinforcing steel, random cracks, deep oil penetration and any other condition which would prevent completion of the Work in accordance with supplier’s recommendations and this technical specification. 1-4. PRE-BID INSPECTION. Contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to witness and verify the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include a lump sum for the Work with a unit price adjustment for each repair type. Unit prices shall be utilized to adjust the final project cost upon completion and acceptance of the Work based on actual quantities more than or less than the bid form estimated quantities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Concrete repair products shall be manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company, BASF Corporation, Sika Corporation, or equal as specified herein. Equivalent products of other suppliers regularly producing high quality concrete repair materials, providing engineering field services, and meeting the specified quality assurance requirements may be furnished subject to acceptance by Design Engineer. 2-2. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise specified or authorized, materials shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Types of materials or concrete repair not specified herein shall be as specified in other sections, as indicated on the drawings or, in the absence of any definite requirement, as recommended by the supplier's field representative and acceptable to Design Engineer. Products shall not exceed VOC limits established by the federal, state, or local regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the project site. 2-2.01. Leveling Mortar or Surface Filler. Applied thickness less than one fourth inch. One-component or two-component, polymer-modified, cementitious product. Material shall have the following properties:


1. Minimum 6,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days per ASTM C109 using 2 inch cubes.

2. Bonding agent shall be a repair mortar scrub coat utilizing mixed product per supplier’s printed installation instructions.

MasterEmaco N 300CI BASF

Thin-Top Supreme Euclid SikaTop 121 Plus Sika

2-2.02. Horizontal Repairs and Overlays. 2-2.02.01. Overlay thickness less than one inch. One-component or two-

component, polymer-modified, cementitious product. Material shall have the following properties:


2. Minimum 1,200 psi flexural strength at 28 days per ASTM C348. 3. Minimum 2,100 psi bond strength at 28 days per ASTM C882

modified. 4. Bonding agent shall be a repair mortar scrub coat utilizing mixed

product per supplier’s printed installation instructions. MasterEmaco T 310CI BASF Dural Top Flowable Mortar Euclid SikaTop 122 Plus Sika 2-2.02.02. Overlay thickness equal to or greater than one inch. One-

component, polymer-modified, silica-fume enhanced, cementitious product, containing integral corrosion inhibitor. Material shall have the following properties:


2. Minimum 1,000 psi flexural strength at 28 days per ASTM C348. 3. Minimum bond strength per ASTM C882 modified.

a. 500 psi at 1 day b. 2,400 psi at 28 days

4. Maximum 1,000 coulombs rapid chloride permeability at 28 days per ASTM C1202.

5. Bonding agent shall be a repair mortar scrub coat utilizing mixed product per supplier’s printed installation instructions.


MasterEmaco N 425 BASF Concrete Top Supreme Euclid Sika Top 122 Plus Sika 2-2.03. Vertical or Overhead (Non-sag) Repairs. One-component or two-component, polymer modified, cementitious mortar containing a migratory corrosion inhibiting admixture and suitable for interior or exterior use. Material shall have the following properties:

1. Minimum compressive strength per ASTM C109 using 2 inch cubes. a. 2,000 psi at 1 day b. 3,500 psi at 7 days c. 5,500 psi at 28 days

2. Minimum flexural strength per ASTM C348. a. 650 psi at 7 days b. 1,000 psi at 28 days

3. Minimum 2,500 psi at 28 days shear bond strength per ASTM C882. 4. Bonding agent shall be a repair mortar scrub coat utilizing mixed

product per supplier’s printed installation instructions. The bonding agent shall be used for all trowel applied mortars.

MasterEmaco N 400 BASF Verticoat Supreme Euclid Speed Crete PM Euclid SikaTop 123 Plus Sika 2-2.04. Form and Pour. Thickness 6 inches or less. One-component, silica-fume enhanced, cementitious product, shrinkage compensated or polymer modified, containing migratory corrosion inhibiting admixture and suitable for interior or exterior use. Material shall have the following properties:


2. Minimum 770 psi flexural strength at 28 days per ASTM C348. 3. Minimum bond strength per ASTM C882 modified.

a. 1,200 psi at 1 day b. 2,500 psi at 28 days

4. Maximum 1,000 coulombs rapid chloride permeability at 28 days per ASTM C1202.

5. Bonding agent shall be extended open time epoxy emulsion cement modified bonding agent, and shall be utilized in areas where form and pour repair products are being placed in a manner that exceeds the working life of the scrub coat, such as when enclosed forms are used.


MasterEmaco S 466CI BASF Eucocrete Supreme Euclid Sikacrete 211 SCC Plus Sika 2-2.05. Penetrating Sealer. Silane-based sealer with minimum 40 percent active ingredient. Minimum water repellency 85 percent by ASTM C642. No scaling exhibited at 100 cycles by ASTM C672. MasterProtect H 400 BASF Baracade Silane 40 Euclid Sikagard 740 W Sika 2-2.06. Water. Clean and free from deleterious substances. 2-2.07. Accessory Products.

2-2.07.01 Repair Mortar Scrub Coat Bonding Agent. For proprietary prepackaged repair mortars, utilize the material itself mixed to a scrub coat or slurry consistency per supplier’s printed installation instructions.

2-2.07.02. Extended Open Time Epoxy Emulsion Cement Modified Bonding Agent. Protective coating for reinforcing steel and to bond repair material to reinforcing steel. Three-component, pre-proportioned, water based epoxy modified portland cement bonding agent containing migratory corrosion inhibitor. Product shall not form a vapor barrier and shall also serve as a anti-corrosion coating for reinforcing steel. Material shall have a minimum 2,000 psi bond strength at 7 days per ASTM C882.

MasterEmaco P 124 BASF Duralprep A.C. Euclid Armatec 110 EpoCem Sika 2-2.08. Coarse Aggregate Extension of Cementitious Mortar. In areas where depth of repair exceeds supplier’s recommended limits for neat repair mortar, repair mortar may be extended with washed, graded, rounded, high-density, low-absorption coarse aggregate meeting ASTM C33. Aggregate shall be in size and volumes recommended by the product supplier. Aggregate extension shall not be permitted unless approved by Design Engineer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall prepare and apply all materials in strict accordance with the supplier’s printed installation instructions which are hereby made part of this technical specification.


3-2. INSPECTION. Prior to the placement of repair material, the surface to be repaired shall be inspected by the material supplier’s field representative to assure the surface conditions are correct for the type of repair and product/material is being used as specified. 3-3. PREPARATION. 3-3.01. Cleaning. The surface of existing concrete shall be clean and the pores free of any dirt or material that will be detrimental to the bond of the repair material. All oil, dirt, debris, paint, and unsound concrete shall be removed. Cleaning shall include complete removal of all dust, dirt, and residue by high pressure washing. 3-3.02. Surface Preparation. All prepared surfaces shall conform to the requirements of the material supplier. All edges shall be square cut to avoid feather edges. As required, surfaces shall be prepared mechanically using a scabbler, bushhammer, chipping hammer, shotblast, scarifier or hydrodemolition equipment which will give the specified surface profile. Means and methods selected by Contractor, subject to acceptance by Design Engineer, shall minimize surface micro-cracking (i.e. “bruising”) and impact on areas surrounding the Work area. Remove all loose and unsound concrete per International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Guideline 310.1R “Guide for Surface Preparation.” Unsound concrete surfaces shall have perimeter boundaries saw cut to minimum depth of one-half inch, or less if such depth will cause saw to come in contact with embedded reinforcing steel. Saw cuts shall be made perpendicular to the concrete surface and all concrete removal boundaries shall be straight and aligned parallel to opposite boundary edges resulting in repair areas that are rectangular in shape. Contractor shall provide a surface profile which is suitable for bonding, as defined in repair supplier’s printed installation instructions. In the absence of other instructions, the surface shall be roughened to 1/4 inch amplitude. If delamination, cracking, or unsound material exists beyond minimum removal depth, then removal shall continue until all unsound, delaminated, or cracked concrete has been removed from the repair area. 3-3.03. Cracks. Cracks shall be located and repaired, if required, in accordance with the Concrete Crack Repair technical specification. All cracks located within or adjacent to Work covered under this technical specification shall be repaired prior to performance of the Work covered under this technical specification.


3-3.04. Inspection and Replacement of Reinforcing Steel. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall be exposed to the extent that a minimum of three-quarter inch of clear space is provided all around the steel to allow proper placement of repair material. Contractor shall clean all exposed reinforcing steel to a bright finish prior to installation of repair materials. Replace any reinforcing steel that has lost more than 20 percent of the original cross-sectional area within the surface repair area. Existing reinforcing steel which has been cut or otherwise damaged shall be replaced if the damage exceeds 20 percent of the original cross-sectional area. New reinforcing steel shall be either lapped or spliced with existing steel on both sides of the damaged or corroded portion of reinforcing steel. Either Class B laps or ACI 318 Type 2 mechanical connectors shall be used. Repaired reinforcing steel shall be inspected by Design Engineer or Owner’s representative prior to placement of concrete repair materials. 3-4. APPLICATION. Concrete repair work shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements. 3-4.01. Bonding and Priming. Bonding agent shall be applied per supplier’s recommendations. The supplier’s coverage rate shall be followed. For rough surfaces, scrub bonding agent into the surface with a stiff broom. Apply all prepackaged bonding agent materials within recommended ambient and substrate temperatures published in the supplier’s printed installation instructions. Do not apply materials over frozen or liquid filled surfaces. Upon completion of all concrete and reinforcing steel demolition, surface preparation, and cleaning operations, apply specified bonding agent to substrate. Provide complete and thorough coverage of surface assuring that bonding agent has been fully worked into profile of surface. In areas where bonding agents classified as a mortar scrub coat are to be applied directly to concrete surface, such surfaces shall be saturated with water one hour prior to placement of the scrub coat to provide a saturated substrate. Just prior to application of the scrub coat, water shall be removed by compressed air blasting. Compressed air shall be maintained free of oil and contaminates by filtration as needed. In areas where bonding agents classified as an extended open time epoxy emulsion cement modified bonding agent are to be applied and all exposed reinforcing steel and other metal embedments, mix bonding agent and apply two uniform coats at supplier’s published recommended coverage rates to properly


prepared surfaces. Allow adequate time between coats per supplier’s recommendations. Special attention shall be given to timing of placement of bonding agents, so that the repair mortar is able to be placed within the allowable open time of the bonding agent or while any mortar scrub coats are wet and have not yet stiffened. 3-4.02. Treatment of Reinforcing Steel and Other Metal Embedments. All existing and new reinforcing steel shall be secured and properly positioned by tying to other secured bars or supplemental anchoring pins as needed. New reinforcing steel, which is not replacing existing reinforcing steel, shall be provided per the Drawings as applicable. All exposed reinforcing steel and other metal embedments within the repair area shall be treated with two coats of anti-corrosion bonding agent. 3-4.03. Forming. Where forms are required, water-tight forms shall be constructed with sufficient rigidity to withstand head pressure and prevent excessive deflection during material placement. For pumped applications without open top forms, provide a port connection or birdmouth of sufficient size to allow pumping into the form. After forms are removed, all birdmouths and other protrusions resulting from the placement method shall be carefully removed and the surface smoothed. Tolerances for formed work shall be as stipulated in ACI 117 for cast-in-place concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Formed surfaces shall meet a Class C for both abrupt and gradual irregularities. 3-4.04. Shoring and Support. When removal and repair of deteriorated concrete may cause temporary weakness, excessive deflections, structural instability, or other unacceptable damage, shoring or other suitable supports shall be provided until completion of the repair and adequate curing of repair material. 3-5. FINISHING. All unformed surfaces shall receive a light broom finish unless directed otherwise. 3-6. CURING. Immediately following placement and finishing procedures, cure cementitious repair mortars for a minimum of seven days. Curing procedures shall be in accordance with ACI 308.1 and the supplier’s printed installation instructions. The more stringent requirements shall control. During cold weather conditions, as defined by ACI 306.1, cold weather concreting procedures shall be followed including thermal protection of repair materials and removal of wet curing 24 hours prior to exposure to freezing temperatures.


Unless specified otherwise, one or more of the following methods shall be used: 3-6.01. Water Curing. Keep concrete surfaces continuously wet with water during the curing period. The method used shall limit water runoff and any runoff shall be directed and controlled. The difference in temperature between the water used for curing and the concrete surface shall not exceed 20 degrees F except when deemed a significant safety hazard and acceptable to Design Engineer. 3-6.02. Wet Coverings Curing. Cover the surfaces with moisture retaining curing blankets, burlap, cotton mats, or other suitable moisture retaining materials. The coverings shall not stain or otherwise discolor the repair material or the surrounding surfaces, and shall keep the repair products fully saturated during the curing period. Lap all coverings at least 8 inches at joints. 3-6.03. Membrane Curing. Membrane curing compounds shall not be used as a method for curing repair materials except when water curing or wet coverings curing are not acceptable to the repair material supplier and the supplier’s printed installation instructions requires membrane curing compounds to be used. 3-7. SEALING. Provide a penetrating sealer over the concrete repair product when recommended by the repair product supplier, or when no other sealer is specified on the drawings or other technical specifications. The penetrating sealer shall be applied in accordance with the supplier’s instructions. 3-8. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-8.01. Material Storage and Handling. The material shall be delivered in original, unopened containers. Containers shall be labeled with the supplier’s name, product name, and lot number. Materials shall be stored at the job site under dry conditions and at temperatures between 50 deg F and 90 deg F unless more stringent limitations are required by the supplier. 3-8.02. Environmental Conditions. Repair materials shall not be applied without protection in temperatures below 45 deg F, nor when the temperature is expected to fall below 45 deg F during the curing period, unless otherwise specified by the material supplier and cold weather concreting procedures are followed in accordance with ACI 306.1. When ambient temperatures below 45 deg F are expected during the curing period, the repair material shall be maintained at 50 deg F for the full curing period. Sudden cooling shall not be permitted. Gradual temperature drop shall be maintained at not more than 20 deg F in any 24 hour period. Carbon dioxide or exhaust gases from combustion heaters shall not be allowed within enclosures or allowed to contact the repair material.


3-8.03. Protection. Repair areas shall be protected from other trades and weather for a minimum of 10 days after material is placed. 3-8.04. Cleaning. Work areas are to be cleaned each day in accordance with the Project Requirements section. Upon completion of the final cleanup, Contractor shall restore all areas affected by repair procedures to their original condition, leaving no trace of material piles or other wasted materials.

End of Section


Section STS03930

CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the repair of concrete and shotcrete cracks and joints. 1-1.01. General Crack Repair. General crack repair is applicable only to new construction, and shall include the following:

a. Sealing of all cracks and crack networks that are wider than 10 mils as measured at the exposed surface.

b. All necessary repairs to structures that have failed a tightness test, including sealing of construction joints.

All costs for general crack repair shall be included in the Contract Price. General crack repair work is expected to be necessary due to cracks that commonly develop during concrete construction. 1-1.02. Engineer-Directed Crack Repair. Engineer-directed crack repair is applicable only to new construction, and shall only be performed when instructed by Design Engineer. The work shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Sealing of construction joints that are not otherwise required to be sealed as the result of a failure of a leakage test.

b. Sealing of cracks and crack networks with a width of 10 mils or less as measured at the exposed surface.

Contractor shall include 150 linear feet of Design Engineer-directed crack repair in the Contract Price. The Design Engineer-directed crack repair may be either epoxy resin or foam resin, as determined by Design Engineer. 1-1.03. Pre-Defined Crack Repair. Pre-defined crack repair is applicable only to existing structures, and the extent of this type of repair is indicated on the Drawings. Prior to beginning the repair work Contractor shall field verify and provide clear bright colored marking to the cracks to be repaired. Crack repair work shall not begin until marking is complete and has been approved by Design Engineer.


1-2. SUBMITTALS. Technical specifications and data covering physical properties, mixtures, application procedures, and curing procedures of the materials proposed shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals shall include the approvals from the material supplier. 1-3. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-3.01. Supplier's Field Services. The material supplier shall provide engineering field services to review the Work and the material application prior to any preparation; to approve the applicator, the material used, and the procedure to be used; to observe surface preparation; to approve surface preparation; and to observe application. The field representative of the material supplier shall submit, in writing through Contractor, approvals of proposed material, application procedures, applicator, and surface preparation. The field representative shall be an employee of the material supplier. 1-3.02. Applicator. The applicator shall submit through Contractor a satisfactory experience record including references from previous application of the specified materials to structures of similar design and complexity. 1-3.03. Pre-Construction Meeting. At least 30 days prior to concrete crack repairs, Contractor shall conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work. Site conditions, surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing procedures, and curing methods shall be discussed and approved by Design Engineer and by the supplier’s field representative. Contractor shall require the attendance of all involved parties, including but not limited to Contractor’s superintendent, repair contractor, supplier’s field representative and proposed equipment supplier representative. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by Contractor and distributed to all parties within 5 days after the meeting. 1-3.04. Quality Assurance Certification. Material suppliers shall be ISO 9001/9002 registered or shall provide proof of documented quality assurance. The documented quality assurance system shall be obtained through an independent auditing registrar. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified or authorized, repairs shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Types of repairs not specified herein shall be as specified in other


sections, as indicated on the Drawings, or, in the absence of any definite requirement, as recommended by the supplier's representative and subject to acceptance by Design Engineer. The following types of repairs shall be performed as required. 2-1.01. Pressure-Injected Epoxy Resin. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pressure-injected epoxy resin shall be used to seal joints and cracks that are not intended to permit movement. 2-1.02. Pressure-Injected Foam Resin. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pressure-injected foam resin shall be used to seal joints that are intended to permit movement. 2-1.03. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be used to seal cracks in structures prior to pressure injection of resin. 2-2. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Repair products/materials shall be as specified herein. Equivalent products of other suppliers regularly producing high quality concrete crack repair products/materials, providing Design Engineering field services, and meeting the specified quality assurance requirements may be furnished subject to review and acceptance by Design Engineer. 2-3. MATERIALS. Materials shall be approved by the supplier for the type of application, including temperature and moisture conditions encountered.

Pressure-Injected Epoxy Resin

ASTM C881, Type I or Type IV, moisture tolerant or moisture insensitive.

Crack Sealant As recommended by the supplier of the pressure-injected epoxy resin product.

Pressure-Injected Foam Resin

Hydrophilic polyurethane foam; Prime Resins “Prime-Flex 900 XLV”, DeNeef "HYDRO ACTIVE Sealfoam NF", or Avanti “AV-333 Injectaflex”.

Foam Resin Accelerator As recommended by foam resin supplier.

Water Clean and free from deleterious substances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. Prior to the placement of the repair materials, the crack to be repaired shall be inspected by the material supplier to assure that preparation


and conditions are correct for the type of repair and the product/material being used as specified herein. 3-2. PREPARATION. All cracks and surfaces around the cracks shall be free of objectionable substances and shall conform to the requirements of the material supplier. Concrete and shotcrete to be repaired shall be cleaned by methods acceptable to the material supplier so that the cracks are free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, and other foreign matter. All loose and deteriorated existing concrete and shotcrete shall be removed down to sound materials. All concrete and shotcrete surfaces shall be checked for delamination to ensure that all surfaces are sound. All edges shall be square cut to avoid feather edges. Any other preparation recommended by the material supplier shall be brought to Design Engineer's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to Design Engineer. Concrete and shotcrete surfaces in the area of a crack to be repaired shall be cleaned by wire brushing, blasting, or other acceptable methods. Wall surfaces shall be sandblasted clean to expose crack networks and construction joints. If there is active water seepage in the repair area, the seepage shall be stopped as recommended by the injection material supplier and as acceptable to Design Engineer. Injection ports shall be installed, when recommended by the injection material supplier. 3-2.01. Injected Epoxy Resin. Preparation for injected epoxy resin shall include sealing the surface at the crack, on both sides when possible, with crack sealant as recommended by the material supplier and as acceptable to Design Engineer for the pressure injection work. Injection ports for epoxy resin shall penetrate through the crack sealant into the cracks at spacings recommended by the material supplier. 3-2.02. Injected Foam Resin. Preparation for injected foam resin shall include drilling offset injection holes at an angle that will intersect the crack, joint, or crack network at approximately one-half the thickness of the concrete or shotcrete up to a thickness of 36 inches. Spacing of injection ports shall be determined as recommended by the injection material supplier and as acceptable to Design Engineer. When the injection material supplier certifies, in writing, that spacing of injection ports and installation procedures are acceptable, the injection ports may be installed directly into the crack, subject to review by Design Engineer. 3-3. APPLICATION. Concrete and shotcrete repair work shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements. 3-3.01. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be trowel-applied to a minimum dried thickness of 1/8 inch, or thicker if directed by supplier’s literature. The concrete


surface where the sealant is applied shall be smooth, uniform, and free from irregularities. Crack sealant shall be removed after the injection of resin is completed, except for portions of wall faces that will be at least 12 inches below the finished grade. 3-3.02. Pressure-Injected Resin. The injected areas shall be prepared as specified and as recommended by the supplier. Pressure-injected resin shall be suitable for penetration of joints, cracks, and crack networks 2 mils wide and larger. After the joints and cracks are prepared and before the injection of the resin, the joints shall be flushed with water. The water flush shall be terminated when the turbidity of the expelled water is equal to that of the flush water. Unless otherwise acceptable to resin supplier and Design Engineer, cracks shall be dry prior to injecting resin. The pumping equipment used for the pressure injection of resin shall have pressure metering. Written procedures for use and quality control of the injection equipment shall be furnished to Design Engineer for review and acceptance. The pump shall be electric. The material and process used for the pressure injection of the resin shall have been in use a minimum of 5 years. The joints and crack networks shall have a minimum of 90 percent penetration of resin into the joint or crack network. Core samples may be taken at Design Engineer's discretion. 3-3.02.01. Epoxy Resin. Epoxy resin shall be injected into the structure in accordance with the material supplier's recommendations and as acceptable to Design Engineer. Epoxy resin shall be injected until the resin appears at the next injection port. 3-3.02.02. Foam Resin. Foam resin shall be premixed and injected into the structure in accordance with the material supplier's recommendations and as acceptable to Design Engineer. Foam resin shall be injected into the structure until the resin appears at the next injection port. Surfaces of cracks and joints may need to be sealed with crack sealant. 3-3.03. Cold Weather. When ambient temperatures below 40°F are expected during the curing period, the repair materials shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50°F for 14 days or 75°F for 7 days after placement. Sudden cooling of the repair materials shall not be permitted. 3-4. PROTECTION. Post-placement curing and protection shall be as specified herein and in accordance with the supplier's recommendations.


3-5. CLEANING. Work areas shall be cleaned each day in accordance with the Project Requirements section. Upon completion of the final cleanup, Contractor shall restore all areas affected by the grouting procedures to their original condition, leaving no trace of material piles or other wasted materials.

End of Section


SECTION STS05520

METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum railings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05590 "Structural Metals" for railings associated with stairs.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Supplier's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional Design Engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPLIERS

A. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings:

1. Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


a. Moultrie Manufacturing Corporation. b. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional Design Engineer, registered in the State of the project, to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. An allowable stress increase of 1/3 shall not be incorporated into the design of any part of the railing system.

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063-T832.


E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B247, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B26, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following: 1. Aluminum Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Expansion anchors or adhesive anchors, as specified in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section. 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:

Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS technical specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with the Protective Coatings section.

E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

F. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

G. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

H. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 187.

J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: As specified in the Grouting section.


2.7 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so

no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using supplier's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

F. Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.


2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Mill Finish: AA-M12, nonspecular as fabricated.

C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations

from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Sleeve type: Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material supplier's written instructions.

B. Post-Installed anchors: Fasten post base flanges to concrete in accordance with the Drawings and the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section.

C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.


3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood

backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.

4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

5. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements.

6. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION


SECTION STS05530

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Technical Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal bar gratings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05990 "Structural Metals" for structural metal framing system components and metal framed stairs.

2. Section 05520 "Metal Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating suppliers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



A. Mill Certificates: Signed by suppliers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From suppliers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPLIERS

A. Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Fisher & Ludlow; a NUCOR Company. 2. Harsco Industrial IKG, a division of Harsco Corporation. 3. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

2.2 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

B. Pressure-Locked, Rectangular-Bar Aluminum Grating: Fabricated by pressing rectangular flush-top crossbars into slotted bearing bars or swaging crossbars between bearing bars.

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 1-3/16 inches o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 3/16 inch minimum. 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches o.c. 5. Traffic Surface: Plain, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 6. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish.


2.3 ALUMINUM

A. General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer for type of use indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy, and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, alloys as follows:

1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6, for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1, for grating crossbars.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 5052-H32.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594 for nuts, Alloy Group 2.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with the Protective Coatings section.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary


for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 3. Toeplate Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

G. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by supplier for attaching to supports.

1. Provide no fewer than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.

2. Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars.

3. Provide no fewer than four weld lugs for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch or less in thickness and spaced less than 15/16 inch o.c., with each lug shop welded to three or more bearing bars. Interrupt intermediate bearing bars as necessary for fasteners securing grating to supports.


4. Provide no fewer than four flange blocks for each section of aluminum I-bar grating, with block designed to fit over lower flange of I-shaped bearing bars.

5. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.

6. Furnish self-drilling fasteners with washers for securing grating to supports.

7. Furnish galvanized malleable-iron flange clamp with galvanized bolt for securing grating to supports. Furnish as a system designed to be installed from above grating by one person.

a. Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Kee Safety, Ltd. 2) Lindapter International.

H. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

I. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or


abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating supplier for type of installation conditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in the Protective Coatings section.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION 05530


Section STS05550

ANCHORAGE IN CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the procurement and installation of anchors in concrete. It includes cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods, adhesive anchors for threaded rods, and expansion anchors. 1-2. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings all anchors shall be cast-in-place anchor bolts or anchor rods, with forged heads or embedded nuts and washers. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors for structural steel members connected to concrete shall have a diameter of at least 3/4 inch. Anchors designed by suppliers of products such as railings, ladders, and non-structural components shall have a diameter of at least 1/2 inch. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, anchors used in the following locations and applications shall be of the indicated materials.

Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods

All locations Stainless steel.

Adhesive and Expansion Anchors

All locations Stainless steel. Adhesive and expansion anchors may be used instead of cast-in-place anchors only where specifically indicated or permitted on the Drawings or with the specific acceptance by Design Engineer. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Data, catalog cuts, and supplier’s research reports (from independent organizations such as ICC-ES or IAPMO UES) indicating the supplier and types of adhesive anchors and expansion anchors to be supplied shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. If Contractor requests use of products other than those indicated herein, calculations may be required as part of the submittal package. Calculations shall be prepared by a professional Design Engineer licensed in the state of the project, using methods and procedures required by the building code. Contractor shall demonstrate that the proposed substitute anchors are equivalent in all necessary criteria, including strength, spacing and edge distance limitations, embedment depth limitations, temperature limitations, and any other criteria required by Design Engineer.


1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Materials shall be shipped and stored in original supplier's packaging. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, materials shall be as indicated below.

Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods

Stainless steel Bolts, ASTM F593, Alloy Group 2; nuts, ASTM F594, Alloy Group 2.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1; of the same material as anchor bolts and nuts.

Expansion Anchors in Concrete Products shall be single component anchors tested in accordance with ICC AC193, and shall have a supplier’s research report in compliance with the applicable building code. The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces. “Power-Stud+SD4” (304 stainless steel), and “Power-Stud+SD6” (316 stainless steel).

Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Products shall be tested in accordance with ICC AC308, and shall have a supplier’s research report in compliance with the applicable building code. The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces.

Threaded Rods and Nuts (Stainless Steel)

ASTM F593, CW.

Adhesive Hilti “HIT-HY 200", or Powers Fasteners “Pure 110+”.

2-2. ANCHORS. 2-2.01. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods. Cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be delivered in time to permit setting prior to the placing of structural concrete. Anchor sleeves shall not be used unless


acceptable to Design Engineer. Unless installed in sleeves, anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be provided with sufficient threads to permit a nut to be installed on the concrete side of the concrete form or the supporting template. Two nuts, a jam nut, and a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods indicated on the Drawings to have locknuts; two nuts and a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods without locknuts. 2-2.02. Adhesive and Expansion Anchors. When adhesive or expansion anchors are indicated on the Drawings, only acceptable systems shall be used. Acceptable systems shall include only those systems and products specified or specifically indicated by product name on the Drawings. Alternative anchoring systems may be used only when specifically accepted by Design Engineer. Unless otherwise required, single nuts and washers shall be furnished for adhesive anchors and expansion anchors. Adhesive anchors shall be free of coatings that would weaken the bond with the adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to projecting, threaded portions of stainless steel anchors immediately before tightening of the nuts. 3-1.01. Compliance With Supplier’s Instructions. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in accordance with the supplier’s printed installation instructions and all applicable requirements of the supplier’s research report for the specific anchor system. If conflicts are found between the Drawings, the supplier’s printed installation instructions, and the supplier’s research report installation requirements, Contractor shall notify Design Engineer for resolution. 3-1.02. Special Inspection. Special inspection requirements for cast-in-place and post-installed anchors shall be as indicated in the Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures section. Anchorage work shall be performed in a manner that allows the inspections to take place without adversely impacting the schedule. 3-2. CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR RODS. Cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be carefully positioned with templates and secured in the forms prior to placing concrete. Contractor shall verify that anchorage devices are positioned in accordance with the Drawings and with applicable equipment or structure submittal drawings. Threads, bolts, and nuts spattered with concrete during placement shall be cleaned prior to final installation of the bolts and nuts.


3-3. ADHESIVE ANCHORS. Adhesive shall be statically mixed in the field during application. All proportioning and mixing of the components shall be in accordance with the supplier's recommendations. Anchors or bars shall be installed in holes hammer drilled into hardened concrete. Diameter of holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than the outside diameter of the rod or bar unless recommended otherwise by the anchor system supplier. Holes shall be prepared by removing all dust and debris using procedures recommended by the adhesive supplier. Adhesive anchors and holes shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and other foreign matter at the time of installation. The adhesive shall be placed and the rods or bars shall be set in accordance with the recommendations of the supplier. Care shall be taken to ensure that all spaces and cavities are filled with adhesive, without voids. 3-3.01. Concrete Installation. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcing bars shall be embedded to a depth of 15 bar diameters, and threaded rods shall be embedded to a depth that will develop the yield strength of the rod. Adhesive anchors in concrete shall be installed under the following conditions.

Minimum Age of Concrete Prior to Anchor Installation

21 days.

Concrete Temperature Range Maximum short-term temperature 162 F, maximum long-term temperature 110 F.

Moisture Condition Dry concrete.

Type of Lightweight Concrete N/A

Hole Drilling and Preparation Hammer drill only. Installation of adhesive anchors into concrete that are either horizontal or upwardly inclined shall be performed only by personnel certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program. 3-4. EXPANSION ANCHORS. Expansion anchors shall be installed using all procedures and accessory devices recommended by the anchor supplier.

End of Section


Section STS05990

STRUCTURAL METALS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the fabrication and erection of structural metal items. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the AISC "Steel Construction Manual” (14th Edition) with the exception of the “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”; and the Aluminum Association "Technical Specification for Aluminum Structures". Special inspection during the fabrication and erection of structural aluminum, if required by the local building code, is addressed in the Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures section. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, fabrication drawings, and setting or erection drawings covering all structural and miscellaneous metal items shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. All bolted connections and welds shall be properly identified on the shop drawings. Welding procedures, welding procedure qualification records and welder qualifications shall be submitted. Submittals for high strength bolts, tension control bolts and load indicator washers shall include statements from the bolt and washer suppliers certifying satisfactory compliance with the governing standards and the specified tests. Submittals for items that are designed by the fabricator shall include drawings sealed by a professional Design Engineer registered in the state of the project. Data shall include confirmation that the design meets all applicable code requirements. Calculations shall be submitted when requested by Design Engineer. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent bends, dents, significant coating damage, or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Structural and miscellaneous metal work shall be stored on blocking so that no metal touches the ground and water cannot collect thereon. The material shall be protected against bending under its own weight or superimposed loads.


Bolting materials shall be stored indoors. Weld rod shall be stored in accordance with the supplier’s instructions and AWS D1.2. 1-4. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATION. All fabricating plants providing structural steel shall be qualified fabricators who participate in the AISC Certification program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category BU. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. All materials needed for both shop and field assembly shall be furnished. 2-2. MATERIALS.

Stainless Steel

Clip Angles ASTM A1069 or A276, Type 316L.

Bolts ASTM F593, Alloy Group 2, minimum yield strength of 45 ksi.

Nuts ASTM F594, Alloy Group shall match that of the bolts. Nuts shall have a minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the minimum full-size tensile strength of the bolts.

Washers

Flat ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, Type 316.

Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type, Type 316.

Threaded Rods (Including Hanger Rods for Pipe Supports)

ASTM A593, Alloy Group 2, minimum yield strength of 45 ksi.

Aluminum

Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.


Rolled Sections ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6. All members shall be Aluminum Association standard shapes. Special shapes with sloping flange surfaces, or Army-Navy type members, shall not be used unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.

Rod and Bar (Rolled or Drawn)

ASTM B211, Alloy 6061-T6 or 2017-T4.

Extrusions ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T6.

Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6.

Weld Metal (Aluminum Connections)

ANSI/AWS D1.2, Table 3.1, filler metal with minimum 70 ksi tensile strength unless otherwise required.

Shop Coatings

Universal Primer As indicated in the Protective Coatings section.

Epoxy Enamel As indicated in the Protective Coatings section.

Galvanizing ASTM A123, A153, A385, and F2329 as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM. Unless otherwise noted, all work shall conform to applicable provisions of the Aluminum Association "Technical Specification for Aluminum Structures". 3-1.01. Connections. Connections not specifically detailed on the Drawings shall develop the full strength of the least strength member of the connections. Bolted connections shall be all-bolted bearing type, equipped with a helical spring lock washer under the stationary element (bolt head or nut) and a flat washer under the turned element. All bolts shall be fully tightened. Bolts and nuts for structural aluminum connections shall be stainless steel. A sufficient number of bolts shall be provided in each connection to develop the shear strength of the member.


Welded connections shall be made in accordance with the American Welding Society D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. All welding shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with American Welding Society. Welds shall be free of porosity, cracks, holes, and flux. Welded connections shall not be substituted for bolted connections without prior approval of Design Engineer. 3-1.02. Erection. Structural aluminum shall be erected so that individual pieces are plumb, level, and aligned within a tolerance of 1:500. The elevation of horizontal members shall be within 1/16 inch of the elevation indicated on the Drawings.

End of Section


Section STS09940

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field applied protective coatings, including surface preparation, protection of surfaces, inspection, and other appurtenant work for equipment and surfaces designated to be coated with heavy-duty maintenance coatings. Regardless of the number of coats previously applied, at least two field coats in addition to any shop coats or field prime coats shall be applied to all surfaces unless otherwise specified.

1-2. GENERAL. Cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, and thickness shall be as specified herein and shall meet or exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. When the manufacturer's minimum recommendations exceed the specified requirements, Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's minimum recommendations. When equivalent products are acceptable to Design Engineer, Contractor shall comply with this technical specification and the coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1-2.01. Governing Standards. All cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, thickness, testing, and coating materials (where available) shall be in accordance with the referenced standards of the following AWWA, ANSI, NACE, SSPC, NSF, and ASTM. 1-2.02. Delivery and Storage. All coating products shall be received and stored in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1-2.03. Coatings, Painting, and Linings Covered in Other Sections. Not used. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Contractor shall submit color cards for all coatings proposed for use, together with complete descriptive technical specifications, manufacturer's product data sheet and the completed Coating System Data Sheets, to Design Engineer for review and color selection. Each product data sheet shall include application temperature limits including recoat time requirements for the ambient conditions at the site, including temperatures up to 130°F . Requests for review submitted directly to Design Engineer by coating suppliers will not be considered.

A. When the proposed products will be in contact with treated or raw water in potable water treatment facilities, Contractor shall submit certifications that the proposed systems are in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.

B. Contractor shall submit a Coating System Data Sheet for each separately

identified surface in the Metal Surfaces Coating Schedule, Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Coating Schedule, and the Miscellaneous Surfaces Coating Schedule that


will be used in the Project, using the appropriate Coating System Data Sheet forms (Figures 1-09940 and 2-09940) at the end of this section. Each field coating system shall be acceptable to the coating material manufacturer.

C. Coating System Data Sheets shall be assigned a unique number with a prefix

letter based on the following:

Prefix Surfaces Fig.09940

A Iron and steel (coated entirely in field) 1

A Iron and steel (shop primed) 2

C Concrete and concrete block 1

E Equipment - submerged 1

E Equipment – nonsubmerged 2

F Nonferrous metal 1

G Galvanized 1

H High temperature 1

P PVC and FRP 1

D. Each coating system that will be applied entirely in the field shall be

assigned only a prefix letter and no suffix letter. Fig.1-09940 shall be submitted for each surface coated entirely in the field.

E. Each shop-applied coating system that includes one or more field applied coats

shall be assigned both a prefix letter and suffix letter “F”. Fig.2-09940 shall be submitted for each surface having a shop applied coating and one or more field applied finish coats.

F. A separate Coating System Data Sheet shall be developed and submitted for

each surface scheduled to be coated or variation or change in a coating system. The number identifying the surface and coating system shall be of the form A11 or A12-F. The subscript number shall be assigned by the Contractor so that each surface and coating system combination is uniquely identified. For example:

1. A11-F may be assigned to “Epoxy – one coat to metal curbs for skylights and

power roof ventilators that have been shop primed.” 2. A21 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to non-galvanized structural and

miscellaneous steel exposed to view inside buildings.” 3. C21 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to all concrete and concrete

block in corrosive area (Except floors and surfaces scheduled to receive other coatings) which are exposed to view.”


4. C22 may be assigned to “Epoxy – two coats to walls, floors, and curbed areas, adjacent to corrosive chemical storage and feed equipment as indicated on the Drawings.”

G. For the epoxy and for aliphatic polyurethane, a total of not more than 15 custom

colors (excluding deeptone or high-level colors) may be required. The manufacturer's standard colors will be acceptable for all other coatings.}{The manufacturer’s standard colors will be acceptable for all coatings.}

1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Coating System Data Sheet Certifications. The coating applicator and coating manufacturer shall review and approve in writing the coating manufacturer's written recommendations for the coating system and the intended service. Any variations from the Technical Specifications or the coating manufacturers published recommendations shall be submitted in writing and approved by the coating manufacturer. The coating manufacturer shall observe the surface preparation, mixing, and application of the coating systems and submit a written report of his observations and any additional recommendations. 1-4.02. Special Interior Coating Systems. Not used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. 2-1.01. Alternative Manufacturers. In addition to the coatings listed herein, equivalent products of other manufacturers that distribute globally will also be acceptable. 2-1.02. Equivalent Coatings. Whenever a coating is specified by the name of a proprietary product or of a particular manufacturer or vendor, it shall be understood as establishing the desired type and quality of coating. Other manufacturers' coatings will be accepted, provided that sufficient information is submitted to enable Design Engineer to determine that the proposed coatings are equivalent to those named. Information on proposed coatings shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals section. Requests for review of equivalency will be accepted only from Contractor, and will be considered only after the contract has been awarded. 2-2. MATERIALS. All coatings shall be delivered to the job in original, unopened containers, with labels intact. Coatings shall be stored indoors and shall be protected against freezing. No adulterant, unauthorized thinner, or other material not included in the coating formulation shall be added to the coating for any purpose.


A. All coatings shall conform to the air quality regulations applicable at the location of use. Coating materials that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturer to conform, whether or not specified by product designation, shall not be used.

B. With the exception of heat resistant coatings, the coatings specified have been

selected on the basis of the manufacturer's statement that the VOC content of the product is 2.8 lbs per gallon or less; however, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to use only coating materials that are in compliance with the requirements of all regulatory agencies. Local regulations may require some coatings to have a lower VOC content than specified herein. The coatings specified may meet the VOC limits in the unthinned (as shipped) condition, but may exceed the limits if thinned according to the manufacturer's recommendations. In such case, the coatings shall not be thinned beyond the 2.8 lbs per gallon limit, and if the product cannot be thinned to suit the application method or temperature limits, another manufacturer's coating shall be used, subject to acceptance by Design Engineer.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the compatibility of field coatings

with each other or with any previously applied coatings. Coatings used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. The first field coat over shop coated or previously coated surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying coats.

D. All intermediate and finish coating materials that will be in contact with

wastewater atmosphere shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be fumeproof and suitable for wastewater plant atmosphere that contains hydrogen sulfide. Coatings that cannot be so guaranteed shall not be used. Lead-free, chromium-free, and mercury-free coatings shall be used.

2-2.01 Primers.

Universal Primer (tie coat) PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline "Rustbond", ICI Devoe "Devran 224HS", Tnemec "Series 27 F.C. Typoxy", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235".

Zinc Primer PPG Amercoat "Dimetate 9 Series", Carboline "Carbo Zinc II Series", ICI Devoe "Catha-Coat 304V", or Sherwin-Williams "Zinc Clad II Series".


2-2.03. Intermediate and Finish Coatings.

Epoxy (NSF certified systems)

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and Concrete Surfaces in Contact with Treated or Raw Water in Potable Water Facilities

PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy Coating", Carboline "Carboguard 891", ICI Devoe "Bar-Rust 233H" Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235 NSF"; immersion service.

Epoxy

Concrete Floors PPG Amercoat "Amerlock 400", Carboline "Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe "Devran 224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II”, or Sherwin-Williams "Armorseal 1000HS"; nonskid.

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and Masonry or Concrete Surfaces Other Than Floors

PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline "Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe Devran "224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II", or Sherwin-Williams "Dura Plate 235".

Flake-Filled Epoxy Carboline "Plasite 4500/4500S", Sherwin-Williams "Sher-Glass FF",

Aliphatic Polyurethane PPG Amercoat "Amercoat 450H", Carboline "Carbothane 134HG", ICI Devoe "Devthane 379H" Tnemec "Series 1074 Endura-Shield II", or Sherwin-Williams "Acrolon 218HS".

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. SURFACE PREPARATION. All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry and shall meet the recommendations of the coating manufacturer for surface preparation. Freshly coated surfaces shall be protected from dust and other contaminants. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss on previously coated surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of topcoats.

A. Surfaces shall be free of cracks, pits, projections, or other imperfections that would interfere with the formation of a smooth, unbroken coating film, except for concrete block construction where a rough surface is an inherent characteristic.


B. When applying touchup coating or repairing previously coated surfaces, the

surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned as recommended by the coating manufacturer, and the edges of the repaired area shall be feathered by sanding or wire brushing to produce a smooth transition that will not be noticeable after the coating is applied. All coatings made brittle or otherwise damaged by heat of welding shall be completely removed.

3-1.01. Galvanized Surfaces. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared for coating according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the epoxy. Any chemical treatment of galvanized surfaces shall be followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. 3-1.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces. Ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared for coating by using one or more of the following cleaning procedures specified here-in: solvents (SSPC-SP1); abrasive blasting (SSPC-SP5, -SP10, -SP6, or -SP7) power tools (SSPC-SP3 or -SP11); or hand tools (SSPC-SP2). Oil and grease shall be completely removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 before beginning any other cleaning method. Surfaces of welds shall be scraped and ground as necessary to remove all slag and weld spatter. Tools which produce excessive roughness shall not be used.

A. All components of equipment that can be properly prepared and coated after installation shall be installed prior to surface preparation. Components that will be inaccessible after installation shall have the surfaces prepared and coated before installation. Motors, drive trains, and bearings shall be protected during surface preparation in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a 1/8 inch minimum radius

for all material 1/4 inch thickness and larger. For material thickness less than 1/4 inch all cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a radius equal to 1/2 the material thickness. Grinding of rolled edges on standard shapes with a minimum radius of the 1/16 inch will not be required.

C. All ferrous metal surfaces shall have all welds ground smooth and free of all

defects in accordance with NACE Standard SP0178, Appendix C, Designation C and sharp edges ground smooth, if not previously prepared in the shop. Instead of blending of the weld with the base metal as required by the NACE standard, it will be acceptable to furnish a welded joint that has a smooth transition of the weld to the base metal. All welds shall be ground smooth to ensure satisfactory adhesion of paint.

D. The cleaning methods and surface profiles specified herein are minimums, and if

the requirements printed in the coating manufacturer's data sheets exceed the limits specified, the value printed on the data sheets shall become the minimum requirement.


3-1.02.01. Ferrous Metal Surfaces – Non-immersion Service. Ferrous metal surfaces, including fabricated equipment, in non-immersion service shall be cleaned to the degree recommended by the coating manufacturer for surfaces to be coated with coal tar epoxy, epoxy, and heat-resistant coatings, except galvanized surfaces. Surface preparation of ferrous metal surfaces in nonimmersion service shall consist of abrasive blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6, and the first application of coating shall be performed on the same day. If more surface area is prepared than can be coated in one day, the uncoated area shall be blast cleaned again to the satisfaction of Design Engineer. Surface profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 2.0 mils . 3-1.02.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces - Immersion Service. Surface preparation of ferrous metal surfaces in immersion service shall consist of abrasive blast cleaning to at least SSPC-SP10 and the first application of coating shall be performed on the same day. If more surface area is prepared than can be coated in one day, the uncoated area shall be blast cleaned again to the satisfaction of Design Engineer. Surface profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 3.5 mils . 3-1.03. Concrete Surfaces. All concrete surfaces shall be free of objectionable substances and shall meet the coating manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation. Concrete surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE 6. Any other surface preparation recommended by the coating material manufacturer shall be brought to Design Engineer's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to Design Engineer.

A. All concrete surfaces shall be dry when coated and free from dirt, dust, sand, mud, oil, grease, and other objectionable substances. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started.

B. New concrete shall have cured for at least 4 weeks before coating is applied as

recommended by the material manufacturer. Concrete surfaces shall be tested for capillary moisture in accordance with ASTM D4263. There shall be no capillary moisture when coatings are applied on concrete.

C. All surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258 and

abraded in accordance with ASTM D4259. Surface profile shall be at least 25 percent of the dry film thickness specified for the coating system. Prior to application of the coating, the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed or cleaned by air blasting to remove all dust and residue. Spalled areas, voids, and cracks shall be repaired in accordance with the Concrete section and as acceptable to the Design Engineer. Fins and other surface projections shall be removed to provide a flush surface before application of coating.

D. Except where epoxy is applied as damp-proofing, the concrete surfaces, including those with bug holes less than 1 inch in any dimension, shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer, using an epoxy concrete filler and surfacer.


Where coating with a vinyl ester the concrete filler and surfacer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer to be compatible with vinyl ester.

3-1.04. Concrete Block Surfaces. Voids and openings in concrete block surfaces shall be pointed. All exposed exterior surfaces and surfaces to be coated with epoxy, including the joints, shall be filled so that a continuous unbroken coating film is obtained. 3-1.05. Copper Tubing. All flux residue shall be removed from joints in copper tubing. Immediately before coating is started, tubing shall be wiped with a clean rag soaked in xylol. 3-1.06. Plastic Surfaces. All wax and oil shall be removed from plastic surfaces that are to be coated, including PVC and FRP, by wiping with a solvent compatible with the specified coating. 3-1.07. Hardware. Hardware items such as bolts, screws, washers, springs, and grease fittings need not be cleaned prior to coating if there is no evidence of dirt, corrosion, or foreign material. 3-1.08. Aluminum. When a coating system is required, remove all oil or deleterious substance with neutral detergent or emulsion cleaner or blast lightly with fine abrasive. 3-1.09. Stainless Steel. When a coating system is required, surface preparation shall conform to the coating manufacturer’s recommendations. 3-2. MIXING AND THINNING. Coating shall be thoroughly mixed each time any is withdrawn from the container. Coating containers shall be kept tightly closed except while coating is being withdrawn.

A. Coating shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for hot weather application without thinning. Thinning will be permitted only as necessary to obtain recommended coverage at lower application temperatures. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied coating be reduced, by addition of coating thinner or otherwise, below the thickness recommended by the coating manufacturer. Thinning shall be done in compliance with all applicable air quality regulations.

3-3. APPLICATION. Coating shall be applied in a neat manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper thickness, with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps, and brush marks. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry and hard before the next coat is applied. Each coat shall be a different color, if available. In no case shall coating be applied at a rate of coverage greater than the maximum rate recommended by the coating manufacturer.


A. Coating failures will not be accepted and shall be entirely removed down to the substrate and the surface recoated. Failures include but are not limited to sags, checking, cracking, teardrops, fat edges, fisheyes, or delamination.

3-3.01. Priming. Edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts shall be given a brush coat (stripe coat) of primer before application of the primer coat. The stripe coat shall be applied by a brush and worked in both directions. Special attention shall be given to filling all crevices with coating. When using zinc primers the stripe coat shall follow the initial prime coat.

A. Abraded and otherwise damaged portions of shop-applied coating shall be cleaned and recoated as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish coating. Welded seams and other uncoated surfaces, heads and nuts of field-installed bolts, and surfaces where coating has been damaged by heat shall be given a brush coat of the specified primer. Before the specified spot or touchup coating of metal surfaces, edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts in the area of the spot or touchup coating shall be given a brush coat of primer. This patch, spot, or touchup coating shall be completed, and the paint film shall be dry and hard, before additional coating is applied.

3-3.02. Epoxy. When used, epoxy shall be applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations, including temperature limitations and protection from sunlight until top-coated.

A. When concrete is to be coated, coatings shall not be applied to concrete surfaces in direct sunlight or when the temperature of the concrete is rising. Preferably the coating shall be applied when the temperature of the concrete is dropping.

B. When applying high build epoxy coatings with a roller or brush and where a dry

film thickness of at least 4-6 mils per coat is required, two or more coats shall be applied to achieve the recommended dry film thickness equal to a spray applied coating.

3-3.05. Film Thickness. The total coating film thickness including intermediate coats and finish coat, shall be not less than the following:

Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness Epoxy

Floors (two coats) 10 mils . Surfaces with first coat of epoxy and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

7 mils (5 mils DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).

Surfaces with first and second coat of epoxy and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

12 mils (10 mils DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).


Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness Other surfaces (two coats) 10 mils . Immersion service (three coats) 15 mils .

Flake-filled epoxy (two coats) 30 mils . Zinc, epoxy, polyurethane

Surfaces with first coat of zinc, intermediate coat of epoxy, and final coat of aliphatic polyurethane

10 mils , 3 mils zinc, 5 mils epoxy, plus 2 mils for aliphatic polyurethane.

Other (one coat) 5 mils . Other (two coats) 10 mils .

3-3.06. Weather Conditions. Coatings shall not be applied, except under shelter, during wet, damp, or foggy weather, or when windblown dust, dirt, debris, or insects will collect on freshly applied coating.

A. Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures lower than the minimum temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer, or to metal surfaces such as tanks or pipe containing cold water, regardless of the air temperature, when metal conditions are likely to cause condensation. When necessary for proper application, a temporary enclosure shall be erected and kept heated until the coating has fully cured.

B. Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures higher than the maximum

temperature recommended by the coating manufacturer. Where coatings are applied during periods of elevated ambient temperatures, Contractor and the coatings manufacturer shall be jointly responsible to ensure that proper application is performed including adherence to all re-coat window requirements. Precautions shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the surface application, especially for metal, at elevated temperatures above 100°F including shading application area from direct sunlight, applying coating in the evening or at night, and ventilating the area to reduce the humidity and temperature,

C. Vinyl ester coating materials, when required, shall be maintained during

transportation, storage, mixing, and application at the temperature required by the coating manufacturer, 35°F to 90°F .

3-4. REPAIRING FACTORY FINISHED SURFACES. Factory finished surfaces damaged prior to acceptance by Owner shall be spot primed and recoated with materials equivalent to the original coatings. If, in the opinion of Design Engineer, spot repair of the damaged area is not satisfactory, the entire surface or item shall be recoated. 3-5. PROTECTION OF SURFACES. Throughout the work Contractor shall use drop cloths, masking tape, and other suitable measures to protect adjacent surfaces.


Contractor shall be responsible for correcting and repairing any damage resulting from its or its subcontractors' operations. Coatings spilled or spattered on adjacent surfaces which are not being coated at the time shall be immediately removed. Exposed concrete or masonry not specified to be coated which is damaged by coatings shall be either removed and rebuilt or, where authorized by Owner, coated with two coats of masonry coating. 3-6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. The following inspection and testing shall be performed: surface profile, visual inspection, spark testing,adhesion testing, and wet and dry film thickness testing. All inspection and testing shall be witnessed by Design Engineer. 3-6.01. Surface Profile Testing. The surface profile for ferrous metal surfaces shall be measured for compliance with the specified minimum profile. The surface profile for concrete shall comply with SSPC 13/NACE 6 Table 1 for severe service. 3-6.02. Visual Inspection. The surface of the protective coatings shall be visually inspected. 3.6.03. Film Thickness. Coating film thickness shall be verified by measuring the film thickness of each coat as it is applied and the dry film thickness of the entire system. Wet film thickness shall be measured with a gauge that will measure the wet film thickness within an accuracy of ±0.5 mil . Dry film thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA 2. 3-7. FIELD PRIMING SCHEDULE. In general, steel and cast iron surfaces of equipment are specified to be shop primed. Any such surfaces which have not been shop primed shall be field primed. Damaged or failed shop coatings which have been determined unsuitable by Design Engineer shall be removed and the surfaces shall be field coated, including prime coat (if any). Galvanized, aluminum, stainless steel, and insulated surfaces shall be field primed. Primers used for field priming, unless otherwise required for repair of shop primers, shall be:

Surface To Be Primed Material Equipment, surfaces to be coated with

Aliphatic polyurethane Universal primer. Epoxy Same as finish coats. Coal tar coating Same as finish coats. Vinyl ester Same as finish coats.

Steel and cast iron, surfaces to be coated with

Epoxy Same as finish coats or inorganic zinc.

Coal tar coating Same as finish coats. Aluminum Epoxy.


Surface To Be Primed Material Galvanized Epoxy. Copper Epoxy. Stainless steel Epoxy. Plastic surfaces, including PVC and FRP

Same as finish coats.

Insulated piping As recommended by manufacturer of finish coats.

Concrete, surfaces to be coated with epoxy

For damp-proofing Epoxy. For all other surfaces Epoxy concrete filler and surfacer.

Concrete block exposed in exterior locations

Epoxy concrete block filler.

Concrete block to be coated with epoxy

Epoxy concrete block filler.

A. Unless otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer or specified herein,

priming will not be required on concrete, or concrete block, nor on metal surfaces specified to be coated with coal tar epoxy, and heat-resistant coatings. Concrete surfaces to be coated with epoxy shall be filled with epoxy concrete filler and surfacer so that a continuous film is obtained, except where concrete is damp-proofed with epoxy.

3-8. FINISH COATING SYSTEMS. The following schedule lists coatings systems and coating surface designations. See Article1-3 for a definition of the surface designations.

No. Finish Coating Systems Coating Surface Designation

A C E F G H P

1. Epoxy – One coat x x x

2. Epoxy – Two coats x x x x x x

3. Epoxy / NSF – Two coats x x

4. Epoxy – Three coats x x x

5. Epoxy / NSF – Three coats x x x

6. Epoxy – First coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x x x x x

7. Epoxy – First and second coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x x x x


No. Finish Coating Systems Coating Surface Designation

A C E F G H P

8. Universal primer – First coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat

x x

9. Medium consistency coal tar – Two coats

x x x

10. Coal tar epoxy – Two coats x x x

11. Vinyl ester – Two coats x x x

12. Heat resistant – Two coats x

13. High heat resistant – Two coats x

14. Zinc primer – First coat Epoxy – Intermediate coat Aliphatic polyurethane – Final coat

x x

15. Flake-filled epoxy x x

3-8.01. Surfaces Not To Be Coated. Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be left uncoated:

Exposed aluminum, except ductwork. Polished or finished stainless steel. Unfinished stainless steel, except flashings and counter flashings, shall be coated. Nickel or chromium. Galvanized surfaces, except piping, conduit, ductwork, and other items specifically noted. Rubber and plastics, except as specified. Exterior concrete. FRP wastewater troughs. Surfaces specified to be factory finished.

3-8.02. Shop Finishing. Items to be shop finished include the following. Shop finishing shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.

a. All slide gates. b. All conveyors. c. Other surfaces where blast cleaning cannot be or is not

recommended to be performed in the field. d. Other items as otherwise specified.


3-8.03. Field Coating. Items to be field coated include the following. Field coating shall be in accordance with the field priming schedule, the coating schedule, and the manufacturer's recommendations.

a. Surfaces not indicated to be shop finished and surfaces where blast cleaning can be performed in the field.

b. All interior ferrous metal surfaces. c. Other items as otherwise specified.

3-9. METAL SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Surface To Be Coated Finish Coating System

Non-galvanized and galvanized structural and miscellaneous steel exposed to view or to the elements in exterior locations.

A7

Non-galvanized and galvanized structural and miscellaneous steel exposed to view inside buildings.

A2

Unless otherwise specified, pumps, motors, speed reducers, and other machines and equipment exposed to view.

E8

All metal surfaces, unless otherwise specified, which will be submerged or buried, all or in part, including valves, and scum baffles, and cast iron slide gates, but excluding piping laid in the ground.

E4

All fully or partially submerged surfaces of screening, grit removal, aeration mixing, and sludge mixing equipment.

E4

Aluminum in contact with concrete. F1

Aluminum and galvanized ductwork and conduit exposed to elements outdoors.

F7 or G7

Aluminum materials exposed to the elements outdoors.

F7


3-10. CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Surface To Be Coated Finish Coating System

All concrete and concrete block in corrosive area (Except floors and surfaces scheduled to receive other coatings) which are exposed to view.

Outdoor –C7

Where indicated on the Drawings, walls, floors, and curbed areas, adjacent to corrosive chemical storage and feed equipment.

C2

3-11. MISCELLANEOUS SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Plastic Surfaces, including PVC and FRP.

Outdoor – P6

Piping Insulation Outdoor – P6

3-12. PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE. Exposed piping and piping in accessible chases shall be identified with lettering or tags designating the service of each piping system, marked with flow directional arrows, and color coded.

A. Piping scheduled to be color coded shall be completely coated with the indicated colors, except surfaces specified to remain uncoated shall include sufficiently long segments of the specified color to accommodate the lettering and arrows. All other piping shall be coated to match adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed by Design Engineer.

3-12.01. Location. Lettering and flow direction arrows shall be provided on pipe near the equipment served, adjacent to valves, on both sides of wall and floor penetrations, at each branch or tee, and at least every 50 feet in straight runs of pipe. If, in the opinion of Design Engineer, this requirement will result in an excessive number of labels or arrows, the number required shall be reduced as directed. 3-12.02. Metal Tags. Where the outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, aluminum or stainless steel tags shall be provided instead of lettering. Tags shall be stamped as specified and shall be fastened to the pipe with suitable chains. Pipe identified with tags shall be color coded as specified. 3-12.03. Lettering. Lettering shall be painted or stenciled on piping or shall be applied as snap-on markers. Snap-on markers shall be plastic sleeves, Brady "Bradysnap-On B-915", Seton "Setmark", or equal. Letter size shall be as follows:


Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters

5/8 inch and smaller Metal tags -1/4 inch

3/4 to 4 inches 3/4 inch

5 inches and larger 2 inches

3-12.04. Color Coding and Lettering. All piping for the following services shall be color coded. Bands shall be 6 inches wide spaced along the pipe at 5 foot intervals. For services not listed, the color coding and lettering shall be as directed by the Design Engineer.

Piping Identification

Service Color of Pipe Color of Letters

Drain Dark gray White

Nonpotable Water (downstream of backflow preventer)

Purple Black2

Potable Water (hot or cold) Dark blue White4

Service Water Dark blue with red bands White

Notes:

1. Lettering shall read, “CAUTION: NONPOTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK.”.

2. Lettering shall be on a yellow background and shall read, “CAUTION: NONPOTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK.”. Each outlet on the nonpotable water line shall be similarly labeled.

3. Lettering shall read, “CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER, DO NOT DRINK”. 4. Lettering shall be on a light green background.

Electrical conduit shall be coated to match adjacent ceiling or wall surfaces as directed by Design Engineer. Vent lines shall be coated to match surfaces they adjoin. In addition, special coating of the following items will be required:

Item Color Valve handwheels and levers Red Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes


Numerals at least 2 inches high shall be painted on or adjacent to all accessible valves, pumps, flowmeters, and other items of equipment which are identified on the Drawings or in the Technical Specifications by number.

End of Section

Shreveport, LA STS09940-F1 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. -

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1 Ferrous Metal Nonimmersion SSPC-SP6 Ferrous Metal Immersion

SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP-5

Other

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

First Coat (Primer)

Second Coat

Third Coat

Total System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Fig 1-09940

Shreveport, LA STS09940-F2 11/08/2017 Lucas & NRWWTP Screen Replacement -1- FINAL B&V PN 173506

SHOP PRIMED SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. - -F

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1 Other:

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

Shop (Primer)

(Identify Product/Type)

Touchup

Intermediate Coat

Finish Coat

Total System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Fig 2-09940


Section STS11060

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers general installation requirements of new equipment units that have been purchased by Contractor as part of this Work. Equipment specific installation requirements are covered in the equipment sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. The following technical specification sections are applicable to testing and start-up of equipment installed: Title 4465 Testing and Startup 11312 Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screens 11313 Screenings Washing and Compacting Equipment

1-2.01. Coordination. When supplier's field services are provided by the equipment supplier, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment supplier. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for supplier's field services furnished by others. Flanged connections to equipment including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the appropriate pipe technical specification section. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. 1-3.01. Storage. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected by Contractor in accordance with the Delivery Storage and Handling section until installed in the Work. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on or come into contact with the ground, grass, or any other type of vegetation. Contractor shall keep the equipment dry at all times.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Materials shall be as follows:

Grout As specified in the Grouting section.

Anti-Seize thread lubricant for SS bolts

As specified in the Anchorage in Concrete section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results as specified in the Startup Requirements section. Each equipment unit shall be leveled, aligned, and shimmed into position. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and as required herein. Shimming between machined surfaces will not be permitted. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. For equipment installed in drinking water facilities, the anti-seize lubricant shall meet requirements of NSF-61. When specified in the equipment sections, the equipment supplier will provide installation supervision and installation checks. For installation supervision, the manufacturer’s field representative will observe, instruct, guide, and direct Contractor's erection or installation procedures as specified in the equipment technical specifications. For installation checks, the manufacturer’s field representative will inspect the equipment installation immediately following installation by Contractor, and observe the tests indicated in the Startup Requirements section. The manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation satisfactory to Owner. All equipment shall be protected after installation, prior to final acceptance by Owner. Protection provisions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall include provisions to prevent rust, mechanical damage, and foreign objects entering the equipment. 3-2. STARTUP AND TESTING. Startup requirements, and tests associated with startup shall be as indicated in the Testing and Startup and associated equipment sections. Other field tests shall be as indicated in the specific equipment sections. Startup and tests required shall occur in the order listed in the following paragraphs. Tests shall not begin until any installation supervision and installation checks by the equipment manufacturer have been completed, except where noted below.


3-2.01. Preliminary Field Tests (Installation Check). Preliminary field tests and Installation Checks shall be conducted on all equipment by Contractor. When an installation check is specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's representative will participate in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the equipment sections. 3-2.02. Field System Performance Tests (Functional Test). Field system operation tests shall be conducted on all equipment by Contractor and equipment manufacturer. When an installation check is specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's service personnel will participate in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the equipment sections. 3-2.03. Field Demonstration Tests (Start-up). Field demonstration tests will be conducted by the Contractor on equipment as indicated and as specified in the equipment sections. When indicated in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer will participate in these tests.

End of Section


Section STS11312

MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and testing of mechanically cleaned vertical, multiple rake bar screens to be installed in the location as indicated on the Drawings and as required herein.

Location Headworks Facility at North Regional WWTP (NRWWTP)

Headworks Facility at Lucas WWTP (LWWTP)

Equipment designation.

MBS MBS

Number of units. 2 2

Equipment tag numbers.

MBS-1, MBS-2 MBS-1, MBS-2

A. Each screening unit shall be furnished complete with a bar rack, deadplate,

frames, rake assembly, scraper assembly, electric drive motor, variable frequency drive, control panel, local control stations, instrumentation, gear reducer, anchor bolts, cover, and all accessories and appurtenances specified, indicated on the Drawings, or otherwise required for a complete and properly operating installation.

B. Each unit including motor and all electrical devices mounted on the bar screen

assembly, shall be rated for use in a Class I, Division 2, Group D area as defined by NEC. Both power and control equipment shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts even though operating voltages may be lower.

C. The mechanically cleaned bar screen and washer compactor equipment shall be furnished by a single Screenings Handling System Supplier (SHSS) who shall coordinate between different suppliers to ensure the system is designed to eliminate conflicts prior to shop drawings submittal and ensure a complete, integrated, and operable system. SHSS shall provide all of the services, equipment, accessories instruments, relays, wiring, and control panels required meeting all the design conditions, testing requirements, performance guarantees, and warranties, as specified herein. The SHSS shall be the mechanical bar screen supplier.


D. The following technical specification sections cover equipment to be provided by the SHSS. Section 11312, Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screens Section 11313, Screenings Washer/Compactor Equipment

E. The SHSS shall provide a common control enclosure to house the controls for

both Bar Screen and related Screenings Washer/Compactor. The common control enclosure shall include the variable frequency drives (VFDs), bypass motor starters, a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) and hardwired controls.

F. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts

of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Drawings or Technical Specifications.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, and instructions, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor required to complete all Work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this technical specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

1-2.02. Workmanship and Materials. All equipment shall be guaranteed against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. 1-2.03. Power Supply. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the equipment will be 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase. 1-2.04. Permanent Nameplates. Each unit denoted by an identifying code and number in the Technical Specifications or on the Drawings shall be provided with permanent nameplates. Identification used shall be the same as the identifying code and number indicated in the Technical Specifications or on the Drawings. Each major component of equipment shall have an information plate securely affixed to the equipment.


1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, together with detailed technical specifications and data covering materials used and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Each drawing shall be identified with the corresponding plant and bar screen number.

A. Shop drawings shall include separate wiring diagrams for each bar screen and its electrical control equipment. The following information shall be provided:

Bar Screens Name of supplier. Type and model. Number of units. Speed of rake. Screen size (opening) Net weight. Drive unit. Power supply. Data on shop painting. Anchor bolt details. Detailed layout drawings Control component data. External utility requirements for each component Identification of materials of construction Motors As specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process

Equipment section. Common Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panels Control panel enclosure layout, dimensions, and weight.

Variable frequency drive. Programmable Logic Controller Operator Interface Terminal.

Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams. Overcurrent characteristics and details of motor control Enclosure rating. Catalog and data sheets on all components.

A recommended sequence of operation, including values and ranges for time delays, speeds, and other set points for use in the initial startup of the system.

Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed.


1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Data and Training section. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instruction or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 1-3.03 Quality Control Submittals.

A. Written certification that the factory-applied coating system(s) is identical to the requirements specified.

B. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.

C. Supplier's written/printed installation instructions.

D. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup.

E. Supplier's Certifications

a. Submit supplier's certification that Contract Documents have been examined

by the supplier for proposed electrical, mechanical, and structural systems affecting performance of the equipment.

b. Submit supplier's certification that the maximum power requirement, if used,

shall not exceed the motor rating under operating conditions.

c. Submit supplier's certification that the equipment is designed for service and application specified and is installed and aligned properly.

1-3.04. Software Licenses. Refer to specification section 13500 for requirements relating to equipment software licenses for control equipment including but not limited to Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), Operator Interface Panels OIT), etc.

1-4. SPARE PARTS. The following spare parts and accessories shall be furnished in substantial wooden boxes with identifying labels and delivered to the vicinity of the project site for both Lucas WWTP (LWWTP) and North Regional WWTP (NRWWTP). Spare parts shall be as follows:

Spare Parts Quantity

5 feet of Chain 1 per screen

Wiper Arm Wear Pad 1 per screen

Rake Bar 1 per screen

Lower bearing assemblies 2 per screen


Proximity/Current switches 2 per screen

Variable frequency drive

PLC I/O Module

1 per plant

1 of each type used per plant

PLC Communications Module 1 of each type used per plant Main Control Panel

Each fuse 2 Each/Panel Each relay 2 Each/Panel Each indicator lamp 2 Each/Panel

1-5. WARRANTY. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 4740 – Warranties and Bonds.

A. Bar screen supplier shall furnish to the City a warranty written expressly from

the supplier to the City of Shreveport, covering workmanship and material under normal use and service. This warranty applies to both the mechanical bar screen and associated electrical equipment. The warranty shall cover 100 percent of parts and labor for a period of ten (10) years. The warranty period shall commence after beneficial use has been established by the City. Warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the supplier's standard warranty for similar manufactured units.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2-1. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.

A. Each bar screen will be suitable for the following conditions:

Liquid service. Raw Sewage

Liquid temperature range. 40 to 100 °F

B. The equipment shall be designed to continuously remove debris from channel flow by means of a bar screen to retain debris and a traveling rake assembly with multiple rakes to positively clean the bar screen and eliminate debris that has been retained. The screen shall be cleaned the rakes engaging the screen from the front (upstream side) at the channel bottom and removing debris on its upward travel.

C. Screenings shall be transported to the top of the screen my multiple rakes and discharged on downstream side of screen to washer/compactor.

D. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished


at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Parts of the mechanism shall be sized for stresses that occur during fabrication, erection, and operation. All parts shall be designed and manufactured to handle and withstand without damage or permanent distortion the forces that may be exerted on the screen during fabrication, shipping, erection, and proper operation. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.

E. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel shall be at least 3/16” thick.

F. All components shall be balanced so that jamming at any point will not result in structural failure, but will cause the drive motor to stall. Components shall withstand the full torque of the drive motor during for operation or stalling and maximum differential head at any channel depth.

G. The design shall be such to ensure that all maintenance can be accomplished without removing the bar screen from the channel. The screen bars shall be supported from the framework and be readily removable individually or in sections without any welding or cutting.

2-1.01. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIEMENTS. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section.

2-2. DESIGN PARAMETERS.

A. The screening equipment shall also conform to the following requirements:

NRWWTP LWWTP

Channel Width 48 60 in

Channel Depth 66 108 in

Channel Invert to Operating Floor 66 108 in

Height of Screenings Discharge Above Operating Floor

63 63 in

Low Flow Per Screen 2 10 mgd

Average Flow Per Screen 3.5 15 mgd

Maximum Design Flow Per Screen 16 70 mgd

Maximum Differential Head Across Screen 12 12 in

Maximum Water Depth Downstream 54 96 in


NRWWTP LWWTP

Angle of Inclination From Horizontal 75 75 °

Clear Space Between Screen Bars ½ ½ in

Motor HP 3 5 HP

2-3. ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS. The bar screens shall be of the following make and model: Headworks Bar Screen Model MS1 or Huber RakeMax Bar Screen, or approved Equal. Listing as an acceptable supplier will not relieve the supplier from conforming to Contract Technical Specification. Refer to Technical Specification 4630 for procedures for submitting any bar screen system other than those specifically listed above for review as an equal.

The contract drawings and technical specifications are based upon the Headworks Bar Screen systems. Any listed “or equal” supplier work includes any necessary re-design (mechanical, structural, electrical, control and instrumentation), revised piping/equipment/wiring, etc., at no additional cost to the Owner and pay ENGINEER all costs for redesign of screen system. 2-3.01 Supplier’s Experience. Unless specifically named in the Technical Specifications, a supplier shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified for LWWTP which has been in successful operation for not less than the past ten (10) years. The manufacture shall also have regularly and satisfactorily designed, engineered, manufactured, supplied, and serviced mechanical bar screens at a minimum of twenty (20) installations of similar size of LWWTP in the United States for a minimum of ten (10) years from the date of the design described in these Technical Specification.

A. Design Engineer reserves the right to reject any supplier based on an unsatisfactory experience record or the inability to meet technical specification.

2-4. CONSTRUCTION. The bar screens shall be constructed as follows:

2-4.01. Bar Rack. Each bar rack shall consist of individual, straight bars, equally spaced and securely anchored to the base of the screen frame and to a deadplate at the top of the rack. Bars, anchors, and fasteners assembly shall be constructed of 316 SS. Each bar rack shall span the full width of the channel minus the width of the frame and channel side seals and shall extend above the specified high liquid level, at least the specified amount. The bar shape shall be tear drop or tapered,

A. Dimensions: Minimum upstream width of bar rack of 0.31”, minimum downstream width of 0.20”, and minimum depth of 1.97”.

B. Bar rack assembly shall extend a minimum of 6” above the maximum water level.


C. Bars shall be readily removable and replaceable individually or in sections without any welding or cutting.

2-4.02. Deadplate. A deadplate extending from the top of the bar rack to the discharge chute shall be provided. The space between the deadplate and the bar rack shall be sealed to prevent overtopping of the rack and shall be designed to prevent any leakage at all joints above the top of the channel.

A. Dead plate shall be a minimum of 5/32” thick and constructed from 316 SS. Thinner dead plates shall require additional structural members to stiffen the dead plate so that it is flat without undulation. The deadplate shall be true and flat such that a close clearance between the rake and plate can be maintained during the cleaning cycle. The deadpate shall span the entire width of the screen and transition from bar screen rack to discharge point.

2-4.03. Frames. Framework of screen shall be constructed of 316 SS and cross section with minimum thickness of 5/32”. Various parts fastened by welding, riveting, or bolting shall be braced as necessary to insure rigid structure.

A. No braces, gussets or stiffeners for the screen frame shall be located across the screening rack area that will allow for screenings to collect.

B. Side frames shall be designed to support the required loads and to anchor to the channel. The side frames shall be provided and designed to prevent flexure of the assembly or the frame shall encircle the bar screen unit on all sides.

C. Frames shall be securely fastened to the concrete channel. Any horizontal members shall be of 316 SS bent plate or pipe. Support members and frame shall adequately support the bar screen per engineering calculations and site specific requirements.

D. A 316 SS channel bottom plate shall be utilized as recommended by the supplier to fully engage scrapers in the bar screen at the bottom of the channel on screens. The channel bottom plate may require anchoring depending upon site configuration and as recommended by the supplier.

E. Chain-Cogwheel System Only: Frame shall include separate roller tracks to guide rakes and ensure proper alignment of the rake assembly. The roller tracks shall be made of 0.157” minimum thick 316 SS L-profiles.

2-4.04. Rake Assembly. Each unit shall be equipped with a multiple rake assemblies to remove debris from the bar rack. The rake shall operate at two speed settings.


A. The rake capacity shall be as follows:

Capacity/Rake Bar 0.108 cu-ft/ft Screen Field Width (SFW)

Total Screen Capacity (10 sec Cleaning Interval)

0.108 cu-ft/ft x SFW x 360

2-4.04.01 Headworks, Inc. The following will be provided by Headworks, if selected:

A. The raking tines shall have the tooth profile precision cut from a single continuous bar of sufficient thickness and depth to ensure adequate stiffness and strength to cope with the specified duty cycle. The rakes shall run in guides on both sides to ensure engagement. The rakes shall clean the bars from the upstream side of the screen.

B. The rakes shall be fabricated from 316 SS. The rake material thickness shall have

a minimum thickness of 0.4724”.

C. Rakes should have a shovel shape to prevent screenings from falling back into the channel. Flat rakes without this feature are not permitted. Rake tines shall penetrate into the screen bar spacing to ensure that screenings are completely cleared during each lifting operation. Rake tines are mechanically engaged into the screen bars. During each cleaning stroke, the raking tines shall engage into the bottom of the bar screen grids at the channel invert. Drive chains, chain guides, chain sprockets, bearings, and axles shall be fully replaceable without having to remove the screen from the channel.

D. Screenings transported to the top of the screen shall be discharged positively by

means of a scraper mechanism to the discharge chute. The scraper mechanism shall be fitted with a compression spring that allows the scraper to return to its resting position smoothly without any shock. A scraper blade made of a combination of synthetic and other material shall be provided on the scraper.

Drive Chains Roller Type, Type

316 Stainless steel

Rated (Maximum) 31,000 lb-Force

Chain pins Stainless steel, AISI Type 316

Upper Sprocket Stainless steel, AISI Type 316

Pitch 4.92 or 6.30 in

Tooth Width (Minimum)

1.06

In


Drive Chains Roller Type, Type 316 Stainless steel

Lower Sprocket Stainless steel, AISI Type 316

Pitch 4.92 or 6.30 in

Tooth Width (Minimum) 1.06 in

Bore 2.75 In

Drive Shaft Stainless steel, AISI Type 316

Diameter (Minimum) 3.14 in

Wall Thickness (Minimum) 0.196 in

E. The drive mechanism for the bar screen(s) shall incorporate a solid shaft.

F. The upper and lower sprocket shall be solid.

G. Upper bearings shall be UCF Type or equal mounted in the Take-Up Frame assembly. The bearings shall be grease-lubricated. The take up screw shall be an Acme-type lead screw made of 18-8 stainless steel. No threaded rod shall be allowed.

H. The lower stub shaft shall be two pieces which are welded and precision

machined.

I. Bearings for lower submerged sprockets shall be of proven self-lubricating polyethylene material and be maintenance free. A ceramic collar type shall be bonded onto the stub shaft. No metallic lower bearings or bushing shall be allowed. No lower bearing requiring lubrication shall be allowed.

J. Chains shall be roller type chains and made with high tensile strength and

resistance to corrosion. Chain pins shall be hardened.

K. A chain guide shall be securely fixed to the screen frame for the full height of travel and shall not protrude into the flow. The type of chain guide, thickness of material and size is an L-profile 316 SS. Replaceable wear strips on chain guides located below the water level shall not be allowed.


2-4.04.02 Huber Technology, Inc. Screens shall be equipped with the following: if selected

Drive Chains Roller Type

Links Stainless steel, AISI Type 316

Bushes and pins Duplex Stainless steel

Rated (Maximum)

26,000

lb-Force

Chain Rollers Polyamide

Diameter 2.36 in

Width (Minimum) 1.25 in

Sprockets Stainless steel, AISI Type 316, Plate

Diameter (Minimum) 17.4 In

Thickness (Minimum) 1.125 in

Upper Bearing Diameter (Minimum) 2 in

Lower Bearings Internal diameter (Minimum) 2-5/16 in

Drive Shaft Stainless steel, 316

Diameter (Minimum) 3.13 in

Wall Thickness (Minimum) 0.20 in

Cogwheels Stainless Steel, AISI Type 316

A. Drive chains, chain guides, sprockets and their bearing shall be replaceable

without the need for removing the screen from the channel.

B. Each screen shall be provided with four identical sprockets.

C. Stainless steel guards shall be provided bolted to the screen frame and partially cover the lower sprockets to provide protection from large debris.

D. Each side frame shall include separate roller tracks to guide the rakes. The roller

tracks shall be bolted to the frame so that they can easily be replaced. The roller tracks shall be made of 10/64” (4 mm) thick L-profiles.

E. Upper sprocket bearings shall have a paint coated cast iron casing and include ball bearings with grease nipples that are double-sealed with Nilos rings.


F. Lower sprocket bearings shall have a stainless steel casing including a shaft made

of white cast iron and a ceramic (silicon carbide) low friction bushing.

G. Rakes shall include rake bars with ¼” thick channel profile having a cross section of 4-1/4”x 2-3/8”. Rake blades with a thickness of 5/16” and a depth of 6-1/2” minimum shall be bolted on the rake bars. The rake blades shall have teeth matching and engaging the bars of the bar rack. The rake blades shall each consist of several pieces with teeth such that only one of the pieces needs to be replaced in case that a tooth should be damaged.

H. A pivoting scraper mechanism shall be positioned at the point of discharge and

shall be attached to the side frames. The scraper shall clean the rake on each pass and return to its rest position with minimal shock. The scraper shall be designed such that the screenings do not wrap around the rake or scraper. The scraper shall be provided with a scraper bar made of 0.157” thick channel profile and a cross section of 1.53” x 2.67” minimum and an adjustable 0.393” thick wiper made of polyethylene. The scraper shall be connected with the frame though a pair of 19.68” minimum long scraper arms that shall be made of 0.157” thick channel profile with a minimum cross section of 2.67” x 2.32”. A pair of shock absorbers elements made of neoprene shall be provided.

I. The drive mechanism shall include a drive shaft . Drive shaft shall include integral

rocker arm assembly on the drive end that flexes if the screen rakes get jammed.

J. The rocker arm assembly shall consist of a drive unit mounted to a stainless steel arm. The stainless steel arm will be held in place by a flanged roller bearing connected to the drive shaft and two heavy duty tension springs. The flange bearing shall be connected to the rocker arm by four bolts. The rocker arm position shall be maintained in the standard operating position by the tension springs. An intrinsically safe proximity switch shall indicate position.

2-4.05. Scraper/Wiper Assembly. The rake assembly shall be guided over the discharge point and the accumulated debris shall be removed by a scraper assembly attached to the side frame and designed to pivot to achieve effective cleaning of the rake. The scraper shall clean the rake on each pass and return to its rest position with minimal shock. The scrapers should move at supplier’s recommended operating speed.

2-4.06. Discharge Chute. The rake assembly shall be designed to reach a predetermined discharge height above the floor elevation. A directing (discharge) chute positioned a minimum of 60 degrees from horizontal and located at the top of the dead plate shall be a part of each bar screen. The discharge chute shall extend from the point of discharge to the washer/compactor enclosure inlet. The chute shall be bolted to the screen enclosure. The space between the discharge chute and washer/compactor shall be sealed with flexible connection.


A. The discharge chute shall be enclosed from screen discharge to the bottom of the chute. The chute shall be manufactured from 3/16” min. thick 316 SS. The enclosure shall include an access door opening with cover. The access door cover shall be easily removable for maintenance. The access door cover shall be made of 6 mm clear, impact resistant, polycarbonate to allow for visual inspection during screen operation or 3 mm thick 316 SS.

B. Provide access hatch with stainless steel hinges or easily removable cover knobs and handle in the chute permitting easy maintenance and to facilitate manual loading of screenings onto conveyor.

2-4.07. Screen Enclosure. Provide an enclosure for each screen for odor control, to protect personnel from injury due to the normal and abnormal operation of the bar screen, and to limit access to the floor openings through which the bar screen operates. The discharge chute and top of screen assembly above the operating deck shall be fully enclosed. The top and sides of the frame shall be covered with minimum 3 mm 316 SS cover, bolted to the screen frame. The sides of the top cover shall be bent to overlap the side frames.

Front covers on the upstream side of the screen shall be constructed of clear impact-resistant polycarbonate material, with minimum thickness of 6 mm to allow for visual observation during screen operation, or 1.5 mm thick 316 SS. Design to be easily removable in sections. Any required modifications to handrail and grating are to be provided by Contractor. 2-5. DRIVE UNIT. The variable frequency drive (VFD) unit shall be designed for continuous service and intermittent spray water contact and driven by an electric motor through flexible coupling. Screen supplier shall coordinate each drive with the requirements of the driven equipment and motor size to ensure compatibility. Particular attention shall be directed toward the driven equipment torque requirements. 2-5.01. Variable Frequency Drive. A VFD shall be provided. VFD shall have solid state overload integral. All equipment shall be derated as recommended by the drive and motor suppliers for reduced speed operation with a variable frequency controller in addition to any derating requirements specified elsewhere. Each drive shall be pulse-width modulated type and shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. Each drive shall maintain a minimum displacement power factor of 0.95 over the entire speed range, and shall be equipped with an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz despite incoming voltage variations. Each drive shall be equipped with an input line reactor and a full-wave diode bridge rectifier to convert incoming fixed voltage/frequency to a fixed dc voltage. The pulse-


width modulation technology shall be of the space vector type, implemented in a microprocessor, which generates a sine-coded output voltage. The drive inverter output shall be generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) which shall be controlled by six identical base driver circuits. The drive shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured at rated speed, torque, and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation. Each drive shall be configurable for automatic and manual reset and shall have an adjustable carrier frequency to at least 6,000 Hz.

2-5.02. Electric Motor. Motors shall be as specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section. Each motor shall be explosion proof and UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Group D. The motor shall be rated for operation in a 104° F environment. Motor shall have built-in thermostat to protect from overheating that is to be field wired to corresponding terminal in control panel for redundant (ambient) overload protection. 2-5.03 Headworks, Inc. The motor shall have epoxy painted cast iron frame, Class F vacuum/pressure epoxy impregnated windings, Class B temperature rise, 1.0 service factor, tropicalization treatment for corrosion resistance, antifriction bearings, and cast iron junction box. A direct coupled helical-worm gear reducer with a rugged cast iron housing and a service factor of at least 1.25 shall be utilized. Gear reducer bearings shall be anti-friction with oil bath lubrication. 2-5.04 Huber Technology, Inc. The bevel gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit. Gear reducer shall have ball and roller bearings throughout with all moving parts immersed in oil. The nominal input power rating of the gear reducer shall be designed and manufactured in compliance with applicable AGMA or equivalent standards. During continuous operation the oil temperature shall not exceed 200° F. 2-5.05. Gearmotors. Unless otherwise specified, the use of gear motors will not be acceptable. 2-5.06. Gear Reducers. Gear reducers shall be as specified in the General Equipment Stipulations except that the use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be acceptable. 2-6. CONTROLS. Controls for the bar screen and washer/compactor shall be furnished by the SHSS and shall at a minimum include the following:

A. Bar screen and washer/compactor control panel B. Local control stations (one for each bar screen and one for each

washer/compactor)


C. Overload protection in the form of Torque switches, current sensing relay and limit switches, or current sensing via VFD for jam protection.

D. An ultrasonic differential level metering system for each screen E. High water float switch

Electrical equipment within any classified area shall have NEMA Type 7 enclosures or NEMA 4X where powered by intrinsically safe circuits. All signal converters, isolation transformers, power regulators, power converters, fuses switches, relays, signal converters, integrators, devices, alarm trips, and related equipment required and necessary to complete the functional requirements described in the functional requirements herein and shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed. The screen controls shall permit either manual or automatic operation of the unit. Automatic operation of the bar screen and washer/compactor shall be controlled either by a PLC or by timer relays. Timer relays shall be a 24 hour program timer and adjustable in 5 minute increments. The supplier shall provide limit switches as needed for a complete and functional operating system. The differential water level control system for the bar screen is specified herein and shall be provided by the bar screen supplier. When the system senses a predetermined head loss across the bar screen, an isolated contact will close as a signal to start the screen rake. The set-points for the ultrasonic analog signals sent to the PLC shall be field adjustable via the OIT.

A float switch shall be furnished and installed on the concrete wall of the influent channel to initiate emergency operation of the bar screen when water level is abnormally high.

2-6.01. Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel. Each bar screen and washer/compactor shall be controlled by a separate control panel, for a total of four control panels (two at Lucas WWTP and two at North Regional WWTP). The control panels shall be NEMA 4X freestanding stainless steel enclosure. The control panel shall have an interior door and dead front panel with continuous hinge and lockable door. There shall be no penetration of any kind located on the top of the enclosure. The control panel shall be located where indicated on the Drawings, and shall be constructed in accordance with UL 508A and UL 698A where applicable. Each control panel shall contain the following devices at a minimum:

A. Interior Devices a. Variable frequency drives b. Motor starters c. Circuit breakers d. Control power transformers e. Power supplies


f. Programmable Logic Controllers for both frequency and duration of cleaning cycles

g. Auxiliary and timing relays as required h. Current sensing relay for screen overload where provided i. Intrinsically safe barriers as required

B. Interior Panel Mounted Devices a. Operator Interface Terminal

C. Dead Front Panel Mounted Devices a. Selector switches

i. Bar screen Hand-Off-Auto ii. Bar screen Forward-Off-Reverse iii. Washer/Compactor Hand-Off-Auto iv. Washer/Compactor Forward-Off-Reverse v. Washer/Compactor Spray Wash On-Off-Auto

b. Pushbuttons i. Emergency Stop ii. Alarm Silence iii. Alarm Reset

c. LED type indicating lights (push-to-test type) i. Control power on – white lens ii. Bar screen forward run – red lens iii. Bar screen reverse run – red lens iv. Bar screen off – green lens v. Bar screen fault (more than one indicating light may be necessary

depending on suppliers recommendations) – amber lens vi. Bar screen VFD fault – amber lens vii. Washer/Compactor forward run – red lens viii. Washer/Compactor reverse run – red lens ix. Washer/Compactor off – green lens x. Washer/Compactor fault (more than one indicating light may be

necessary depending on suppliers recommendations) – amber lens xi. High water level – amber lens

d. Auxiliary Devices i. Alarm horn ii. Elapsed time meter iii. Strobe light

The following control panel I/O shall be provided:

A. Bar screen in-auto B. Bar screen forward running C. Bar screen reverse running D. Bar screen running high speed E. Bar screen fault


F. Bar screen VFD fault G. Bar screen high water level H. Bar screen emergency stop activated I. Washer/Compactor in-auto J. Washer/Compactor running forward K. Washer/Compactor running in reverse L. Washer/Compactor fault M. Washer/Compactor Spray Wash in-auto

Motors shall be controlled by VFDs. Bypass starters shall be required and included in the control panel. The bypass motor starters shall be combination type, full voltage, reversing, two speed, not smaller than NEMA Size 1. Starters shall include a circuit breaker, reversing two speed magnetic contactor, overload relays, and a 480 volt to 120 volt, 60 Hz control power transformer with one lead fused and the other lead grounded.

The circuit breaker shall be rated 600 volts with a 65,000 amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity. An external operating handle shall be provided through the door of the panel enclosure with a door interlock.

The starter overload relays shall be ambient compensated and shall be provided with an externally reset push button mounted on the door of the panel enclosure. If a program timer is provided, it shall be capable of varying the length of time between operations and shall be capable of initiating 288 operations in a 24 hour period. If repeat cycle timers are provided, they shall be capable of varying the frequency of cleaning cycles from 10 seconds to a minimum of 10,000 seconds (in 10 second intervals) and duration time adjustable from 1 to a minimum of 1,000 seconds (in 1 second increments).

Timers and relays shall operate at the control voltage with contacts rated 10 amperes resistive at the control voltage.

2-6.02. Bar Screen Local Control Station. Each local control station shall consist of a “Local – Remote (LR) selector switch, a “Forward – Off – Reverse” (FOR) Selector Switch with spring return in the reverse position, and an “Emergency Stop” (ES) push button. The FOR selector switch shall include provisions for being locked in the “Off” position. The ES push button shall be a red mushroom head type.

2-6.03. Washer/Compactor Local Control Station. Each local control station shall consist of a “Local – Remote (LR) selector switch, a “Forward – Off – Reverse” (FOR) Selector Switch with spring return in the reverse position, and an “Emergency Stop” (ES) push button. The FOR selector switch shall include provisions for being locked in the “Off” position. The ES push button shall be a red mushroom head type.

2-6.04. Control Panel and Control Station Wiring. The control stations and control panels shall be completely wired at the factory and ready for external


connection to remote devices and power supplies. All internal instrument and component device wiring shall be as normally furnished by the supplier. All interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be insulated for at least 600 volts.

Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for 12 AWG wire, Cutler-Hammer "C381TP", Buchanon "0725", or equal, with marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors. A terminal block for each conductor of external circuits, shall be provided. The control panel shall be equipped with 25% spare terminal blocks. At least 8 inches [200 mm] of clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and the top and/or bottom of the panel for conduit and wiring space. 2-6.05. Functional Requirements. The bar screen and washer/compactor system shall contain the devices and functionality described within this section at a minimum for operation of each bar screen and washer/compactor. The screen controls shall permit either hand or automatic operation of the screen and washer compactor. 2-6.06. Bar Screens. When the Bar Screen HOA selector switch in the Hand position at the Bar Screen and the Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200), the PLC and the VFD shall be bypassed and the bar screen shall be powered by the bypass motor starter.

With the Bar Screen HOA selector switch in the Hand position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200) and the LR selector switch in the Local position at the Bar Screen Local Control Station (LCS-110 or LCS-210), the bar screen shall operate continuously at high speed in either forward or reverse depending on the FOR selector switch position at the Bar Screen Local Control Station (LCS-110 or LCS-210). Operation is not affected by water level or timers.

With the Bar Screen HOA selector switch in the Hand position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200) and the LR selector switch in the Remote position at the Bar Screen Local Control Station (LCS-110 or LCS-210), the bar screen shall operate continuously at high speed in either forward or reverse depending on the FOR selector switch position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200). Operation is not affected by water level or timers.

With the Bar Screen HOA selector switch in the Auto position at the Bar Screen, the bar screen and washer compactor shall be controlled by the PLC or sequence timers Detail control descriptions are as follows:

Whether by PLC or timers are used for control, timers shall be utilized to select the desired number of cleaning operations per day. A reset timer shall be activated by either the cycle timer or the high differential water level. The reset timer shall control the number of rake passes over the screen per cleaning operation and shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 15 minutes in one second increments. If the screen controller


receives a high differential level signal (within an adjustable time) following initiation of a cycle time cleaning, the screen shall operating at high speed. The screen shall return to low speed operation when the differential level drops below the high speed set point.

A. Bar screen shall be designed to run at two speeds (approx. 24 feet/minute at low speed and 48 feet/minute at high speed). In automatic mode the bar screen will be initiated either by high differential water level across the screen, by a cleaning cycle timer, or by the bar screen channel high level float being activated, whichever occurs first.

B. The bar screen may be called to operate by a high differential water level. This occurs when the differential between the upstream and downstream side of the screen reaches a predetermined differential level set point, the screen shall start at low speed and shall shut down after a predetermined time (approx. 10 seconds) if the differential level drops below the predetermined set point. If differential continues to rise above the high speed set point, the screen shall operate at high speed and shall return to low speed after a predetermined time (approx. 5 seconds) if the differential level drops below the high speed set point. The screen shall operate continuously if the differential level stays within the operating set points for low or high speed. The differential level control and timer set-points shall be field adjustable.

C. The bar screen may be called to operate by a cleaning cycle timer program. This occurs when under normal timer operating conditions the screen shall run using the low speed set point. The timers, whether physical or through the PLC, shall be field adjustable and consist of a run and standby timers. Cycle timers shall operate in parallel with the differential level control.

If the screen has been initiated by the cycle timer and the controller receives a high differential level signal then the screen shall begin operating at high speed. The screen shall return to low speed operation for the remaining timer duration if the differential level drops lower than the high differential level set point for a predetermined amount of time.

D. The bar screen may be called to operate by the activation of the bar screen channel mechanical float level switch. If the controller receives a signal from the level switch the screen shall operate at high speed regardless if the screen is currently operating or not. An audible alarm and strobe light will also activate, and a “High Level” alarm will be displayed at the control panel. The high level alarm shall remain active until the water level returns to less than the high level elevation for a predetermined time.

E. If the screen rakes experience a jam, an overload, overtorque, overcurrent, or overrotation of the rocker arm, the bar screen shall automatically stop and then operate in reverse for a predetermined time. The bar screen shall then stop and return to operate in the forward direction. If the cause of the initial overload has


been cleared, the screen shall automatically reset to normal operation described above. However, if an overload is again detected the reversing cycle shall repeat up to three (3) times prior to stopping and initiating an alarm. The reverse function shall be effective only in the low speed mode. The use of clutches, friction disks, or similar devices for overload protection is not acceptable.

F. Screen operation shall stop after the differential level is below the set point for a predetermined amount of time, after a cycle run time has expired, or high level switch is deactivated. The screen shall automatically stop if the washer/compactor stops working.

G. Motor overtemp/overload faults shall clear automatically when the motor cools to within normal operating range. VFD faults shall be manually reset. Motor and VFD faults, high level, or E-stop activation shall activate an alarm strobe and horn, the alarm strobe shall be latched and shall be turned off with the alarm rest pushbutton. The alarm silence pushbutton shall turn-off the alarm horn.

2-6.07 Washer/Compactor. With the Washer/Compactor HOA selector switch in the Hand position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200) and the LR selector switch in the Local position at the Washer/Compactor Local Control Station (LCS-120 or LCS-220), the Washer/Compactor shall operate continuously in either forward or reverse depending on the FOR selector switch position at the Washer/Compactor Local Control Station (LCS-120 or LCS-220).

With the Washer/Compactor HOA selector switch in the Hand position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200) and the LR selector switch in the Remote position at the Washer/Compactor Local Control Station (LCS-120 or LCS-220), the Washer/Compactor shall operate continuously in either forward or reverse depending on the FOR selector switch position at the Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panel (LCP-100 or LCP-200).

With the Washer/Compactor HOA selector switch in the Auto position at the Bar Screen, the bar screen and washer compactor shall be controlled by the PLC as follows:

A. With the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch in Auto position, the washer/compactor equipment shall operate in a forward and a reverse or pause sequence. The washer/compactor shall be controlled in synchronization with the respective bar screen. The washer/compactor shall begin operation when the bar screen begins operation and shall continue for a predetermined time once the bar screen stops. The screw shall rotate for a predetermined period of time, transporting screenings into the wash zone. The screw shall then reverse or pause, allowing for a longer cleaning period of screenings material per passing of flight rotation before returning to the forward conveyance of screenings to ensure thorough cleaning of the screenings material. The explosion proof solenoid valves shall be sequenced to periodically introduce spray water into the screenings and to flush the dewatering area and drain pan. The


washer/compactor shall operate continuously in forward conveyance if the respective bar screen begins operation in high speed.

B. The Control Panel shall be fitted with an adjustable Current Switch. Upon a Fault the equipment shall shut down and an alarm contact shall be initiated.

C. Emergency Shutdown Pull Cord and Switch: An Emergency Pull Cord and Safety Switch shall be provided in addition to the push-button on the local control panel. The Pull Cord shall be mounted to the compactor over its full length and be attached to the Safety Switch. The Safety Switch shall immediately stop the system when the cord is pulled and the switch is actuated.

D. The washer/compactor shall include a solenoid manifold and spray header fitted with two (2) spray nozzles to control and provide cleaning of screenings before compacting and flushing/cleaning of the washer/compactor. The supply water shall be approximately 10 GPM at 40psi. The solenoid manifold shall consist of two (2) solenoid valves to control the flow of water into the wash zone and flush pan, shipped loose. All interconnecting piping, valves, etc. between the water source, the wash zone and flush pan, and the solenoid valve manifold shall be supplied and installed by the Installing Contractor. Note: If the water source is a plant’s final effluent, the contractor shall also provide a Y-strainer with mesh size 40, equivalent to 0.47mm (470 microns).

2-7. Instrumentation Devices. Bar screen supplier shall provide the level instrumentation equipment. Equipment shall be rated for Class 1 Division 1 hazardous locations and shall be intrinsically safe without the use of additional barriers. 2-7.01. Panel Mounted Devices.

A. Selector Switches. Selector switches shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type with gloved-hand or wing lever operators. Position legends shall be engraved on the switch faceplate. Switches for electric circuits shall have silver butting or sliding contacts, rated 10 amperes continuous at 120 V ac. Contact configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings or for the application. Switches used in electronic signal circuits shall have contacts suitable for that duty. Switches shall be Eaton/Cutler-Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”.

B. Indicating Lights. Indicating lights shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type, with full voltage LED lamps. Legends shall be engraved on the lens or on a legend faceplate. Lights shall be push-to-test type. Indicating lights shall be Eaton/Cutler Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”.

C. Push Buttons. Push buttons shall be 30.5-mm, heavy-duty, oil-tight type. Legends shall be engraved on the push-button faceplate. Contacts shall be rated


10 amperes continuous at 120 V ac. Push buttons shall be Eaton/Cutler-Hammer "10250T", General Electric "CR104P", or Allen Bradley “800T”.

D. Alarm Beacon. Beacons shall be rotating or flashing type. Beacons shall operate at 120 volts ac, have a weatherproof NEMA Type 4X enclosure and shall be able to be stem mounted. Beacons shall not be mounted on top of cabinet. Beacons shall be manufactured by Edwards Signals.

E. Alarm Horns. Horns shall be high-decibel, panel-mount, vibrating type designed for heavy-duty use. Horn volume shall be field-adjustable from 78 to 103 dB at 10 feet. Horns shall operate at 120 volts ac. Horns shall be weatherproof NEMA Type 4X. Horns shall be panel front mounted and shall be supplied with gasket. Horns shall be Edwards Signals “870P Series.”

F. Power Supplies. Regulated dc power supplies for instrument loops shall be designed and arranged so that loss of one supply does not affect more than one instrument loop or system. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of ±10 percent, and the supply output shall be fused or shortcircuit protected. Output voltage regulation shall be by the instrumentation equipment supplied. Multiloop or multisystem power supplies will be acceptable if backup power supply units are provided which will automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply. The backup supply systems shall be designed so either the primary or the backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the instrument system operation. Multiloop power supply connections shall be individually fused so a fault in one instrument loop will be isolated from the other loops being fed from the same supply. Fuses shall be clearly labeled and shall be located for easy access. Multiloop supply systems shall be oversized for an additional 10 percent future load. Failure of a multiloop supply shall be indicated on the respective instrument panel or enclosure. Power supplies shall be Allen Bradley, Phoenix Contact, PULS, or equal.

G. Relays. Relays indicated to be provided in panels, enclosures, or systems furnished under this section shall be of the plug-in socket base type with dustproof plastic enclosures unless noted otherwise. Relays shall be UL recognized and shall have not less than double-pole, double-throw contacts. Control circuit relays shall have silver cadmium oxide contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 V ac. Electronic switching-duty relays shall have gold-plated or gold alloy contacts suitable for use with low-level signals. Relays used for computer input, alarm input, or indicating light service shall have contacts rated at least 3 amperes. Time delay relays shall have dials or switch settings engraved in seconds and shall have timing repeatability of ±2 percent of setting. Latching and special purpose relays shall be for the specific application. Unless otherwise indicated, all relays shall have an integral pilot light that illuminates to indicate an energized condition. Relays shall be IDEC "Series RR"; Potter & Brumfield "Series KRP, CB"; or Struthers-Dunn "Series 219, 246".


H. Intrinsically Safe Relays. Relays shall be solid-state electronic type in which the

energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to allow safe use in hazardous areas. Relays shall be located in non-hazardous areas. Relays shall be manufactured by GEMS, MTL, R.Stahl, Inc., or Turck.

I. Intrinsically Safe Barriers. Barriers shall be solid-state electronic type in which the energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to allow safe use in hazardous areas. Barriers shall be located in non-hazardous areas. Barriers shall be manufactured by MTL, R. Stahl, Inc., or Turck.

J. Strip Heaters. Electric strip heaters shall be provided as indicated on the

Drawings, as specified, and for the application. Strip heaters shall be sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure and to maintain the equipment above its minimum operating temperature. Strip heaters shall be located to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations. Strip heaters shall be controlled by adjustable thermostats with adjustment ranges of 30° to 90°F [-1° to +32°C]. A circuit disconnect switch shall be provided within the enclosure.

K. Programmable Logic Controller. The programmable logic controller processor shall be an industrial type that utilizes battery-backed CMOS type or nonvolatile type memory. Battery-backed memory shall include integral batteries with sufficient capacity for at least 6 months' memory retention without power to the processing unit. Standby and shelf life of the batteries shall be at least 5 years.

• Acceptable Suppliers. The PLCs shall be Allen-Bradley, or pre-approved equal.

• Appurtenances. The PLC processor and I/O hardware shall include all necessary hardware and software for a complete working system. All special rack or panel mounted power supplies, special interconnecting and programming cables, special grounding hardware, or isolation devices shall be furnished for proper operation of the equipment. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, intrinsically safe relays and current repeaters, surge suppression devices, and isolation devices shall be furnished and installed for proper operation of the equipment.

• Service Conditions. PLCs will be installed in air conditioned and heated enclosures. PLCs shall be furnished with sun shades.

• Diagnostics. The processor shall utilize self-monitoring diagnostic techniques. Easily visible LEDs shall indicate "run" and "halt" status as well as memory and input/output error conditions. Diagnostic codes


shall also be available through the programming device to facilitate troubleshooting.

• Programming Port. The processor shall include a programming port that is available for programming and monitoring on-line after the system is fully functional. Removal or disruption of network communications, remote I/O communications, or HMIs to permit programming and monitoring will not be acceptable.

• Communications. The processor shall be programmed to operate autonomously, regardless of communications status with other units.

• Environment. The processor shall be suitable for operation in the environments specified in another section. A key switch shall be provided on the processor to select the operating mode and as a security measure.

• Programming. The processor shall be programmable using conventional relay ladder logic, or as required, and shall include the following functions and features.

o Contacts, coils, branching. o Data comparisons. o On-delay and off-delay timers. o Counters with comparators. o Floating Point Math and Logical instructions. o Master control relay. o Transitional or one-shot outputs. o Standard and user-defined data tables for digital and analog value

storage.

• Capabilities. The processor shall include the following capabilities for programming, debug of programs, and troubleshooting.

o Off-line programming. o On-line status of coils and registers. o Input/output forcing.

• Configuration. Processors shall be configured for standard rack mounting and shall be of plug-in printed circuit board construction. Each programmable logic controller shall include integral communications ports for the programming device, remote input/output, HMI device, or remote communications interfaces as required.


Programmable logic controller systems shall support the following types of input/output.

o 120 volt ac digital input and output. o 4-20 mA dc analog input and output.

• Input/Output Hardware. Input/output hardware shall be supplied in standard modules of 4, 8, 16, or 32 points each for assembly in local and remote input/output enclosures. All input/output hardware shall be entirely contained within the PLC enclosure. Programmable logic controllers having fixed, non-removable input/output hardware are not acceptable. All digital input/output hardware shall include isolation against surges of at least 1500 volts. All output hardware connected to inductive loads shall be supplied with surge suppression devices as required and recommended by the PLC supplier to prevent damage to output hardware. Combination input/output modules will be acceptable if they meet all of the requirements in the following subparagraphs.

• Wiring Terminals. All input/output modules shall utilize easily removable plug-in or hinged field wiring terminals to allow removal of modules without disconnecting individual wires.

• I/O Circuit Power Supply. Outputs for motor driven equipment will typically be powered from the driven equipment. Outputs that control process equipment shall be fully isolated or shall operate relay-type digital output modules or interposing relays in the PLC cabinet.

• Digital Input Modules. Digital input modules shall sense voltages between 100 and 130 volts ac and shall have LED indicators for each point to display the status of the field contact. Each input module shall be suitable for being connected to a separate voltage source and return. Return voltage may be common to the entire input module. Digital input modules shall provide complete electrical isolation between individual inputs.

• Digital Output Modules. Digital output modules shall control voltages from 100 and 130volts ac and shall be rated at least 1 ampere. Outputs shall be individually fused and shall have LED indicators to display output status. Each digital output shall be provided with an interposing relay. Outputs shall withstand a surge of at least 80 amperes for one cycle and shall have an off-state leakage current not to exceed 2.0 mA. Digital


input modules shall provide complete electrical isolation between individual inputs.

• Relay Digital Output Modules. Where indicated on the PLC input/output listing, digital output modules shall control voltages from 24 to 110 volts dc and 24 to 230 volts ac and shall be rated at least 2 amperes. Outputs shall be individually fused and shall have LED indicators to display output status. Digital outputs for motor driven equipment shall be powered by the driven equipment. Outputs shall withstand a surge of at least 80 amperes for 15 milliseconds.

• Panel Terminations. All PLC input/output signals for field connections shall be terminated through panel enclosure terminal strips. Direct connection of field wiring to the I/O module terminals is not acceptable.

L. Programming Software. The programming software shall be personal computer

based and a standard product of the PLC supplier. The software shall be Allen Bradley RSLogix or or pre-approved equal depending on the PLC supplier. The programming software shall allow off-line development of all PLC-related programming, including user annotation of the program, and creation and printing of application programs and I/O cross-reference lists. Special programming tasks originally provided by System Supplier shall also be included. On-line features shall include IEC-1311 standards program modification, ladder-logic modification, program language modification, monitoring of real-time ladder-logic execution, monitoring of program execution, monitoring and manipulation of timer and counter preset and present values, monitoring and forcing of physical I/O, and monitoring and manipulation of analog (register) and bit (binary) data table values. PLC and I/O hardware diagnostic and status information shall be accessible using the software in on-line mode.

M. Operator Interface Terminals. Operator interface terminals (OIT) shall be microprocessor-based flat panel type. The unit shall have data entry capabilities and shall include a password security function. The unit shall be connected to the PLC and shall display status, alarm, and diagnostic information. The OIT shall be furnished with a minimum of 8 MB of flash memory and 8 MB of system memory. The operator interface unit shall be provided with an Ethernet port for communications, and one serial RS-232 or RS-485 port for programming. The OIT shall be rated NEMA 4X, suitable for panel face. Terminals shall be powered from 120 V ac, 60 Hz, single phase. Terminals shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of +32 to +130°F and a relative humidity of 5 to 95 percent.


One licensed copy of the OIT software used to create the screens shall be turned over to the Owner upon successful startup and commissioning of the system. The operator interface unit shall be an Eaton PanelMate Power Pro, Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus, or equal. OIT shall provide graphic screens that shall be used by the operators to access all functions and setpoints necessary for comprehensive control of the bar screens, washer/compactor, and associated equipment. The Supplier shall be responsible for developing and configuring the custom graphic displays. Each piece of major process equipment that is monitored and controlled by the control system shall be displayed on the graphic screens. Graphic screens shall be representations of the equipment and piping. The screens must accurately show all devices and equipment that is part of the control loops. The supplier shall use the configuration standards and conventions to be established by direct coordination with the Owner that shall describe and define such items as proposed graphic display process line colors/representations; color standards for “on”, “off”, “opened”, “closed”, and “alarm” conditions; alarm handling conventions; how items will be selected for control; methods for navigation between displays; address usage/naming conventions; and security setup. Proposed displays shall be submitted to the Design Engineer and Owner for approval.

N. Uninterruptible Power Supply. Bar Screen/Washer/Compactor Local Control Panels shall be provided with an interior-mounted UPS to provide backup power to critical loads upon loss of power supply to the panel. UPS-backed power shall be provided to the programmable logic controller CPU, instrument loops, I/O modules (operating and wetting voltages), all network communications devices, and any other load essential to preventing loss of control system function. Backup power for panel interior lights, heaters, and convenience receptacles is not required. UPSs shall meet the requirements specified below.

Each UPS shall accept incoming 120 volts ac, 60Hz, single-phase utility power, apply surge protection, and supply power to the connected loads. The UPS shall be a double-conversion (“on-line”) type to provide a breakless transfer to backup power. In the event of incoming power failure, the UPS shall provide 120 volts ac, 60 Hz, single-phase power to its connected loads by inverting power stored within integral storage batteries. The UPS shall be contained inside the enclosure and supported by a dedicated shelf attached to the backplane or sidewall. The shelf shall be between 12 and 18 inches from the bottom of the enclosure and shall not be directly above any electronic or electromechanical devices.


The UPS shall have at least two integral NEMA 5-15R receptacles for connection of battery-backed loads. Upon restoration of incoming power, the UPS shall recharge the batteries and return its connected loads to the incoming power source. The factory-installed line cord and plug shall not be altered. The UPS output shall be connected by plug and line cord to terminal blocks as necessary to distribute power to loads not having a power cord and plug; all other loads shall be connected directly to the UPS’s integral receptacles or to permanently installed receptacles fed from the UPS output. The UPS shall maintain a temperature-compensated, float charge voltage on the batteries when utility power is available. Overcurrent protection when utility power is available shall be from a circuit breaker internal to the UPS. The UPS shall be intrinsically current-limiting when the unit is on battery. The UPS shall meet the following requirements.

Capacity, minimum 1000 VA / 700 watts

Filtering and surge Meets IEEE/ANSI C62.41 Category B Protection (IEEE 587) (on utility power)

Voltage, output 120 volts ±3 percent (on battery) Voltage, output Nominal ±3 percent (on-line)

Frequency and waveform, 60 ± 0.3 Hz, true sine-wave output (on battery)

Efficiency, minimum (on-line) 90 percent

Operating environment 0 to 40ºC; 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing

Backup time, minimum at 10 minutes half of rated load

Recharge time, maximum 12 hours to 90 percent of full charge

The UPS shall have spare capacity of at least 30 percent based on actual connected loads. The System Supplier shall advise the Design Engineer if the UPS capacity needs to be higher than specified above to meet this requirement. The UPS shall have a visual status indicator for low (or faulty) battery and incoming ac power failure. The UPS shall emit an audible signal when the UPS is operating on battery power. A relay shall be installed within the panel and its


coil connected across the UPS input power as a means of providing a contact for remote indication of a power failure condition. Batteries shall be sealed maintenance-free, gelled electrolyte lead-acid, or valve-regulated, maintenance-free, lead-acid. Flooded-electrolyte type batteries will not be acceptable. The UPS shall be APC “Smart-UPS”, Emerson/Liebert “GXT1000MT”, Toshiba “1000 Series”, or equal.

O. Ethernet Network Hardware. Ethernet network hardware shall be provided as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. All specified functionality of provided Ethernet network equipment shall adhere to the IEEE 802 standards. Ethernet Hubs will not be accepted for network systems. Ethernet switches shall be provided to connect multiple network segments together, selectively forwarding traffic between the segments. 1. Industrial (Panel-Mounted) Ethernet Switches. Each switch mounted in

process areas shall include the following functionality:

a. Ports: Switch shall support the quantity of 10/100BaseTX ports and 100BaseFX fiber ports to meet the functionality indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of 20% spare auto-negotiating 10/100Base-T, RJ-45 ports, and two multimode fiber uplink ports. A minimum of four UTP ports shall be provided.

b. Each switch connection shall automatically sense the network speed of the devices to which it is connected.

c. Capable of ring-based media redundancy with 30 ms recovery time. d. Path Redundancy: IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. e. Prioritization: IEEE 802.1p QoS Support. f. Network Segregation: Port VLAN. g. Management: SNMPv3 and Browser-based management shall be

supported. h. IGMP snooping supported. i. LED indication of the link activity for each port. j. Environmental: Suitable for installation in industrial environments.

Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 60C. Optional -40 to 60C rating availability.

k. Redundant 24 VDC power supply inputs l. Conformal coating option for use in hazardous environments. m. Mounting: DIN-rail mounted suitable for panel installation. n. All necessary memory upgrades, software feature sets, and cables needed

for proper operation of these switches shall be furnished with each switch.


Switches shall be GarretCom Magnum 6K Series, Hirschmann RS-20 series, Moxa 508A series, N-Tron 708FX series, SIXNET SL-8MG Series, or equal.

2. Ethernet Connectors. Ethernet wiring connectors shall be RJ-45 male

modular plug connectors.

a. Industrial RJ45 Connectors. Industrial connectors shall be an eight position industrial connector for use in manufacturing environments. Connectors shall meet the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standard for Cat-5e or Cat-6 requirements. The connector shall incorporate an IP67 rated seal and shall provide protection from dust and temporary immersion in water. A tethered protective cap shall be provided. The connector shall accept a non-shielded Cat-5e or Cat-6 solid twisted pair cable. Connectors shall be Panduit Industrial TX5e, or equal.

b. Industrial RJ45 Receptacles. Industrial receptacles shall be an eight

position industrial, panel mounted pass through receptacle. Receptacles shall meet the TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standard for Cat-5e or Cat-6 requirements. The receptacle shall incorporate an IP67 rated seal and shall provide protection from dust and temporary immersion in water. A tethered protective cap shall be provided. The receptacle shall accept a non-shielded Cat-5e or Cat-6 solid twisted pair cable. Receptacles shall be Panduit Industrial TX5e, or equal.

P. Ultrasonic Level Transmitters. Each ultrasonic level transmitter shall be a

microprocessor based electronic unit consisting of a sensor assembly, a signal converter/transmitter, and an interconnecting cable. The sensor shall be encapsulated in a chemical and corrosion resistant material such as kynar or CPVC, and shall be suitable for operation over a temperature range of 20° to +150°F [-28° to +66°C] and a relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent. The sensor shall be compatible with the process media being measured. The sensor shall be an explosion-proof or intrinsically safe design suitable for use in all hazardous areas. Sensors mounted in areas subject to freezing shall be provided with special transducers or protected against icing by heaters. Sensors mounted in direct sunlight shall be provided with sunshades. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall have automatic compensation for changes in air temperature at the sensor location. If separate temperature sensing probes are provided, they shall be mounted with or adjacent to the ultrasonic sensor, as recommended by the supplier. The transmitter shall have a four digit LCD display scaled to read in engineering units. Digit height shall be approximately 1/2 inch [12 mm]. The transmitter shall be designed to ignore momentary level spikes, false targets, or momentary loss of echo. A loss of echo condition shall be indicated on the transmitter unit and shall be available as an alarm contact output. The transmitter output shall be an isolated 4 to 20 mA dc


signal linearly proportional to the measured level range. Calibration parameters shall be entered through a keypad on the unit and shall be stored in nonvolatile EEPROM memory. Accuracy of the transmitted signal shall be ±0.5 percent of the level range. The transmitter shall be a differential level-sensing unit that accepts inputs from two ultrasonic level sensors. The transmitter output shall be proportional to the difference in level. The differential value shall be displayed on the unit. An adjustable alarm contact, actuated by differential level, shall be provided. A sufficient length of sensor to transmitter signal cable shall be furnished with the instrument to locate the sensor 25 to 200 feet [7.6 to 61 m] from the signal converter. The signal converter electronics shall be housed in a weatherproof, corrosion resistant NEMA Type 4 enclosure suitable for wall or pipestand mounting and for operating temperatures of 5° to +122°F [ 20° to +50°C] and a relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent. A thermostatically controlled strip heater shall be provided in the signal converter enclosure. One programming device shall be provided capable to configure the differential level device. The signal converter shall be of the ac-powered type. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall be Siemens “HydroRanger 200”, Pulsar “Ultra 3”, Endress+Hauser “Prosonic”, or Magnetrol “Echotel 344.”

Q. Fixed Mount Float Type Level Switches. Switches shall be of the floating ball type, with a nominal 5-1/2 inch [139.7 mm] diameter, coated stainless steel float ball that contains a sealed switch assembly. The float shall be supported with a flexible synthetic rubber hinge fastened to an adjustable mounting bracket. The hinge shall also act as a housing for the lead wires from the alarm switch. The lead wire shall be a waterproof cable of such length that no splice or junction box is required in the wet well. Stainless steel mounting accessories shall be furnished. The switch contacts shall be single-pole-single-throw rated 1-amp [A] at 120 V ac. Switches shall be Siemens "9G-EF" or Contegra “FS 90”.

2-8. FABRICATION. All welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified. 2-8.01. Assembly Fasteners. All hardware shall be stainless steel. 2-8.02. Edge Grinding. All cut and sheared edges shall be broken and ground smooth to ensure that no sharp edges are present. 2-8.03. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors and stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance


with the paint supplier's recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals, which are not to be welded, shall be ground to a radius with a power grinder. All purchased components such as motors, reducers, valves, switches, etc., shall be supplied with the supplier’s standard finish. 2-8.04. Shop Painting. Unless otherwise indicated, shop painting shall be as specified in the General Equipment Stipulations. Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Design Engineer. Field painting shall conform to the requirements of the Protective Coatings section. 2-8.05. Stainless Steel. All stainless steel shall be pickled in accordance with ASTM A380 at the mill before being shipped. After all fabrication and welding has been completed all stainless steel surfaces shall be glass Bead Blasted prior to equipment assembly. The Bead Blast shall remove all weld discoloration and surface contaminants and provide for Spontaneous Passivation as recognized in ASTM A380-99, Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems, 1. Scope, 1.1.1.1. All stainless steel surfaces shall be adequately protected during fabrication, shipping, handling and installation to prevent contamination from iron or carbon steel objects or surfaces. 2-8.06. Finishes.

A. Motors and gear reducers will remain the supplier's standard finish for severe environment. All plastic parts will remain unfinished, supplied as the supplier's standard.

B. Provide protective coatings conforming with the Protective Coatings section.

The intent is to coat all of the interior and exterior surfaces of the equipment and other parts to protect all parts from corrosion as soon as possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. Factory Acceptance Testing. After system assembly and controls debugging at Supplier’s facility, the system shall be tested before the equipment is shipped to the site. The factory test shall be conducted on complete system, including all field I/O devices, and communications and network equipment. The entire system, including all peripherals and associated software, shall be factory tested under simulated operating conditions. Both normal operating sequences and fault conditions shall be simulated. The results shall be noted in the HMI alarm/event log. The testing procedures for hardware and software are described below.


All basic functions shall be demonstrated, including I/O processing, communications, alarm handling, HMI display functions, alarm logging, as well as the specific functions listed herein. This operational test may run concurrently with the demonstration of hardware and software functions. 3-1.01. Hardware Test. Processors, processor modules, and peripheral devices associated with the system shall be assembled together as they will be installed in the field and shall be tested. The test shall demonstrate proper operation of each hardware device and communications among devices, and shall include verification of selected analog and discrete inputs and outputs. 3-1.02. Software Test. All system software modules specified herein shall be demonstrated. Software tests shall include running all diagnostics, debugging routines, and system test routines. The operating system, advanced process control language compiler, and all associated drivers shall be fully tested and operable for the system test. Software "patches" or changes to bypass failed or flawed modules during the test will not be acceptable. 3-2. INSTALLATION. Installation shall be in accordance with the Equipment Installation section. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat workman like manner.

3-3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-3.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the supplier shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with the Testing and Start-up section, and shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Design Engineer.

A. The supplier's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.

B. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price. 3-3.02. Installation Supervision. The equipment supplier shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation.

A. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price.


B. Suppliers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing contractor's erection or installation procedures. The equipment supplier will be provided with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services.

3-4. PERFORMANCE TESTS. Prior to startup, all equipment described herein shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance as determined by means of a functional test. Any equipment or components that fail this functional test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner and re-tested.

A. Contractor shall have the bar screen supplier provide a factory service representative who has complete knowledge of the operation of the systems, including mechanical, electrical, control, and alarm components as necessary to perform field testing and initial start-up to assure and demonstrate the proper performance of all equipment components.

3-4.01 Functional Test

1. After Bar Screens and associated equipment have been completely installed and working under the direction of the supplier, conduct field tests necessary to demonstrate that operation conforms to these Technical Specifications. Supply water or wastewater, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to complete field tests.

2. Demonstrate with a Functional Test that these Technical Specifications have been met by the equipment as installed. As a minimum, perform the following tests.

a. That the units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment.

b. That the units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and without objectionable vibration.

c. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.

d. That the controls perform satisfactorily.

3. If the Bar Screen’s performance does not comply with Technical Specifications, take corrective measures or remove and replace bar screens with bar screens which meet the performance criteria specified.

3-4.02. Start-Up. Beneficial use will not occur until after the start-up activities have been performed and accepted by the City. Start-up activities include the following:

1. Receipt and acceptance by the City of draft Operation and Maintenance manuals, including the wiring and ladder diagrams.


2. Installation inspection by City operating, electrical and instrumentation staff followed by any corrective measures required by the Contractor.

3. Satisfactory operation of Bar Screens for 14 consecutive days under the City’s control per Section 4465. If malfunctions or other operational problems halt the 14-day test period, the Contractor shall make appropriate corrections and restart the 14-day test period.

4. Provide the services of a factory-trained technician for a period of 4 hours per bar screen (8 hours each plant) to train the City’s operation and maintenance personnel. Training session shall be scheduled and coordinated by the Contractor.

3-4.03. Acceptance. After the start-up operation has been successfully completed, and all submittals and final Operation and Maintenance manuals have been received, reviewed, and accepted by the City, the City may accept the Bar Screens per Section 11312. The manuals shall include ladder logic diagrams and wiring and termination diagrams for both power and instrumentation systems.

3-5. TRAINING. Supplier’s qualified factory service personnel shall conduct on-site training to instruct the Owner’s staff in operation and maintenance for the equipment as specified in the Demonstration and Training Section. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section


Section STS11313

SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and testing of screenings washer/compactor systems to be installed in the location as indicated on the Drawings and as required herein:

Location Headworks Facility at North Regional WWTP (NRWWTP)

Headworks Facility at Lucas WWTP

(LWWTP)

Equipment designation. WC WC

Number of units. 2 2

Equipment tag numbers. WC-1, WC-2 WC-1, WC-2

A. Each washer/compactor system shall be furnished complete with controls, an

inlet hopper, shafted screw, trough, drive unit, spray water piping and solenoid, wash zone, discharge piping and washer/compactor drain, structural supports, and all appurtenances as specified, indicated on the Drawings , or otherwise required for a complete and properly operating installation.

B. Each unit including motor and all devices mounted on washer/compacter

assembly, shall be rated for use in a Class I, Division 2, Group D area as defined by NEC.

C. The screenings and washer/compactor equipment shall be furnished by a single

Screenings Handling System Supplier (SHSS) who shall provide all of the services, equipment, accessories instruments and control panels required meeting all the design conditions, testing requirements, performance guarantees, and warranties, as specified herein.

D. The following technical specification sections cover equipment to be provided by

the SHSS.

a. Section 11312, Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screens b. Section 11313, Screenings Washer/Compactor Equipment

E. The SHSS shall be the mechanically cleaned bar screen supplier.


F. The SHSS shall provide a common control enclosure to house the controls for both Bar Screens and the related Screenings Washer/compactors. The common control enclosure shall include an Allen Bradley PLC CompactLogix or equal and an operator interface terminal for control and monitoring of the bar screens and washer/compactors.

G. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts

of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alteration in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that indicated on the Drawings or in the Technical Specification. The equipment included in this section shall be coordinated with the multi-rake bar screens as indicated on the Drawings.

H. Contractor shall bring utility water piping to the valve manifold supplied by the

screening washer/compactor system supplier to serve all water supply and spray water systems on the unit. Contractor shall install valves and threaded unions as required to facilitate the disconnect and removal of the washer/compactor unit from its installed location.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, technical specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier unless exceptions are noted by the Design Engineer. Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor required to complete all Work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations Section shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this technical specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Power Supply. Power supply to the equipment shall be 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hz. 1-2.03. Electrical Equipment. All electrical equipment shall conform to the appli-cable standards of the National Electrical Supplier's Association (NEMA) and the National Electrical Code (NEC). Both power and control equipment shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts even though operating voltages may be lower. All electrical components and equipment furnished with and mounted on the washer/compactor or installed in the screen area shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for operation in a Class I, Division 2, Group D location.


1-2.04. Permanent Nameplates. Each unit denoted by an identifying code and number in the Technical Specifications or on the Drawings shall be provided with permanent nameplates. Identification used shall be the same as the identifying code and number indicated in the Technical Specifications or on the Drawings. 1-2.05. Information Plates. Each major component of equipment shall have an information plate securely affixed to the equipment. Information plates shall be as specified in the Equipment and Valve Identification section. 1-2.06. Site Elevation. All equipment furnished shall be designed to meet stipulated conditions and to operate satisfactorily at this elevation. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Detailed layout drawings, assembly, foundation, and installation drawings; detailed technical specifications and data covering materials of construction and coatings; rated materials handling capacity (cubic feet per hour); list of spare parts; dimensions of inlet hopper; power drive assembly and bearings data; wiring and schematic diagrams; motor data; equipment weights; sequence of operation; and part devices, and other accessories forming a part of the washer/compactor unit furnished shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Washer/compactor Name of supplier. Type and model. Overall unit dimensions. Type of bearings. Rotative speed. Net weight of unit. Inlet hopper details. Pipe component connection.

Detailed layout drawings. Anchor bolt details and support requirements.

Discharge pipe and support details. Data on shop painting

Motor As specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment Section.

Common Bar Screen and Washer/Compactor Control Panels Control panel enclosure layout, dimensions, and weight. Operator Interface Terminal. Electrical schematics and wiring diagrams. Overcurrent characteristics and details of motor control Enclosure rating. Catalog and data sheets on all components.


A recommended sequence of operation, including values and ranges for time delays, speeds, and other set points for use in the initial startup of the system. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed. 1-3.01. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Data and Training section. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instruction or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 1-3.02 Quality Control Submittals.

A. Written certification that the factory-applied coating system(s) is identical to the requirements specified.

B. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.

C. Supplier's written/printed installation instructions.

D. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup.

E. Supplier's Certifications

a. Submit supplier's certification that Contract Documents have been examined

by the supplier for proposed electrical, mechanical, and structural systems affecting performance of the equipment.

b. Submit supplier's certification that the maximum power requirement, if used,

shall not exceed the motor rating under operating conditions.

c. Submit supplier's certification that the equipment is designed for service and application specified and is installed and aligned properly.

1-4. SPARE PARTS. Spare parts consisting of the following items shall be provided for each washer/compactor supplied on this project:

Replacement screw with brush 1 Thrust bearing 1 Shaft seals 1 Solenoid valve rebuild kit 1 Wear Bars 2 Shafted Screw 1


Spare parts and special tools shall be packaged in accordance with the General Provisions and Requirements sections, with labels indicating the contents of each package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner as directed. If any of the spare parts are used during the installation process, they must be replaced by the supplier at no cost to the Owner. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. All items of the equipment covered by this section of the Technical Specifications shall be supplied by the same equipment supplier and/or supplier to ensure that parts work together and function in a coordinated manner. The supplier and/or supplier shall have supplied a minimum of ten (10) systems of similar design which are currently and have been in satisfactory use conveying wastewater screenings for a minimum of ten (10) years in the United States. The Owner and Design Engineer reserve the right to reject any supplier based on an unsatisfactory experience record or the inability to meet technical specifications. 1.5. WARRANTY. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 4740 – Warranties and Bonds. Conveyor supplier shall furnish to the City a warranty written expressly from the supplier to the City of Shreveport, covering workmanship and material under normal use and service. This warranty applies to both the washer/compactor and associated electrical equipment. The warranty shall cover 100 percent of parts and labor for at least five (5) years. The warranty period shall commence after beneficial use has been established by the City. Warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the supplier's standard warranty for similar manufactured units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Screenings will be discharged into the inlet hopper of the screenings washer/compactor unit from a mechanical bar screen as indicated on the Drawings. The screenings washer/compactor unit will agitate through compaction and multiple reversals of the screw and then wash, dewater, compact, and transport the screenings for discharge to the storage container area through discharge piping as indicated on the Drawings. The washer/compactor shall be designed for continuous service. Wastewater removed by compaction, and spray system discharge shall be returned downstream of the mechanical bar screen units by drain piping. 2-1.1. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIEMENTS. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The screenings washer/compactor system shall be capable of removing putrescible organic matter


from screenings by agitating, washing then compacting screenings to produce a clean, dry, low odor product. The screenings washer/compactor unit shall be designed to meet the following minimum performance and design requirements:

Operating floor elevation See Drawings Screen discharge height from See Drawings operating floor Location NRWWTP LWWTP

Tag Numbers WC-01 WC-02

WC-01 WC-02

Designation WC WC

Material Collected Screenings Collected Screenings

Washer/Compactor Mode Batch

Washer Capacity, (each) 106 cu-ft/hr

Volume reduction, min Up to 50 %

Product dry solids concentration, minimum, total percent solids by weight

30-35 %

Discharge piping length, max 8 ft (m)

Incline from horizontal, max 5 deg

Nominal auger dia. (min) 10.2 (259) in (mm) Nominal auger speed 14 rpm Minimum gear reducer output torque 12,700 in-lbs Motor

Minimum size 5 HP Maximum Speed 1750 rpm

The screenings washer/compactor unit shall be designed for operation under the expected working conditions specified herein. The unit components shall be designed, proportioned, and fabricated to have sufficient strength and stiffness to withstand working stresses and maintain structural integrity. The washer/ compactor discharge piping shall be fabricated to fit within the space indicated on the Drawings. The drain shall be piped to the bar screen channel shown on the Drawings. When required, pressure reducing valves shall be furnished by the Contractor to reduce the available supply water pressure (80 psi) to the water pressure required by the equipment. Contractor shall verify pressure requirements at the facilities. Pressure reducing valves shall be manufactured by Cla-Val, Watts, or equal.


2-3. ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS. The screenings washer/compactor unit shall be Headworks Screwpactor HD, Huber Technology, Inc. Wash Press WAP, or approved Equal. Refer to Technical Specification 4630 for any washer compactor system other than those specifically listed above which is to be submitted as an equal. The contract drawings and technical specifications are based upon the Headworks washer compactor systems. Any listed “or equal” supplier work includes any necessary re-design (mechanical, structural, electrical, control and instrumentation), revised piping/equipment/wiring, etc., at no additional cost to the Owner. 2-4. MATERIALS.

Inlet Hopper Min 14 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel.

Screw Housing and Min 11 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. Supports Hollow Shaft Screw Hardened alloy steel or Type 316 L stainless steel,

minimum Brinell hardness of 200. Hardware Type 316 stainless steel.

2-5. SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION. The screenings washer/compactor system shall include, but not be limited to, an inlet hopper to contain the discharge of the screens over the screw washer/ compactor, all required discharge/transport piping and supports, wash water supply and drain connections, solenoid valve manifold and spray system, supplier's control panel, equipment mounted control station, and all other accessories and appurtenances as required for a complete and satisfactory installation and integrated operation with the screens. All utility water connections shall include shutoff valves and unions to allow the unit to be moved from its normal location. Each wash water supply connection on the unit shall have 1-inch NPT inlet with shutoff valve for connection to the plant's utility water supply. 2-5.01. Inlet Hopper. The inlet hopper shall be designed to direct screenings material into the screw housing. The hopper shall be attached to the washer/compactor housing via a flanged connection. 2-5.02. Screw Housing. The screw housing shall be of a cylindrical shape. The interior of the housing shall incorporate rifling bars or anti-rotation bars around the entire perimeter to prevent screenings rotation in the dewatering zone and perforations to allow for drainage of the compacted material. The top of the unit shall incorporate inlets for wash water nozzles in the washing zone and the dewatering zone. The inlet to the dewatering zone shall be mounted on a removable cover. The cover shall be held in place by a latching system to allow fast and easy removal. The housing shall incorporate


a resilient seal to form a watertight seal with the cover. The bottom of the housing shall contain a section for drainage. Wedge wire drain section shall be constructed of profiled bars with a nominal thickness of 1/2 inch and 2 mm linear openings. Alternatively, perforated plate drain section shall have 0.2 inch round openings. The entire housing shall be supported on legs that allow for a 2” adjustment in height. 2-5.03. Drain Pan. A drain pan shall be mounted to the bottom of the screw housing along the full length of the housing. The pan shall be provided with a flushing nozzle and a 3-inch plain end drain pipe for connecting to 3-inch PVC pipe, and shall be sloped towards the drain shown on the Drawings. The pan shall be held in place by a latching system to allow fast and easy removal. The pan shall incorporate a resilient seal along its top edge to form a watertight seal with the screw housing. 2-5.04. Axial Thrust Bearing. An axial thrust bearing shall handle the entire load created during compaction and shall allow the screw to reverse its rotation. The thrust bearing shall be arranged to handle the overhung load of the screw. The axial thrust bearing shall be flange mounted to the gear reducer and screw housing using heavy duty flanges of nominal 1/2 inch thick. The bearing shall have stainless steel housing and utilize tapered roller bearings, two sets of double lip seals, and an O-ring seal mounted on the inlet flange of the press body. The bearing shall fully support the screw so that the screw does not rest inside the press housing. Setscrews shall be located on the outside of the thrust bearing to allow personnel to center the screw without disassembly of the press. 2-5.05. Solenoid Valve Manifold. A solenoid valve manifold shall be furnished to control wash water supply to the wash zone and flush pan. The manifold shall include two brass body explosion proof solenoid valves with manual ball valves, a pressure gauge, and an explosion proof pressure switch. The valve manifold shall be provided mounted to the exterior of the washer compactor body. Solenoid valves shall be rated for a 120-volt ac power supply. 2-5.06. Shafted Screw Assembly

A. The Shafted Screw Assembly shall consist of a spiral welded to mechanical tubing. The mechanical tubing shall be welded to an end shaft.

B. The Shafted Screw shall be manufactured from carbon plate and welded to form a single spiral.

C. The diameter of the Shafted Screw assembly shall be 10.2 inches minimum in diameter and shall be constant over the length of the assembly.

D. The Shafted Screw shall have one (1) abrasive resistant Brush Assembly. The Brush shall be Nylon and tack welded or screwed onto the screw.


E. The Pitch of the screw shall reduce to 66% of the screw outer diameter in the Press Zone area.

F. The final Quarter-Pitch of the Shafted Screw shall be Hard Faced. 2-5.07. Sieve Zone

A. The Sieve Zone shall tubular in design with an integral collection pan and an Inlet Chute to accept screenings.

B. The Sieve Zone shall be manufactured from minimum 11 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel and minimum 14 gauge perforated Grade 316 Stainless Steel. The perforations shall be 1/8” minimum.

C. The Sieve Zone shall include one (1) Inlet Hopper(s) to direct screenings from the Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screen into the Shafted Screw Conveyor/Compactor. The Inlet Hoppers shall be constructed of 14 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel and shall be bolted to the Transport Zone of the U-Trough.

2-5.08. Transport Zone

A. The Transport Zone shall be tubular in design and constructed of minimum 11 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel.

B. The Transport Zone shall be fitted with Wear Bars constructed of minimum 3/8” thick Carbon Steel. The Wear Bars shall be bolted from the outside of the Transport Zone. Welded Wear Bars shall not be allowed.

2-5.09. Wash Zone

A. The Wash Zone shall tubular in design with an integral collection pan located directly under the zone. The Wash Zone shall wash screenings and reduce the organic content.

B. The Wash Zone shall be constructed of minimum 14 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel plate and minimum 11 gauge perforated Grade 316 Stainless Steel plate. The perforations shall be 1/8” minimum.

C. The Wash Zone shall include a solenoid valve, shipped loose to control the flow of water. All interconnecting piping, valves, etc. between the water source, the Wash Zone and the solenoid valve shall be supplied and installed by the Installing Contractor.


2-5.10. Press Zone

A. The Press Zone design shall tubular in design with an integral collection pan located directly under the zone.

B. The Press Zone shall be constructed of minimum 11 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel.

2-5.11. Collection Pan

A. The Collection Pan design shall be a U-Tough design located directly under the Sieve Zone.

B. The Collection Pan shall be constructed of minimum 14 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel and attached to the compactor body with quick release clamps.

C. Periodically, water shall be introduced into the collection pan to flush organics and other fines to the drain. The Collection Pan water supply shall be approximately 10 GPM at 40 psi. The flush water shall run five (5) seconds out of every twenty (20) seconds and be field adjustable. The flush water shall flow down to the base of the collection pan to the 3” diameter drain outlet.

2-5.12. Discharge Pipe

A. The Discharge Pipe shall be cylindrical and constructed of minimum 14 gauge Grade 316 Stainless Steel. The discharge Pipe shall increase in diameter over its length in order to reduce the potential for plugging.

B. The Discharge Pipe shall direct and discharge screenings at a clear discharge height that allows for placement of a receptacle (provided by others) to collect the screenings.

C. The Discharge Pipe shall be mounted to the pipe flange on the press body and designed to transport the washed, dewatered, and compacted screenings to a chute to the receptacle.

D. Discharge Pipe bends shall be long radius type. Grooved couplings shall be provided at locations indicated on the Drawings.

E. Pipe and chute supports shall be furnished to support the discharge pipe, chute, and bagger unit and avoid conflict with other systems while providing a stable rigid connection. Support member materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Support system details shall be provided with shop drawing submittal for the system.


2-5.13. Anchor Bolts. All anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be 3/4" diameter 316 SS and shall comply with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section. The anchor bolts shall be supplied by the installing contractor. 2-5.14. Support legs. Shall be supplied as required for adequate support under operating conditions. The support legs shall allow for a 2” adjustment in height 2-6. ELECTRIC MOTOR. Motors shall be as specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section. Each motor shall be explosion proof and UL Listed rated for Class I, Division 2, Group D environment. Motors shall be rated for operation in a 104° F environment. Motor shall have built-in thermostat to protect from overheating that is to be field wired to corresponding terminal in control panel for redundant (ambient) overload protection. 2-6.01. The gear reducer design shall utilize a shaft mounted parallel helical type gear reducer driven by a direct coupled motor. The reducer shall have a cast iron housing with an output speed of 14 rpm. 2-7. CONTROLS. Washer/compactor controls shall be incorporated into the associated mechanical bar screen control panel. Refer to technical specification 11312, Section 2-6 and 2-7. The equipment shall be protected by a load current relay with contacts which can be set to stop at any desired load. The load current relay shall be suitable for 120-volt ac, single-phase, 60-Hz power supply and shall have two normally open contacts that close when the load current exceeds the set point. The contacts shall be rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac. The supplier shall provide recommended load current and time delay settings for the adjustable load current relay.

2-8. BALANCE. Rotating parts shall be accurately machined and be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. 2-9. FABRICATION. All welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified. 2-9.01. Assembly Fasteners. All hardware shall be stainless steel.

2-9.02. Edge Grinding. All cut and sheared edges shall be broken and ground smooth to ensure that no sharp edges are present. 2-9.03. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors and stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint supplier's recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of


ferrous metals, which are not to be welded, shall be ground to a radius with a power grinder. All purchased components such as motors, reducers, valves, switches, etc., shall be supplied with the supplier’s standard finish. 2-9.04. Shop Painting. Unless otherwise indicated, shop painting shall be as specified in the General Equipment Stipulations. Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Design Engineer. Field painting shall conform to the requirements of the Protective Coatings section. 2-9.05. Stainless Steel. All stainless steel shall be pickled in accordance with ASTM A380 at the mill before being shipped. After all fabrication and welding has been completed all stainless steel surfaces shall be glass Bead Blasted prior to equipment assembly. The Bead Blast shall remove all weld discoloration and surface contaminants and provide for Spontaneous Passivation as recognized in ASTM A380-99, Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems, 1. Scope, 1.1.1.1. All stainless steel surfaces shall be adequately protected during fabrication, shipping, handling and installation to prevent contamination from iron or carbon steel objects or surfaces. 2-9.06. Finishes.

A. Motors and gear reducers will remain the supplier's standard finish for severe environment. All plastic parts will remain unfinished, supplied as the supplier's standard.

B. Provide protective coatings conforming with the Protective Coatings section. The intent is to coat all of the interior and exterior surfaces of the equipment and other parts to protect all parts from corrosion as soon as possible.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Installation shall be in accordance with the Equipment Installation section. 3-2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-2.01. Installation Check An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the supplier shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with the Testing and Startup section, and shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Design Engineer.


The supplier's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. 3-2.02. Installation Supervision. The equipment supplier shall furnish a qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. Suppliers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing contractor's erection or installation procedures. 3-3. PERFORMANCE TESTS. Prior to startup, all equipment described herein shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance as determined by means of a functional test. Any equipment or components that fail this functional test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner and re-tested.

A. Contractor shall have the washer/compactor supplier provide a factory service representative who has complete knowledge of the operation of the systems, including mechanical, electrical, control, and alarm components as necessary to perform field testing and initial start-up to assure and demonstrate the proper performance of all equipment components.

3-3.01 Functional Test.

A. After washer/compactor and associated equipment have been completely installed and working under the direction of the supplier, conduct field tests necessary to demonstrate that operation conforms to these Technical Specifications. Supply water or wastewater, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to complete field tests.

B. Demonstrate with a Final Acceptance Test that these Technical Specifications have been met by the equipment as installed. As a minimum, perform the following tests.

1. That the units have been properly installed and are in correct alignment.

2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading any parts and

without objectionable vibration.

3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.


4. That the controls perform satisfactorily.

C. If the washer/compactor’s performance does not comply with Technical Specifications, take corrective measures or remove and replace bar screens with bar screens which meet the performance criteria specified.

3-3.02. Start-Up. Beneficial use will not occur until after the start-up activities have been performed and accepted by the City. Start-up activities include the following:

A. Receipt and acceptance by the City of draft Operation and Maintenance manuals, including the wiring and ladder diagrams.

B. Installation inspection by City operating, electrical and instrumentation staff followed by any corrective measures required by the Contractor.

C. Satisfactory operation of washer/compactor with associated bar screen for 14 consecutive days under the City’s control per Section 4465. If malfunctions or other operational problems halt the 14-day test period, the Contractor shall make appropriate corrections and restart the 14-day test period.

D. Provide the services of a factory-trained technician for a period of 4 hours per washer/compactor (8 hours each plant) to train the City’s operation and maintenance personnel.

3-3.03. Acceptance. After the start-up operation has been successfully completed, and all submittals and final Operation and Maintenance manuals have been received, reviewed, and accepted by the City, the City may accept the Washer/Compactors per Section 11313. The manuals shall include ladder logic diagrams and wiring and termination diagrams for both power and instrumentation systems. 3-4. TRAINING. Supplier’s qualified factory service personnel shall conduct on-site training to instruct the Owner’s staff in operation and maintenance for the equipment as specified in the Demonstration and Training Section. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section


Section STS13500 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the integration of the new bar screens and washer compactor equipment into the existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System. The integration shall include but not be limited to the following items:

• Provide all configuration and programming to incorporate changes to the existing human machine interface (HMI) graphics to remove the existing bar screen and washer/compactor equipment I/O and add the new bar screen and washer/compactor equipment I/O. System supplier shall coordinate with the bar screen supplier and match the graphical layout that will be on the bar screen local control panel’s operator interface panel.

• Install fiber optic cable from the bar screen and washer/compactor local control panels to the IPC panels located as shown on the drawings.

• Terminate and connect the fiber optic cabling to the fiber optic patch panels located in the bar screen and washer/compactor local control panels and the fiber hubs in the IPC panels.

• Provide troubleshooting activities necessary to integrate the new bar screens and washer compactors into the existing SCADA system.

• Assist in equipment commissioning and startup activities to provide a complete and properly functioning system.

1-1.02. Associated Sections. This section also includes the equipment and services specified in the following sections.

Section 13550 SOFTWARE CONTROL BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS

Section 13591 METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONNECTORS

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer.


1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this technical specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Drawings. The Drawings indicate locations and arrangements of equipment and may include installation details and block and one-line diagrams showing connections and interfaces with other equipment. The input/output (I/O) lists are indicated on the Drawings. Principal components of the instrumentation systems shall be as indicated on the P&ID drawings. 1-2.03. Codes, Permits and Agency Approvals. All work performed and all materials used shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and with applicable local regulations and ordinances. Where mandated by codes, panels, assemblies, materials, and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. Contractor shall, as part of their work, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels and equipment. 1-2.04. Supplier’s Qualifications. Equipment and software furnished under this section and under other related sections listed in the Scope paragraph above shall be designed, coordinated, and supplied by a single supplier or supplier, hereinafter referred to as the System Supplier. The System Supplier shall be regularly engaged in the business of supplying computer-based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems. The Contractor shall utilize the services of the System Supplier to coordinate all control system related items, to check-out and calibrate instruments, and to perform all testing, training, and startup activities specified to be provided. The System Supplier shall have the following minimum qualifications:

• The supplier shall maintain a design office staffed with qualified technical design personnel.

• The supplier shall maintain competent and experienced service personnel to service the hardware and software furnished for this project.

• The supplier shall have as a minimum 5 years of experience in the design, coordination and supply of computer-based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems.

1-2.05. Coordination. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated by System Supplier for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these technical specifications, under other contracts, and, where applicable, with related existing


equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, technical specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the supplier, and the supplier of the related equipment. 1-2.06. Related Equipment and Materials. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrumentation, motor controllers, valve actuators, chemical feeders, analytical measuring devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other sections or furnished under other contracts. 1-2.07. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with System Supplier’s equipment drawings and shall be as close as practical to the tag numbers used on the Drawings and device schedules. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable. 1-3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The drawings and technical specifications indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the Drawings or Technical Specifications are deemed necessary by System Supplier, details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted to Design Engineer for review with or before the first stage submittal. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance. The technical specifications describe the minimum requirements for hardware and software. Where System Supplier’s standard configuration includes additional items of equipment or software features not specifically described herein, such equipment or features shall be furnished as a part of the system and shall be warranted as specified herein. 1-3.01. Governing Standards. Equipment furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with IEEE 519, ANSI C37.90, FCC Part 15 - Class A, and NEMA ICS-1-109.60. 1-3.02. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between suppliers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The System Supplier shall review the Drawings, the supplier's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications requisite for proper installation subject to acceptance by Design Engineer. At least three feet of clear access space shall be provided in front of all instrumentation and control system components. 1-3.03. Workmanship and Materials. System Supplier shall guarantee all equip-ment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection,


defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except for testing. 1-3.04. Corrosive Fluids. All parts which are exposed to corrosive conditions shall be made from corrosion resistant materials. System Supplier shall submit certification that the instrument supplier approves the selection of materials of primary elements that are in contact with the specified process fluid to be inert to the effects of the process fluid. 1-3.05. Appurtenances. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished as needed for proper performance of the equipment. 1-3.06. Programming Devices. A programming or system-configuring device shall be provided for systems that contain any equipment that requires such a device for routine calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting. The programming device shall be complete, newly purchased for this project, and shall be in like-new condition when turned over to Owner at completion of startup. 1-4. SUBMITTALS. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, technical specifications, and data covering the materials used and the parts, devices and accessories forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Submittal data shall be grouped and submitted in three separate stages. The submittal for each stage shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the Drawings shall be referenced where applicable. 1-4.01. First Stage Submittal. The first stage submittal shall include the following items.

a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies between the system proposed by System Supplier and this technical specification.

b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware and software items, clearly marked to show the model number, optional features, and intended


service of each device.

c. A brief, concise description of the proposed system, including major hardware and software components and personnel training.

d. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships.

e. A copy of the proposed software licenses for all software associated with the system.

f. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 1340 sections.

1-4.02. Second Stage Submittal. Before any equipment is released for shipment to the site and before factory testing is scheduled, the following data shall be submitted. At System Supplier’s option, the first and second stage submittals may be combined.

a. Detailed functional descriptions of all software modules specified and furnished as part of System Supplier’s standard system. The descriptions shall be identified with the applicable technical specification paragraph.

b. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel wiring, piping, and painting. Panel and subpanel drawings shall be to scale and shall include overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing, mounting details, weight, and front of panel arrangement to show general appearance, with spacing and mounting height of instruments and control devices.

c. Wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections. If panel terminal designations, inter-device connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before shipment of the equipment to the site.

d. Fiber termination diagrams to show all fiber terminations at fiber patch panels and final termination at equipment. Fiber termination diagrams shall show individual fiber type (single or multimode), fiber core/cladding dimensions, fiber colors, circuit identifications, and type of terminator.


e. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve System Supplier from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.

f. Input/output listings showing point names, numbers, and addresses. Input/output identification numbers from the contract documents shall be cross-referenced in this submittal.

g. Standard system engineering and user manuals describing the use of the system and application programming techniques for creating reports, graphics, database, historical records, and adding new process I/O nodes to the system.

h. Additional Requirements identified in other Division 13 sections.

1-4.03. Third Stage Submittal. Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commence-ment of field acceptance testing. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of equipment and software furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device model number and other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted. Additional requirements are identified in other Division 13 technical specification sections. 1-5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All electronic equipment and instruments shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse ambient conditions. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Design Engineer. Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric conditions.


Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to positively identify the device. All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective packaging. Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with Design Engineer or Owner prior to shipment. System Supplier shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be as detailed in the individual instrument technical specifications. Components which are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and disassembled by the supplier prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and are adequately supported. 1-6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Delivery, Storage and Handling Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. 1-7. SPARE PARTS. Spare parts and consumable items are specified in other sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All equipment furnished under each section referenced in SCOPE is a part of this section and shall be selected by System Supplier for its superior quality and intended performance. Equipment and materials used shall be subject to review. 2-1.01. Standard Products. The systems furnished shall be standard products. Where two or more units of the same type of equipment are supplied, they shall be the products of the same supplier; however, all components of the systems furnished hereunder need not be the products of one supplier unless specified herein. To the extent possible, instruments used for similar types of functions and services shall be of the same brand and model line. Similar components of dif-ferent instruments shall be the products of the same supplier to facilitate maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever possible, identical units shall be furnished. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The design of the systems furnished hereunder shall utilize concepts, techniques and features that provide maximum reliability and ease of maintenance and repair. The systems shall include board-level devices such as light emitting diodes or other indicators


to facilitate quick diagnosis and repair. Diagnostic software shall be furnished to facilitate system-level troubleshooting. 2-2.01. Factory Assembly. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, except where its physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make the shipment of completely assembled units impracticable. 2-3. POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT SIGNAL. Power supply to all control system equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. System Supplier shall be responsible for distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the Drawings. Power distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit overcurrent protection installed in accordance with the electrical section. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the instrumentation will be unregulated 120 volts ac. Unless otherwise indicated, all transmitted electronic analog instrument signals shall be 4-20 mA dc and shall be linear with the measured variable. 2-3.01. Facility Distribution System. Equipment not indicated to be powered from an uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations

of ±10 percent and harmonics up to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. System Supplier shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified. 2-3.02. Power Supplies. Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above shall be an integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current limiting, and self-protected. 2-3.03. Surge Withstand. All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability tests as defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment. 2-3.04. Uninterruptible Power Supply. Not used. 2-4. SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. The equipment provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in the attached equipment sections. All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.


2-4.01. Ambient Temperature and Elevation. All system equipment located in air conditioned rooms shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures from 10°C to 35°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located in non air conditioned indoor areas shall be suitable for an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 50°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 95 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located outdoors shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range -20°C to 60°C and a relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. Heaters and air conditioning/cooling equipment shall be provided where essential to maintain equipment within its supplier-recommended operating ranges. 2-4.02. Deleterious Effects. All system equipment will be installed in areas without anti-static floor construction and without any provisions for control of particulates or corrosive gases other than ordinary office-type HVAC filtering. System Supplier shall furnish any additional air cleaning equipment, anti-static chair pads, or other protective measures necessary for proper operation of the system. All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation, all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests. 2-4.03. Noise Level. The equivalent "A" weighted sound level for any system equipment located in the control room, except printers, shall not exceed 35 dBA. The sound level for printers shall not exceed 65 dBA. Sound reduction enclosures shall be provided where necessary to comply with these limits. 2-4.04. Lightning Protection. In addition to other environmental protection specified herein, the entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall include the following. 2-4.04.01. Grounding. All major components of the system shall have a low resistance ground connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the Drawings shall be modified as recommended by System Supplier. 2-4.04.02. Surge Suppressors. Surge and lightning supressors shall be non-faulting, non-interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be solid-state metal oxide varistor (MOV) or silicon junction type, with a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds. Surge protective devices shall be applied for the following:

a. All 120 VAC power connections to RTUs, PLCs, DCUs, instruments and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector "ACP-100-HW Series", Power Integrity Corporation “ZTA Series”,


Phoenix Contact “Mains PlugTrab”, or MCG Surge Protection “400 Series”.

b. All analog signal circuits where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the transmitter and the control system end of the circuit. Surge protection devices shall not impede or interfere with the use of smart transmitter calibration/communication. Protection devices located near the transmitter shall be Telematic “TP48.” Protection devices in control panels shall be Transtector “PDS Series or FSP Series”, Telematic “SD Series”, Phoenix Contact “PipeTrab Series”, or Citel “BP1-24.”

c. All metallic pair (twisted and untwisted) conductor local area network and data highway termination points, where any part of the data highway cable is routed outside of the building envelope. Single-port protective devices shall be Phoenix Contact “PlugTrab Series”, Transtector “FSP” Series”, or Telematic “NP Series.”

2-5. SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION. System Supplier shall furnish complete documentation on all software supplied with the systems specified herein. Operating systems, compilers, assemblers, and utility and diagnostic programs that are standard commercial products of third parties need not be included in the optical media backup. Software documentation shall consist of the following principal items.

a. One backup set of any integrated circuit or solid-state memory-based plug-in firmware used.

b. Two complete back-up copies of system and application software in executable format on optical media compatible with the system furnished.

c. Three sets of user reference manuals for all standard system and application software.

d. One set of user reference manuals for all operating system software.

e. Three sets of printed as-built reference documentation for any special software provided specifically for this contract.

f. For each licensed software product, all documentation provided by the product supplier shall be provided. This includes all reference manuals and any other documents that were provided by the supplier. One set of this documentation shall be supplied for each and every piece of equipment provided. Multiple pieces of similar equipment or software require multiple copies of this documentation.

2-6. SOFTWARE LICENSE. All software programs supplied as a standard part of System Supplier’s products for this project shall be licensed to Owner for use


on the system specified herein. Such license shall not restrict Owner from using the software on the system provided hereunder or its replacement. Owner shall have the right to make copies of the software for use on the system provided. Specific requirements of System Supplier’s software license are subject to review and approval by Owner and Design Engineer. 2-7. INSTALLATION TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary testing equipment for calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier. System Supplier shall also furnish calibration and maintenance records for all testing and calibration equipment used on the site if requested by Design Engineer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder shall be by the Contractor or their assigned subcontractors. 3-1.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the electrical section. 3-1.02. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings. All outdoor instrumentation shall be protected from direct sun exposure. Instruments shall be placed in locations to limit south and west sun exposure. Sunshades shall be provided on instruments that are subject to the direct sun exposure. Sunshades shall be located so the opening faces north or east where possible. Sunshades shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. 3-1.03. Salvage of Existing Equipment. Existing equipment and materials removed or replaced under this contract shall be delivered to Owner at a location designated by Owner, or shall be properly disposed of at Owner’s discretion. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment delivered to Owner. Any mounting brackets, enclosures, stilling wells, piping, conduits, wiring, or openings that remain after removal of equipment and support hardware shall be removed or repaired in a manner acceptable to Owner and Design Engineer. Transmitters or switches containing mercury shall be removed and disposed of by personnel trained in the handling of hazardous materials and using approved procedures. 3-2. SYSTEM SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION. System software shall be configured by the System Supplier. Configuration services shall consist of modifying the system database, report formats, operator interface graphic and


tabular display screen formats, and programming of control units to provide a fully functioning system. The System Supplier shall fully configure the system using data provided herein or supplied by the Design Engineer and/or the Owner after award of the contract. 3-2.01. Control System Database. The control system database shall be modified by the System Supplier. The System Supplier shall enter information obtainable from the Contract Documents into the database prior to soliciting input from the Design Engineer and the Owner. The System Supplier shall determine the need for any "pseudo" database points and shall ascertain and enter all information needed to define these points. The System Supplier is responsible for entering all information associated with each point. This includes but is not limited to, descriptions, engineering units, associated displays, areas, security, etc. All fields associated with each database point must be completely filled out accurately. 3-2.02. Graphic Screen Displays. The System Supplier shall be responsible for modifying the custom graphic displays. Each piece of major process equipment, associated with this project and consisting of the Bar Screens and Washer/Compactor, that is monitored by the control system shall be displayed on one or more graphic screen. Graphic screens shall be representations of the equipment and piping. The screens must accurately show all devices and equipment that is part of the control loops. These items must be done in accordance to the Configuration Standards and Conventions as described later in this section. Alarm and/or event displays shall also be provided and proven functional prior to acceptance of the system. A means of capturing and printing of all graphic screens shall also be included. The software program provided must be capable of printing the screen in a black and white (using gray scale) or color format. This program must be accessible from all terminals provided under this contract. The black and white printing shall be done in a manner in which the use of the black background is not represented in the printout. This is done to keep the utilization of ink cartridge and toner cartridge to a minimum. All graphic screens shall be animated to indicate the current state of the piece of equipment. The following graphic screens shall be provided, as a minimum.

• Alarm Summary

• Event Summary

• Overview of each major process area (with vectoring to sub-areas)

• Summary screen to vector to all video trends A minimum of 2 custom graphic displays at each plant shall be provided by the System Supplier. 3-2.03. Report Formats. Not used.


3-2.04. Configuration Standards and Conventions. The System Supplier shall meet with the Design Engineer and/or Owner to review any of the Owner’s existing standards and conventions. A “Software Configuration Standards and Conventions” document shall be prepared and submitted by the System Supplier. The document shall be submitted for review and approval before software configuration commences. The document shall describe and define such items as proposed graphic display process line colors/representations; symbology; color standards for “on”, “off”, “opened”, “closed”, and “alarm” conditions; alarm handling conventions; how items will be selected for control; methods for navigation between displays; address usage/naming conventions; and security setup. All copies of this submittal shall be provided in color to insure the accuracy of each item. No black and white copies will be accepted. The colors used in the printed submittal shall accurately depict the colors and shapes proposed for use on the final system. 3-2.05. Configuration Review Meetings. Proposed graphic screens and report formats shall be reviewed with the Owner and Design Engineer throughout the configuration process. The System Supplier’s programming personnel shall attend the initial review meeting. A second review meeting shall be held at approximately 50 percent completion. Both meetings shall be held at the Owner’s facilities. 3-2.06. Software Functional Requirements. General functional requirements for system configuration are indicated on the Drawings and described in the technical specifications. The information presented herein and indicated on the Drawings illustrates the general functional intent of the system, and may not be sufficient to fully configure the system. The System Supplier shall be responsible for determining what additional information may be required to complete the configuration tasks, and for obtaining this information from the Design Engineer or the Owner. 3-3. SYSTEMS CHECK. Not used. 3-4. TESTING. The system shall be acceptance tested on site. System Supplier shall prepare a testing procedure to be approved by Owner and Design Engineer that shall demonstrate that the system conforms to the technical specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of testing. The testing shall be conducted on site by System Supplier and witnessed by Owner and/or Design Engineer. System Supplier shall notify Design Engineer and Owner in writing at least 14 days before the proposed testing date. 3-4.01. Factory Acceptance Testing. Not used.


3-4.02. Site Acceptance Testing. After installation and checkout by System Supplier’s personnel, the system shall be subjected to an acceptance test. Site acceptance testing shall be scheduled after receipt of the System Check Out Report and System Supplier shall verify that all field signal changes are reflected in the proper address locations in the system database. The site acceptance testing shall operate without loss of basic functions. The number of working days of continuous operation for the test shall be 7 days. The operational demonstration shall confirm that the status, alarm, and process variable signals are valid and are being updated appropriately, and that the discrete and analog output signals from the control system are being correctly transmitted and implemented. Any errors or abnormal occurrences shall be recorded by System Supplier’s field representative. System Supplier’s field representative need not be continuously present during the site acceptance testing, but shall be available to respond to the site within one hour of notification. The representative shall inspect the system for faults at least once every 24 hours and shall log or record any noted problems. The log shall include a description of the problem, its apparent cause, and any corrective action taken. 3-4.02.01. Failure of Redundant Equipment. Failure of redundant equipment shall not be considered downtime provided that automatic failover occurs as specified and, in the opinion of Design Engineer, the failure was not caused by deficiency in design or installation. In the event of repeated failure of any hardware component or software module, the acceptance test shall be terminated and re-started. 3-4.02.02. Completion of Test. Successful completion of the site acceptance test, including the operational demonstration, is prerequisite to Substantial Completion as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. 3-5. TRAINING. System Supplier shall conduct training courses for personnel selected by Owner. Training shall be provided for operator on the new bar screen and washer/compactor HMI graphics. Training shall be conducted by experienced instructors who are familiar with the specific system supplied. 3-5.01. Training Costs. All costs associated with the training program; excluding travel, lodging, and per diem expenses for Owner’s and Design Engineer’s personnel to attend off-site training programs; shall be the responsibility of System Supplier and shall be included in the contract price. 3-5.02. Lessons. Training lesson plans and other information for the second stage submittal as defined herein shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the start of training.


3-5.01.03. Video Recording. Not used. 3-5.02. Instrument Training. Not used. 3-5.03. Control System Maintenance Training. Not used. 3-5.04. Operator Training. Not used. 3-5.05. Programmer Training (HMI Software). Not used. 3-5.06. Programmer Training (PLC Software). Not used.

3-5.07. Network Training. Not used.

3-5.08. Supplemental Training. Not used.

End of Section

INSTRUMENT NAME & SERVICE:

BRAND & MODEL NO.:

TAG OR LOOP NO.:

INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE:

INPUT

ACTUAL OUTPUT

DESIRED OUTPUT

PROPORTIONAL BAND:

RESET:

POSITION OF SWITCHES, JUMPERS, ETC.

COMMENTS:

DATE OF CALIBRATION: CALIBRATED BY:

Black & Veatch INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT

Figure 1-13500


Section STS13550

SOFTWARE CONTROL BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section provides functional descriptions of the PLC and computer software requirements for the Instrumentation and Control System as indicated on the Drawings. These descriptions are intended to provide an overview of the operating concept of the plant process equipment rather than describing in detail every operating feature or interlock. 1-1.01. Control System. The Instrumentation and Control System section shall apply to all systems described in this section. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. The descriptions are applicable to the wastewater treatment plant’s existing software . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. PLC PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. The following paragraphs describe general configuration tasks that are required for the system PLC(s). These tasks shall be programmed in any applicable PLC. Each PLC may have multiple instances of each of these tasks, or may have no instances of some or all of these tasks. The input/output lists (located in these documents as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section) and detailed equipment control descriptions (included herein) shall be referenced to determine the requirements for each PLC. The following paragraphs cover functional requirements of the software, which are generic and may or may not be related to any specific control loop. 3-1.01. Available Process Values. All PLC-generated process alarm, equipment status, and process variable values shall be available at any operator workstation. 3-1.02. Flow Values. Not used. 3-1.03. System Failure. Failure of a PLC shall result in safe shutdown of associated process equipment. Interposing relays shall be provided where


required to assure that equipment will revert to its fail-safe condition. Failure of any PLC or its communication shall be alarmed on the HMI computer. 3-1.04. HMI Computers. The HMI computers shall function as a monitoring system, not as a controller, for the process equipment. The computer shall download set points and other information to the PLCs, and the PLCs shall perform all control algorithms, so a temporary failure of the any HMI computer will not disrupt plant control. 3-1.05. Rack/Module Configuration. The rack and module definitions for each PLC, as well as the PLC communications configuration shall be completely configured to allow proper addressing of all field connected I/O points. This shall include configuration of any remote input/output (RIO) racks. 3-1.06. PLC Database Definition. The PLC database will include both field I/O points and internally generated points required for programming. All field I/O points and internal programming points shall be fully defined according to database naming conventions approved by Owner. As a minimum, each database point shall be provided with a tag name, engineering unit, alarm parameters, and description. 3-1.07. Analog Scaling. Each analog input and output will be appropriately scaled for use in internal PLC programming, monitoring by the HMI computers, or transmission to other PLCs. Requirements for raw count values shall be coordinated with the operator interface software to ensure compatibility. 3-1.08. Equipment Runtimes. For each equipment item whose "run" status is monitored by a PLC, an internal equipment runtime shall be accumulated by the respective PLC. The runtime procedure will monitor the status of the equipment "run" contact and, when the equipment is running, increment a software timer that maintains equipment runtime to within a one-minute resolution. The timer shall stop incrementing, but not reset, when the "run" contact indicates that the equipment is not running. The timer value shall increment an hour counter that maintains an integer value representing the equipment run time in hours. The counter value shall be available for display on the HMI computer. A manual reset of the runtime value shall be available at the HMI computers for personnel at the supervisor level and above. 3-1.09. Change-of-State Alarms. While equipment is controllable from the PLC ("in remote"), discrete output commands shall be compared to their respective process feedback status signal (where available) to verify proper execution. If the feedback status does not match the most recent output command (after an adjustable 2 to 300 second time delay), an alarm message shall be displayed on the HMI computer and the condition shall be logged as an alarm, requiring operator acknowledgment. The alarm shall remain energized until the proper


discrete condition is sensed or until the operator resets the alarm through the HMI computer. 3-1.10. Equipment Availability. In general, equipment with PLC control has been provided with a local selector switch that transfers control to the PLC. The PLC shall monitor the position of this switch to determine if the equipment is available for PLC control. If the equipment is not available, the PLC program shall not attempt to implement remote manual or automatic status changes for the equipment. The PLC program may, however, need to implement special routines if equipment unavailability affects a sequence (as described in the detailed equipment descriptions). 3-1.11. Maintained/Momentary Outputs. Not used. 3-1.12. Equipment Mode Changes. Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment control descriptions, equipment in automatic mode shall be transitioned to manual mode (and stopped) if the equipment fails or becomes unavailable or if the PLC processor resets. 3-1.13. Manual/Auto Bumpless Transfer. Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment control descriptions, equipment changes from automatic to manual control shall be bumpless. Equipment running or stopped in automatic mode shall remain running or stopped when manual mode is selected. 3-2. HMI FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. The following paragraphs describe general configuration tasks that are required for the HMI and related software. The Owners current HMI standard and conventions shall be matched for new equipment integrated in to the plant SCADA system. After the project has been awarded the contractor shall request from the Owner a copy of the latest SCADA standards and conventions. 3-2.01. Database. The system database, including field I/O and internal points shall be established according to the database point naming conventions approved by Owner. Database generation for field I/O shall include all required coordination with PLC level addresses. If no Owner database point naming conventions are available, the database names shall utilize an ISA or ISA-like tag name. In the default scheme, the format of the tag name is XXX-YYY-ZA. XXX is the ISA function designation. YYY-ZA is the unique loop designation defined by the P&IDs. Where possible YYY-ZA will correspond to the loop numbers on the P&IDs. Otherwise, a unique number shall be assigned. Z is a number (1, 2, 3) to designate similar loops associated with trains of equipment. A is a letter (A, B,


C) to designate identical functions within the same loop. For instance, if there are two ferric sulfate metering pumps and the loop number chosen is 222, the remote status input for pump number one might be HS-222-1 and the remote status input for pump number two might be HS-222-2. If there is more than one switch input for either pump the tag name would be HS-222-1A and the second switch would be HS-222-1B. Function designations currently defined are listed below: AI's (Analog Inputs) AIT - Analytical Input PDIT - Differential Pressure Input

(Headloss)

EIT - Voltage Input PIT - Pressure Input

EIIT - VAR Input ST - Speed or Rate Input

FIT - Flow Input TIT- Temperature Input

IIT - Current Input WIT - Weight Input

JIT - Power Input ZT - Position Input

LIT - Level Input AO's AC - Residual Proportioning Control SC - Speed or Rate Control

FC - Flow Proportioning Control ZC - Position Control DI's AAH - Analytical Alarm High PDSH - High Differential Status

AAL - Analytical Alarm Low PS - Pressure Alarm Hi/Lo or Unspecified

FSH - High Flow Status PSL - Low Pressure Status

FSL - Low Flow Status PSLL - Low Pressure Cutoff Alarm

HS - Hand Switch Status WAL - Low Weight Alarm

JA - Electrical Alarm XA - General or Unspecified Alarm

LSH - High Level Status YA - Equipment Overload Alarm (Failure)

LSHH - High Water Cutoff Alarm YS - Equipment Run Status

LSL - Low Level Status ZSC - Position Closed Status

LSLL - Low Water Cutoff Alarm ZSO - Position Open Status


DO's LC - PLC Generated LWCO Output ZCC - Equipment Close Command

XC - General Control Output ZCO - Equipment Open Command

YC - Equipment Start/Stop Command

Initially, the facility database shall be configured so all database points are defined as belonging to a specific area (as allowed by the graphical interface software). The areas designated for the facility shall be coordinated with Owner. If Owner has no existing standards for area designations, all points can be placed in appropriate areas selected by System Supplier. 3-2.02. Trend Displays. Trend displays shall be developed to present real-time and historical process data in an X-Y graph format. Real-time trends shall utilize current process values to generate temporary graphs that do not retain data values. Historical trends shall utilize historically collected data and shall access the data files directly for use in the trend display. Historical trends shall allow paging forward and back to the limits of the collected data. The trending package shall be configured to automatically retrieve historical data from the proper data file to accommodate the paging functions. Content of the trends will be determined after meeting with Owner. One real-time trend displays and one historical trend displays shall be provided at each wastewater treatment plant. 3-2.03. Alarms. Complete system alarming shall be configured. This shall include configuration of graphical alarm displays, and configuration of audible alarms through the HMI speakers. All process or system alarms shall appear on an alarm summary screen and the alarm banner of each process graphic. Alarms and events shall be color coded on the alarm summary screen, with initial colors based on Owner conventions or the default colors associated with the graphics package. The colors may be adjusted after meeting with Owner. Alarm prioritizing and area assignments (if any) shall be coordinated with Owner at the first configuration meeting. For LOW or LOW-LOW analog or discrete alarms which do not apply if associated equipment is not operating, provisions shall be made to prevent/Lock generation of the alarm unless the associated equipment is operating. This shall include alarms such as low amperage alarms for pumps that are not running. This may also include low flows or pressures when associated pumps are not operating (this will only apply if periodic operation of the equipment is considered normal).


All alarms/events shall be time stamped when displayed or printed. Unacknowledged alarms shall not automatically clear from the alarm summary if they return to normal before being acknowledged. 3-2.04. Reporting. Not used. 3-2.05. Historical Data Collection. System data shall be collected for historical archiving and for use in trending and reporting functions. Requirements for data collection shall be as needed to support the trends and reports developed. 3-2.06. Manual Entry of Data. The human machine interface (HMI) computers shall allow manual entry of laboratory data and other variables, which shall then be available for display and use in reports. Operator entered commands from any of the HMI computers shall be logged at all HMI computers. 3-3. EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND CONTROL MODE OVERVIEW. The following paragraphs explain the general format and control modes that are used in the detailed equipment descriptions. These paragraphs apply to the attached, project specific, equipment control descriptions included herein. 3-3.01. General. Appended to this section are the equipment control programming requirements, with requirements for both PLC programming and the minimum operator interface functions. The HMI requirements represent the anticipated display generation requirements and shall be adjusted if the PLC programming warrants adjustment. 3-3.02. Control Modes. There are two general control modes available for the process equipment: 1) remote manual, and 2) remote auto. Remote manual control provides a means for operators to adjust equipment status or setpoint, through the HMI, using manually initiated commands. Remote automatic control provides a means for automatically changing equipment status or setpoint based on measured process parameters, calculated values, or operator setpoints. Some equipment may have more than one remote auto mode. Descriptions for local control are included in the detailed equipment control descriptions. They are provided primarily for documentation purposes and for information. These controls are hardwired and require no programming effort. 3-4. DETAILED EQUIPMENT CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS. The following paragraphs describe specific function requirements for various software control blocks in the control system. These descriptions are intended to provide an overview of the operational concept for the facilities, rather than describing in detail every operating feature or interlock.


Loop Description Title Mechanically Cleaned Bar Screen / Washer Compactor

Associated Equipment Lucas Bar Screen #1, Lucas Bar Screen #2 Lucas Washer/Compactor #1, Lucas Washer/Compactor #2 DLIT-001, DLIT-002

North Regional Bar Screen #1, North Regional Bar Screen #2 North Regional Washer/Compactor #1, North Regional Washer/Compactor #2 DLIT-003, DLIT-004

Associated PLC Lucas Bar Screen No. 1 PLC Lucas Bar Screen No. 2 PLC, North Regional Bar Screen No. 1 PLC North Regional Bar Screen No. 2 PLC

Associated P&ID PID-01 PID-02

Local Manual Mode Local Manual control of the bar screen shall be provided through the bar screen control panel. When the HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) switch at the bar screen is in the HAND position, the screen rake shall be controlled by momentary FORWARD and REVERSE push buttons at the screen.

Local Auto Mode Local automatic control of the bar screen shall be provided through the bar screen control panel. When the HAND-OFF-AUTO (H-O-A) switch at the bar screen is in the AUTO position, the screen shall be controlled to rake when differential level across the screen increases and the high differential level switch trips, or based on a panel mounted 24 hour programmed timer. When either initiating condition occurs, the bar screen control panel shall send a start signal to the screenings compactor to start. The bar screen shall be interlocked to start when an initiating condition occurs and the screenings conveyor is running. The bar screen control panel shall control the raking operation and bring the rake back to the home position. When the raking action is complete, the bar screen control panel shall send a shut down signal to the screenings conveyor. If the screenings conveyor stops while the bar screen is running, the bar screen shall complete the cleaning cycle, then stop. See the mechanically cleaned bar screen technical specification for further detail.

Remote Manual Mode None

Remote Auto Mode None


Alarms The PLC shall receive the following alarms signals from the bar screen / washer compactor control panel:

• Bar Screen Fail signal which includes motor overload and over torque

• Bar Screen VFD Fault

• Bar Screen Emergency Stop

• Washer Compactor Fail signal which includes motor overload and over torque

• Channel High Water Level Alarm

Status Indication The HMI shall indicate the following bar screen status: Bar Screen –

• In-Auto

• Bar Screen Running Forward

• Bar Screen Running in Reverse

• Bar Screen Running High Speed

• Bar Screen Fault

• Bar Screen VFD Fault

• Differential Level Washer Compactor –

• In-Auto

• Washer Compactor Running

• Washer Compactor Fault

• Washer Compactor Spray Wash In-Auto Miscelaneous –

• On UPS Power

PLC Powerup N/A

Power Failure N/A

HMI Requirements The bar screen and washer compactor shall be depicted on the existing bar screen display. The display layout shall be similar to the existing HMI screen and shall be adjusted to accommodate the alarms and status for new equipment.

Calculations None

Data Mapping None

End of Section


Section STS13591

METALLIC AND FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION CABLE AND CONNECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. The Network Cable section covers the furnishing and installation of cable systems to provide communications for the bar screen and washer/compactor local control panel to the SCADA System as indicated on the Drawings. Accessories and appurtenances shall be provided as specified herein to provide a complete and properly operating system. Equipment and services provided under this section shall be subject to the General Computer Control System Requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control System Section and coordination with the bars screen supplier and section 11312 . Supplementing the Network Cable section, network data, special requirements, and options are indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall be made as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section.

1-2.01. Qualifications. The name, address and telephone number of the proposed contractor or subcontractor, including specific personnel to perform the work shall be included with the submittals. Provide the experience record of the subcontractor and personnel in performing work similar to that specified. Include the agency, contact person, and telephone number of at least three (3) previous network installation projects completed by the proposed subcontractor. The Design Engineer shall review and approve the network installation subcontractor and personnel prior to any of the related work being performed. This review will be conducted during the project submittal phase, as described below. 1-2.02. Drawings and Data. All material and equipment documentation shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals section. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment. Product data shall include the following in the Submittals section:

a. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed fiber optic cable, and fiber optic cable accessories (pigtails, connectors, etc.)

b. Supplier technical specifications and data that clearly shows that the fiber optic cable meets all requirement specified herein.


c. Sample of the proposed cable.

d. Physical dimension drawings of all fiber optic accessories.

e. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling.

f. Provide off-line maintenance aids and on-line diagnostics to check the performance of the communication links and interfaces of devices on the data highway.

g. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL).

h. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation testing or maintenance.

1-2.03. Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have the following items included in addition to those items specified in other sections:

a. Description of all components.

b. Methods of connection.

c. Connection diagram.

d. OTDR trace plots for all fibers. 1-3. SHIPMENT, PROTECTION, AND STORAGE. Equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, protected, and stored in accordance with the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control System section.

1-4. QUALIFICATIONS. Due to the specialized nature of installing, splicing, terminating, and testing optical fiber cable, the Contractor shall utilize personnel who are experienced in such practices. The installing Contractor or Subcontractor shall have performed similar installation and testing work on at least three projects of similar size and complexity. The personnel assigned to the installation and testing shall also have experience on at least three projects of similar size and complexity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. All fiber optic cable, fiber optic hardware and accessories shall be designed, assembled and connected in accordance with the requirements of these Technical Specifications and the Drawings. 2-2. ETHERNET UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE. Ethernet cables and connectors shall be provided for a complete and working system, and/or as shown on the Drawings. Cable for Ethernet wiring shall be UTP Cat-5e or Cat-6 cable. Cable shall be Cat-5e for network speeds up to 100 MHz, and


Cat-6 for network speeds greater than 100 MHz. Jacket color coding for cables shall be as follows:

a. Standard Cat-5e PLC Networks. Blue

b. Standard Cat-5e Enterprise Networks. White

c. Standard Cat-6. Yellow

d. Crossover cables. Red Cable shall meet the following characteristics: 2-2.01. Category 5e UTP Cable. Not used. 2-2.02. Category 6 UTP Cable. Not used. 2-2.03. Ethernet Patch Cables. Pre-wired and terminated patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and lever protecting boot shall be furnished for all connections to computers, network equipment, and controller equipment except where physical conditions (i.e. length over 12 ft. or conduit size) require unterminated wire to be installed. Patch cables shall be Cat-5e for networks speeds up to 100 MHz, and Cat-6 for networks speeds greater than 100 MHz and shall meet the requirements of Cat-5e and Cat-6 cable specified in this section. Straight through cables shall be wired using the T568-B standard for both connectors as shown in section 3-1.01. Crossover cables shall be wired using the T568-A standard for one connector and the T568-B standard for the opposite end. 2-3. FIBER OPTIC CABLE. The fiber optic cable must meet all of the requirements of the following paragraphs.

a. The fiber optic cable must meet the following requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) Section 770.

b. Riser Applications – Applicable Flame Test UL 1666.

c. Finished cables shall conform to the applicable performance requirements of Table 8-6 and 8-7 in the Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA) Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable (ICEA S-83-596).

d. Every fiber in the cable must be usable and meet required technical specifications.

e. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this technical specification.

f. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design.


g. All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber supplier at a minimum load of 100 kpsi.

h. All optical fibers shall be 100 percent attenuation tested. The attenuation shall be measured at 850 nm, and 1300 nm for multimode fibers. The attenuation shall be measured at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fibers. The supplier shall store these values for a minimum of 5 years. These values shall be available upon request.

i. The storage temperature range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be –40oC to +70oC. The operating temperature range shall be –40oC to +70oC. Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3.

j. The attenuation technical specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber at 23 + 5OC.

k. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at 850 nm/1300 nm (multimode) in any one kilometer length of fiber.

l. Required Fiber Grade: Maximum Fiber Attenuation at 850 nm shall be 3.5 dB/km.

m. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be 3.0 mm.

n. The cable shall contain 24 fibers. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers.

o. The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube. p. Each fiber shall be distinguishable from others by means of color

coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.”

q. The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks. r. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall also be color coded with distinct

and recognizable colors in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.”

s. In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable during temperature cycling and not subject to fading or smearing onto each other. Colors shall not cause fibers to stick together.

t. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to kinking. u. The cable jacket color shall be black. v. Fibers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable

cross-section where needed. Fibers shall be placed so that they do not interrupt the consecutive positions of the buffer tubes. In dual layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in the inner layer. Fillers shall be nominally 3.0 nm in outer diameter.

w. The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections. The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness; jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable. The jacket shall be smooth, as consistent with the best commercial practice. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible,


protective coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal installation and service.

x. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the supplier’s name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length markings every two feet (e.g. “62.5/125 MICRON – TYPE OFNR – (UL) 00001 Feet”). The print color shall be white.

y. The cable shall be all-dielectric. z. The cable shall be gel-free.

aa. Flammability – All cables shall comply with the requirements of the 1996 NEC Article 770. All cables shall pass UL 1666.

Fiber optic cable shall be as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems, Belden, Commscope, TE Connectivity, or equal. 2-3.01. Multimode Fiber. Multimode fiber shall be either 62.5/125µm core diameter. 62.5 µm core diameter multimode fiber optic cable shall meet the following requirements:

a. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, “Detail Technical Specification for 62.5 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers.”

b. Core diameter: 62.5 + 3.0 micrometers.

c. Cladding diameter: 125.0 + 2.0 micrometers.

d. Core-to-Cladding Offset: < 3.0 micrometers.

e. Cladding non-circularity: < 2.0%. Defined as: [1-(min. cladding dia. + max. cladding dia.)] X 100.

f. Core non-circularity: < 6.0%. Defined as: [1-(min. core dia. + max. core dia.)] X 100.

g. Coating Diameter: 245 + 10 micrometers.

h. Graded index.

i. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 + 0.015.

j. Attenuation Uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at either 850 nm or 1300 nm.

k. Minimum Bandwidth Requirement shall be 160/500 MHz-km at 850/1300 nm.

2-3.02. Singlemode Fiber. Not used.


2-3.03. Fiber optic cable connectors. All optical fibers shall be terminated with connectors that are type ST for multimode cable and type SC for singlemode cable. 2-3.03.01. Epoxy Connectors. Epoxy connectors shall be provided to terminate each fiber in the cable. Connector style, ST, SC, or other, shall be coordinated with the patch panels and field devices that will interface directly with the cable. Connectors shall be compatible with the supplied cable. Connector loss shall be no greater than 0.3 dB. Loss measurement shall be performed at the time of splicing and documentation shall be furnished for each termination. Connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems Connectors, or equal. 2-3.03.02. Crimp Style Connectors. Crimp style connectors shall be provided to terminate each fiber in the cable. Connector style, ST, SC, or other, shall be coordinated with the patch panels. Connector loss shall be no greater than 0.3 dB. Connectors shall not require epoxy or polishing. Loss measurement shall be performed at the time of splicing and documentation shall be furnished for each termination. Connectors shall be Corning Cable Systems UniCam Connectors, or equal. 2-3.04. Fiber Optic Jumper Cables. Fiber optic jumper cables shall be furnished and installed for equipment interfacing and between termination cabinets. The jumpers shall meet the following requirements:

a. The jumpers shall be 62.5/ 125 microns, multimode for operation at 1300 nm. They shall be tight-buffered and be protected by Kevlar-type strength material.

b. The jumpers shall be supplied with connectors on each end. Connector types (ST, SC, LC, etc.) shall be matched to the equipment provided. Jumpers shall be sized to provide a single connection between the fiber optic hardware being connected.

2-4. PLC COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA. Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. The System Supplier shall be responsible for the coordination of the installation of all cable furnished hereunder. The System Supplier shall be responsible for the termination of all cable furnished hereunder. 3-1.01. Cable Damage. If the cable becomes damaged during installation, the Contractor shall stop work and notify the Design Engineer immediately. The Owner and Design Engineer will decide whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the damaged section. If the Owner decides to


replace the entire reel of cable, the Contractor shall begin the installation at the last designated splice point. The damaged cable between these points shall be removed, coiled, tagged, and given to the Owner. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or contract completion time. In addition to installation of the new cable, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the entire cost of the replacement reel of cable. This cost will be withheld from the contract price. If the Owner decides to install a splice at the damaged point, and the cable is damaged a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequent damaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels at the Contractor’s expense.

3-1.02. Ethernet Cable Installation. Not used. 3-1.03. Fiber Optic Cable Installation. The cable supplier shall provide installation procedures and technical support concerning the items contained in this technical specification. Fiber optic cable installation shall meet the following requirements:

a. All fiber optic cable shall be installed, terminated, and tested by the System Supplier or his fiber subcontractor as specified above.

b. In pulling the cable, strain-release, or other tension limiting devices shall be used to limit the pull tension to less than 600 lbs.

c. Minimum bend radius restrictions shall be satisfied both during and after cable installation.

d. Horizontal, unsupported cable runs shall be supported at continuous distances of 5 feet or less.

e. All conduit and cabinet entrances shall be sealed with RTV or other re-enterable sealant material to prevent ingress of water, dust or other foreign materials.

f. Cable routing within occupied office areas shall conform to Federal, State, and local electrical and fire codes.

g. Any non-terminating (field) splices shall be documented as to the physical location and cable meter mark (prior to stripping). Field splices shall be OTDR-tested and documented prior to final cable acceptance testing.

h. Fiber optic cables shall be installed in accordance with NECA 301-2004, Installing And Testing Fiber Optic Cables.

3-2. CABLE TESTING. After the network cabling has been installed, each network cable shall be tested. 3-2.01. Test Equipment. Unless specified otherwise, all test equipment for the calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System


Supplier for the duration of the testing work and this test equipment will remain the property of System Supplier. 3-2.02. Ethernet UTP Cable Testing. The System Supplier shall utilize the previously specified test equipment, and additional tools as needed to validate the Ethernet UTP cable installation. All test equipment shall bear current calibration certification from a certified calibration laboratory, as appropriate. Each cable shall be tested for open pairs, shorted pairs, crossed pairs, reversed pairs and split pairs. A check off sheet shall be utilized, shall be signed by the technician testing the cables, and shall be submitted for approval. Any identified faults shall be corrected at no additional cost. 3-2.03. Fiber Optic Cable Testing. Acceptance testing of the data highway (fiber and electronic equipment) shall be conducted as a part of integrated system field testing, as specified elsewhere. Prior to such tests, however, the fiber optic cable shall be tested as specified herein. The System Supplier, or his fiber subcontractor, shall conduct fiber optic cable testing as specified below. All testing following field installation shall be witnessed by the Design Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the cost for field witnessed testing in accordance with Section 01610, General Equipment Stipulations. A test plan shall be submitted prior to the proposed test dates. The test plan and procedures shall be mutually agreed to prior to conducting the tests. Each optical fiber of each fiber optic cable shall be OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) tested on the reel at the factory, on the reel upon arrival at the jobsite, and after installation and termination. For each fiber, an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) trace soft/hardcopy is required to be provided to the Owner and Design Engineer. OTDR traces shall be provided for each test (at the factory, on the reel at the job-site, and after installation). A 100 foot launch cable shall be spliced to each fiber for each fiber OTDR test, to ensure accurate results. This end-to-end trace shall be performed from BOTH ends of the fiber. Also for each fiber, an end-to-end power attenuation (insertion loss) test shall be performed. The attenuation test shall use a stabilized optical source and an optical power meter calibrated to the appropriate operating wavelength (1300 nm). For each installed fiber, the power attenuation shall not exceed the following, tested from connector to connector at the respective patch panels:

(0.0035)L + (0.25)N + 3.0 dB Where L = The length of the fiber optic cable in meters and N = the number of splices in the fiber.


Any fiber optic cables containing one or more fibers not meeting this performance will not be accepted by the Owner, and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost.

Each fiber optic jumper cable shall be tested and must exhibit an end-to-end attenuation of less than 2.0 dB at 1300 nm. Any jumper exceeding this level shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. Any damaged cable still on the reel shall be returned to the supplier for replacement at no additional cost to the Owner. All fiber cable testing shall be documented on pre-approved test forms. Three (3) copies of all documentation (including OTDR traces) shall be submitted to the Design Engineer upon successful completion of the testing.

End of Section


Section STS15010

VALVE INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of new valves and actuators purchased by Contractor as part of this Work or purchased by others under the valve technical specifications. The equipment to be furnished by others for installation by Contractor is identified in the applicable valve schedules. Cleaning, disinfection, pressure and leakage testing, insulation, and pipe supports are covered in other sections. The following technical specification sections are applicable to valves to be installed: Title Solenoid Valves

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. Any valves and actuators that are identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are available.

1-2.01. Coordination. When supplier's field services or installation check services are provided by the valve supplier, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the valve supplier. Contractor shall give Design Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for supplier's field services. Submittals for equipment that will be furnished by others under each procurement contract will be furnished to Contractor upon completion of review by Design Engineer. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria. Flanged, push-on, and grooved connections to valves including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the appropriate pipe technical specification section. Valve ends shall match piping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. All valves and accessories shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and re-cleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. 3-2. INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. General. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for proper operation of any external mechanisms, and with sufficient clearance to dismantle the valve for in-place maintenance. Installation shall be in accordance with the valve supplier’s recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, all valves installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches [1.3 m] or less above the finish floor shall be installed with their operating stems vertical. Valves installed in horizontal runs of piping having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches [1.3 m] and 6 feet 9 inches [2 m] above the finish floor shall be installed with their operating stems horizontal. If adjacent piping prohibits this, the stems and operating handwheel shall be installed above the valve horizontal centerline as close to horizontal as possible. Valves installed in vertical runs of pipe shall have their operating stems oriented to facilitate the most practicable operation, as reviewed by Design Engineer. 3-2.02. Installation Checks. When specified in the valve sections, the valve supplier will provide installation checks. For installation checks, the supplier’s field representative will inspect the valve installation immediately following installation by Contractor. The supplier's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation satisfactory to Owner. Contractor shall perform no work related to the installation or operation of materials or equipment furnished by others without direct observation and guidance of the field representative, unless Design Engineer and supplier furnishing such materials concur otherwise. 3-2.03. AWWA Butterfly Valves. Not used.


3-2.04. Check Valves. Not used. 3-2.05. Plug Valves. Not used. 3-2.06. Resilient Seated Gate Valves. Not used. 3-2.07. Air Release and Combination Air Valves. Not used. 3-2.08. Hydrants. Not used. 3-2.09. Valve Boxes. Not used. 3-3. VALVE ACTUATORS. Valve actuators and accessories shall be factory mounted on the valve, calibrated, and tested by the valve or actuator supplier. 3-4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3.4.01. Field Testing. After installation, all valves shall be tested in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-4.01.01. Pressure Tests. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-4.01.02. Leakage Tests. All valves shall be free from leaks. Each leak that is discovered during associated piping pressure testing and warranty period shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor. 3-5. ADJUSTING. After installation, the opening and closing time shall be adjusted as needed for each pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuated valve.

End of Section


Section STS15020

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of piping and accessories as indicated on the Drawings for the following piping sections:

Section Title

Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

Contractor shall furnish all necessary jointing materials, coatings, and accessories that are specified herein. Pipe supports and anchors shall be furnished by Contractor, and are covered in the Pipe Supports section. Pipe trenching and backfilling are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Coordination. Materials installed under this section shall be installed in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete technical specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Items requiring submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

Materials as specified herein.

1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Not Used. 1-4.02. Tolerances. These tolerances apply to in-line items and connections for other lines. The general dimension, such as face-to-face, face or end-to-end, face- or end-to center, and center-to-center shall be 1/8 inch [3 mm].


The inclination of flange face from true in any direction shall not exceed 3/64 inch per foot [4 mm per meter]. Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16 inch [1.5 mm]. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with the Delivery Storage and Handling section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F [4°C and 32°C]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pipe, tubing, and fittings covered herein shall be installed in the services indicated in the various pipe sections. 2-2. MATERIALS.

Threaded Fittings

Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant

Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special", or Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize".

Solvent Welded Fittings

Solvent cement for PVC Systems

ASTM D2564.

Primer for PVC Systems ASTM F656.

Insulating Fittings

Threaded Dielectric steel pipe nipple, ASTM A53, Schedule 40, polypropylene lined, zinc plated; Perfection Corp. "Clearflow Fittings".

Flanged Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions" or Central Plastics "Insulating Flange Unions".

Pipe Insulation See Mechanical Insulation section


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. All piping components shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and recleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. 3-2. PREPARATION. 3-2.01. Field Measurement. Pipe shall be cut to measurements taken at the site, not from the Drawings. All necessary provisions shall be made in laying out piping to allow for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact with building construction to avoid transmission of noise resulting from expansion. 3-3. INSTALLATION. 3-3.01. General. All instruments and specialty items shall be installed according to the supplier’s instructions and with sufficient clearance and access for ease of operation and maintenance. Flat faced wrenches and vises shall be used for copper tubing systems. Pipe wrenches and vises with toothed jaws will damage copper materials and shall not be used. Bends in soft temper tubing shall be shaped with bending tools. 3-3.02. Pipe Sleeves. Not Used. 3-3.03. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the indicated requirements. 3-3.03.01. Threaded. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be fully and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed after threading and before assembly to remove all burrs. Unless otherwise indicated, threaded joints shall be made up with teflon thread tape, thread sealer, or a suitable joint compound. Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. 3-3.03.02. CompressionEnds of tubing shall be cut square and all burrs shall be removed. The tubing end shall be fully inserted into the compression fitting and the nut shall be tightened not less than 1-1/4 turns and not more than 1-1/2 turns past


fingertight, or as recommended by the fitting supplier, to produce a leaktight, torque-free connection. 3-3.03.03. Flared. Not Used. 3-3.03.04. Soldered and Brazed. Not Used. 3-3.03.05. Solvent Welded. Solvent welded connections shall only be used for PVC or CPVC pipe. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing procedures shall comply with the pipe supplier's recommendations and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions recommended by the supplier. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the setting time recommended by the supplier. Pressure testing of solvent welded piping systems shall not be performed until the applicable curing time, as set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed. Solvent welding shall be performed by bonding operators who have met the requirements of ASME B31.3 and A328. 3-3.03.06. Epoxy and Adhesive Bonded. Not Used. 3-3.03.07. Heat Fusion Bonded. Not Used 3-3.03.08. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but shall not be torqued less than the minimum value required by the gasket supplier. Flange bolts shall not be so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. Flange bolt holes shall be oriented as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the spool drawings:

Vertical flange face: Bolt holes to straddle the vertical centerlines.

Horizontal flange face: Bolt holes shall be aligned with connecting pipe.

Pipe sealants, thread compounds, or other coatings shall not be applied to flange gaskets unless recommended by the gasket supplier for the specified service and approved by Design Engineer. Welds at orifice flanges shall have internal surfaces ground smooth to the pipe wall. Slip-on flanges shall be welded inside and outside. There shall be a distance of approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch [1.5 to 3 mm] between the edge of the fillet weld and the face of the flange. The seal weld shall be applied so that the flange face shall be free of weld spatter and does not require refacing.


Flat-faced flanges shall be used when mating to Class 125 flanges. Full-face gaskets shall be used with flat-faced flanges and ring gaskets shall be used with raised faced flanges. 3-3.03.09. Welded. Not Used 3-3.03.10. Grooved Couplings. Not Used. 3-3.03.11. Push-on. Not Used. 3-3.03.12. Rubber-Gasketed. Not Used. 3-3.03.13. Other Pipe Joints. Not Used. 3-3.04. Pipe. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the Drawings, or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to Design Engineer. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner which would induce stresses in the pipe, valves, or connecting equipment. Piping shall be supported in conformance with the Pipe Supports section. Piping shall be connected to equipment by flanges or unions as specified in the various piping sections. Piping connecting to equipment shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. Water, gas, and air supply piping shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union at each fixture or unit of equipment, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, to permit isolation and disconnection of each item without disturbing the remainder of the system. A union shall be provided within 2 feet [600 mm] of each threaded-end valve unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and where required by the Drawings or the Technical Specifications. Water supply piping within structures shall be arranged, and facilities provided, for complete drainage. All piping serving metering equipment shall be uniformly graded so that air traps are eliminated and complete venting is provided. Piping adjacent to flow sensors shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the supplier of the flow sensor and commonly accepted design practices of the appropriate straight pipe runs both upstream and downstream.


Drains required for operation are shown on the Drawings. However, vents at all high points and drains at all low points in the piping that are required for complete draining for pressure test may not be shown on these Drawings. Contractor shall add such items as found to be necessary during detail piping design and/or piping installation. 3-3.05. Reducers. Eccentric reducers shall be installed flat on the bottom for steam, condensate return and digester gas services. 3-3.06. Valves. Isolation valves provided with equipment and instruments shall be located in a manner which will allow ease of access and removal of the items to be isolated. Prior to soldering or brazing valves, teflon and elastomer seats and seals shall be removed to prevent damage. 3-4. PIPING ASSEMBLY. 3-4.01. General. Contractor shall only use labor that has been qualified by training and experience to capably perform the specified activities required to accomplish the work in a satisfactory manner Any deviations from the Technical Specifications or piping locations shown on the Drawings require prior review and approval by Design Engineer. 3-4.02. Buttwelded Piping. Not Used. 3-5. PROTECTIVE COATING. Not Used. 3-6. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING. All specified tests shall be made by and at the expense of Contractor in the presence, and to the satisfaction of Design Engineer. Each piping system shall be tested for at least 1 hour with no loss of pressure. The Contractor shall coordinate this section with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. Piping shall be tested at the indicated pressures:

Service Test Pressure Test Medium

Water supply 1-1/2 times working pressure but not less than 120 psi [828 kPa]

Water

Leakage may be determined by loss-of-pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method acceptable to Design Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected and the ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as needed during the testing.


Unless otherwise required by the applicable codes, drainage systems shall be water tested. For water testing, the drainage system shall be filled with water to the level of the highest stack. Openings shall be plugged as necessary for either type of test. To be considered free of leaks, the system shall hold the water or air for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level or air pressure. All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices, shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of Contractor. Contractor shall give Design Engineer 5 working days advanced notice of scheduled testing. All joints in piping shall be tight and free of leaks. All joints which are found to leak, by observation or during any specified test, shall be repaired, and the tests repeated. 3-7. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free of blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when installed. Before being placed in service, the interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of Design Engineer. 3-8. ACCEPTANCE. Owner reserves the right to have any section of the piping system which he suspects may be faulty cut out of the system by Contractor for inspection and testing. Should the joint prove to be sound, Owner will reimburse Contractor on a time-and-material basis as specified in the Contract. Should the joint prove to be faulty, the destructive test will continue joint by joint in all directions until sound joints are found. Costs for replacement of faulty work and/or materials shall be the responsibility of Contractor.

End of Section


Section STS15067

MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous plastic pipe, tubing, and accessories. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, jointing materials and other necessary appurtenances. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. 1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete technical specifications, data and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping, fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data:

Name of Supplier Type and model Construction materials, length, thickness, and finishes Pressure and temperature ratings

Contractor shall obtain and submit a written statement from the gasket material supplier certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are recommended for the specified field test pressures and service conditions. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Delivery Storage and Handling section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Delivery Storage and Handling section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F [4°C and 32°C]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. FRP PIPE. Not used. 2-2. PVC PIPE MATERIALS. PVC pipe materials and services shall be as specified herein. 2-2.01. Material Classification PVC-1. Not used.


2-2.02. Material Classification PVC-2.

PVC-2 – Schedule 80 PVC Pipe with Solvent Welded Joints. Washer/Compactor PW Spray/flush Washer/Compactor Drain

Pipe Fittings

ASTM D1785, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal, Schedule 80. ASTM D2467, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal. Flanges or unions shall be provided where needed to facilitate disassembly of equipment or valves. Flanges or unions shall be joined to the pipe by a solvent weld. When acceptable to Design Engineer, threaded joints may be used instead of solvent welded joints in exposed interior locations for the purpose of facilitating assembly. The use of threaded joints in this system shall be held to a minimum.

2-2.03. Material Classification PVC-3. Not used.





2-2.08. Material Classification PVC-8.

PVC-8 – Flexible PVC Tubing with Nylon Braiding.

Tubing Fittings

Kentak Products Company, “K-6100”. Connections shall be accomplished with hose barbs constructed of a suitable material and hose clamps constructed of stainless steel.


2-2.09. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the PVC Pipe systems shall be as indicated.

Flanges Diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150.

Schedule 80 for DWV systems.

Flange Bolts and Nuts ASTM A307, Grade B, length such that, after installation, the bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch [3 to 10 mm] beyond outer face of the nut.

Stainless steel for DWV and chemical feed systems, galvanized steel for all other systems.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1, plain. Same material as bolts and nuts.

Flange Gaskets Full face, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, chemical-resistant elastomeric material suitable for the specified service.

Expansion Joints Edlon "Thermo-molded TFE" or Resistoflex "Style R6905" molded expansion joint.

2-3. CPVC PIPE. Not used.

2-4. PE PIPE. Not used.

2-5. POLYPROPYLENE PIPE. Not used.

2-6. PVDF PIPE. Not used. 2-7. REINFORCED PLASTIC TUBING. Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section. 3-2. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. 3-3. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections with existing pipes shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions encountered.


3-4. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS. After installation, PVC piping and fittings (including valves) shall be hydrostatically tested for defective workmanship and materials as specified in the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-5. LEAKAGE. All PVC piping shall be watertight and free from leaks. Each leak which is discovered during testing and warranty period shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor.

End of Section


Section STS15140

PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers, brackets, supports, bracing, anchorage, and the design for the pipe support system for pipes 12 inches and smaller. Pipe supports shall be furnished complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories. This section also covers the spacing of expansion joints in pipes 12 inches in diameter and smaller. Expansion joint products and materials are covered in the respective piping sections. This section covers pipe supports for the following pipe materials:

PVC Schedule 80 1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall provide pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for all piping systems. The Drawings indicate pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for pipes larger than 12 inches in diameter, and in special cases for pipes that are 12 inches and smaller. Contractor shall design anchors, pipe supports, expansion joints, and flexible couplings not already shown on the Drawings, in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Contractor’s design shall include pipe supports, bracing, and anchorage adjacent to expansion joints, couplings, valves, in-line devices, equipment, wyes and tees, or changes in direction as required for dismantling piping, removing valves or other in-line devices, disconnecting piping from equipment, and pipe support, in addition to supports in accordance with the maximum spacing specified herein. The pipe support system design by Contractor shall rigidly support pipe so there is no visible movement or visible sagging between supports. The system shall comply with specified piping code requirements. Contractor shall not delete or relocate the supports, expansion joints, or couplings indicated on the Drawings without written approval of Design Engineer. Pipe supports and expansion joints are not required in buried piping, but concrete blocking or other suitable anchorage shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or specified in other sections. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all supports furnished under this section. If requirements in this


technical specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, catalog information, and drawings covering fabricated pipe supports, fabricated inserts, and stainless steel, galvanized, and copper-plated and plastic-coated pipe supports shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Data shall include a listing of the intended use and general location of each item submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe supports shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Materials of construction for fabricated steel supports are covered in the Structural and Miscellaneous Metals section. All pipe support materials shall be packaged as necessary to ensure delivery in satisfactory condition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, pipe supports shall be fabricated of supplier's standard materials and provided with supplier's standard finish. Design loads for inserts, brackets, clamps, and other support items shall not exceed the supplier's recommended loads. Pipe supports shall be manufactured for the sizes and types of pipe to which they are applied. Strap hangers will not be acceptable. Threaded rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the maximum adjustment available in the support item. Continuously threaded rod is not acceptable for hanger rods over 12 inches [300 mm] in length. Unless accepted by Design Engineer, the use of supports which rely on stressed thermoplastic components to support the pipe will not be permitted. Contact between dissimilar metals, including contact between stainless steel and carbon steel, shall be prevented. Portions of pipe supports which come into contact with other metals that are dissimilar shall be rubber or vinyl coated. Supports for brass or copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. Pipe support types and application shall comply with Table 1. 2-2. WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS. Wind and seismic loads for worst case conditions of either full, partially full, or empty pipes shall be considered in the


design. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. APPLICATION. Concrete inserts or anchor bolts shall be used to support piping from new cast-in-place concrete. Fastening of supports to existing concrete and masonry shall be in accordance with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section. Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes, changes in diameter or direction, or dead-ending. Anchors shall be located as specified to force expansion and contraction movement to occur at expansion joints, loops, or elbows, and as needed to prevent excessive bending stresses and opening of mechanical couplings. Anchorage for temperature changes shall be centered between elbows and mechanical joints used as expansion joints. Anchorage for bellows type expansion joints may be located adjacent to the joint. When expansion joints are required, pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to bellows type expansion joints. Guides will not be required where mechanical couplings are permitted as expansion joints. Guides shall be located on both sides of expansion joints, except where anchors are adjacent to the joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, one guide shall be within four pipe diameters from the joint and a second guide within 14 pipe diameters from the first guide. Pipe supports shall allow adequate movement; pipe guides shall not be used for anchoring pipe against longitudinal forces. Pipe guides shall be provided at locations as recommended by the supplier. Pipe supports for insulated cold piping systems shall be sized for the outside diameter of the insulated pipe, and an insulation protection shield shall be installed between the support and the insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed between the pipe and the insulation shields for piping larger than 2 inches [50 mm] or when needed to prevent crushing of the insulation. Inserts shall be of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed

3-2. TYPES OF SUPPORTS. The products for pipe supports shall be as indicated in Table 1 for the specified type and size of support. Where stainless steel is specified for pipe supports but is not available from the name suppliers for the model specified in Table 1, Contractor shall provide a heavier duty support that is available in stainless steel.


TABLE 1 - TYPES OF SUPPORTS

Description and Service

MSS SP 69 Type (Note 1) Technical Specification

Hangers 2-1/2 inch [63 mm] and

smaller pipe

For cold insulated piping

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260" Piping Technology & Products Fig. 83.

Other services J-style 5 B-Line "B3690", Anvil "67",

Unistrut "J Hanger", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 67.

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3104", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83.

3 Through 12 inch [75 through 300 mm] pipe (Note 3)

For cold insulated piping

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83 .

For uninsulated cold piping

Clamp 4 B-Line "3140", Anvil "212", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 50.

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83.

Other services Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100" or Anvil "260"

for steel pipe; B-Line "B3102", Anvil "590", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 83 C. L. for cast iron pipe.





Concrete Inserts, Steel

12 inch [300 mm] and smaller pipe

18 Channel 12 ga [2.66 mm thick], galv, 1-5/8 by 1-3/8 inches [41.3 by 34.9 mm], min. 8 inches [200 mm] long, anchor lugs on 4 inch [100 mm] centers, at least three lugs, end caps, and filler strip.

Beam Clamps, Malleable Iron or Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] and smaller pipe

21 B-Line "3050" and "3055", Anvil "133" and "134", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 130 and Fig. 130 (SP).

28, 29 Anvil "292" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140.

30 B-Line "3054", Anvil "228", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140.

Side Beam Bracket 34 B-Line "B3062", Anvil "202", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 20L.

Wall Supports and Frames, Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] and smaller pipe (Note 2)

Brackets 32 B-Line "B3066", Anvil "195", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76.

33 B-Line "B3067", Anvil "199", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76.

Prefabricated channels -- 12 ga [2.66 mm thick], galv, 1-5/8 inches [41.3 by 41.3 mm], with suitable brackets and pipe clamps.

Offset pipe clamp, 1-1/2 inch [38 mm] and smaller pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 3/16 inch [32 by 4.7 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] bolts.





Offset pipe clamp, 2 to 3-1/2 inch [50 to 88 mm] pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch [32 by 6 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] bolts.

Floor Supports, Steel or Cast Iron

6 inch [150 mm] and smaller pipe

37 (with base)

B-Line "B3090", Anvil "259" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 48.

8 through 12 inch [200 to 300 mm] pipe

38 B-Line "B3093", Anvil "264" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 46.

Pipe Alignment Guides -- B-Line "B3281" through "B3287", Anvil "255", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 6.

Turnbuckles Steel 13 B-Line "B3202", Anvil "230", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 30.

Hanger Rods, Carbon Steel, Threaded Both Ends, 3/8 inch [10 mm] minimum size

-- B-Line "B3205", Anvil "140", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 128.

Weldless Eye Nut, steel 17 B-Line "B3200", Anvil "290", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 40.

Insulation Protection Saddle 39 B-Line "B3160 Series", Anvil "160 Series", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 184.

Insulation Protection Shield 40 B-Line "B3151", Anvil "167", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 183.

Table 1 Notes:

1. MSS SP-69 supports and hangers are illustrated on Figure 1-15140. 2. Pipe clamps or other devices which rely on the application of a

clamping force to the supported pipe in order to maintain the clamp position or location in a prefabricated channel or track will not be acceptable for use with nonmetallic pipe or tubing.

3. Alternatively, pipe hangers for 12 inch pipe may be saddle type as indicated on the Drawings.


3-3. SUPPORT SPACINGS. Pipe supports and expansion joints shall be spaced in accordance with Tables 2 and 5. The types of pipes to be supported are as specified herein. Table 2 covers spacing for the standard operating conditions specified for each pipe material. Table 5 covers PVC pipe which carries air or liquids with a specific gravity other than 1.0. Spacing in the tables is the maximum spacing considering gravity loads. Where Contractor’s design includes lateral and longitudinal forces due to seismic loads, wind loads, and other forces, the spacing requirement may be less than that indicated in the tables.

TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AT STANDARD TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe

Pipe Support Max

Spacing

Max Run Without

Expansion Joint, Loop, or

Bend (Note 1)

Expansion Joint Max Spacing (Note 2)

Type of Expansion

Joints feet [m] feet [m] feet [m] PVC, Schedule 40, for services at a maximum temperature of 100°F [38°C], and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0. 1/8 and

1/4 inch [3 and 6 mm]

Continuous Support

20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

1/2 inch [13 mm]

3-1/2 [1.0] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

3/4 and 1 inch [19 and 25 mm]

4 [1.2] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

1-1/4 and 1-1/2 inch [31 and 38 mm]

4-1/2 [1.3] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

2 inch [50 mm]

5 [1.5] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

2-1/2 inch [63 mm]

5-1/2 [1.6] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

3 inch [75 mm]

6 [1.8] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

4 inch [100 mm]

6-1/2 [1.9] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

6 inch [150 mm]

7-1/2 [2.2] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

8 inch [200 mm]

8 [2.4] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3


TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AT STANDARD TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe

Pipe Support Max

Spacing

Max Run Without

Expansion Joint, Loop, or

Bend (Note 1)

Expansion Joint Max Spacing (Note 2)

Type of Expansion

Joints feet [m] feet [m] feet [m] 10 inch

[250 mm] 8-1/2 [2.5] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

12 inch [300 mm]

9-1/2 [2.9] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

Table 2 Notes:

1. Unless otherwise acceptable to Design Engineer, an expansion joint shall be provided in each straight run of pipe having an overall length between loops or bends exceeding the maximum run specified herein.

2. Unless otherwise acceptable to Design Engineer, the spacing between expansion joints in any straight pipe run shall not exceed the maximum spacing specified herein.

3. Expansion joint fittings are specified in the respective piping sections. 4. At least two properly padded supports for each pipe section. 5. At least one support for each pipe section. 6. Expansion joints shall be mechanical couplings. 7. No expansion joints are required. 8. Supports for 5 and 10 foot [1.5 and 3 m] long pipe sections shall be

located within 18 inches [460 mm] of each joint. Supports shall be positioned to maintain the piping alignment and to prevent the piping from sagging.

9 References to specific gravity refer to liquid specific gravity and are referenced to water which is assumed to have a specific gravity of 1.0.

3-3.01. Temperature Adjustments for PVC Pipe. Not used. 3-3.02. Temperature Adjustments for FRP Pipe. Not used. 3-3.03. Specific Gravity Adjustments for PVC and FRP Pipe. PVC pipe shall have the maximum spacing indicated in Tables 2 adjusted in accordance with the following table when the specific gravity of the liquid is greater than 1.0. (Note: Specific gravities listed are liquid specific gravities referenced to water which is assumed to have a specific gravity of 1.0.) Table 5 shall be used for water supply piping systems.


TABLE 5 – MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING CORRECTION FACTORS

FOR PVC PIPE

Specific Gravity Correction Factor 1.0 1.0

3-4. INSTALLATION. 3-4.01. General. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue stress on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, and adjacent to flexible couplings. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas. Where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers. Trapeze assembly shall consist of structure attachments as previously specified with rod size dependent upon total weight supported. Spacing of assemblies shall be determined by the minimum pipe size included in the group supported. Trapeze horizontal assemblies shall be structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable sag between rods when pipes are full. All lines shall be attached to the horizontal with intermediate pipe guides and U-bolts or one-hole clamps. Pre-engineered support equipment may be used when selected and installed in accordance with the supplier's recommendations. Where copper pipe is installed on a support system of dissimilar metal with other pipes, the copper pipe shall be galvanically isolated from the support using Neoprene strips or other material acceptable to Design Engineer. No piping shall be supported from the pipe above. Horizontal piping hanger support rods shall attach to steel beams with center-loading I-clamps, or welded beam clips. Hanger support rods shall attach to concrete slabs or beams with inserts. Anchorage shall be provided to resist both lateral and longitudinal seismic forces. 3-4.02. Inserts. Reference building structural concrete Drawings for concrete inserts. When not provided as part of the building concrete structure, provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts flush with the slab surface.


Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. NDE (Non-Destructive Evaluation) shall be used to locate existing reinforcing before drilling. 3-4.03. Pipe Hangers and Supports. Hanger rod sizes for copper pipe and plastic pipe shall be the size of hanger rods for steel pipe. Install hangers to provide a minimum 1/2 inch [13 mm] space between finished covering and adjacent work. A hanger shall be placed within 18 inches [450 mm] of each horizontal elbow, and on both sides of all piping accessories and valves weighing 20 lbs [9 kg] or more. Hangers shall have 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] minimum vertical adjustment. Support horizontal cast iron, ductile iron and no-hub piping systems adjacent to each joint. Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Hanger and hanger components shall be sized specifically for the pipe size it is to be used on. 3-5. PLACEMENT. The maximum spacing for pipe supports and expansion joints shall be as indicated in Tables 2 and 5. Rubber hose and flexible tubing shall be provided with continuous angle or channel support. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to Design Engineer, piping shall be supported approximately 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] out from the face of walls and at least 3 inches [75 mm] below ceilings.

End of Section


Section STS15250

MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of insulation, jackets, and accessories for the following mechanical systems:

• piping

Building insulation materials are specified in other sections. Insulation for mechanical equipment which is to be applied at the factory prior to shipment is specified in the individual equipment sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be in full conformity with the Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of insulation with the installation of the items or systems to be insulated. Each item or system shall be tested and accepted by Design Engineer before installation of the insulation materials. Contractor shall verify that each component of the insulation systems is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all insulation materials are appropriate for the intended applications; and that all necessary devices and accessories have been provided. All insulation of the same class shall be the product of a single supplier; however, all the insulation types need not be the products of one supplier. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this technical specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern.


All work shall comply with UL, NFPA, and ASTM safety requirements. 1-2.04. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage. 1-2.05. Surface Burning Characteristics. Insulation, jackets, tapes, and adhesives to be used indoors shall have a composite flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and a composite smoke developed rating of 50 when tested by UL 723, NFPA 255, or ASTM E84. All testing shall be done on materials of the same densities and installed thicknesses as the materials being installed. Insulation materials which have been treated with a flame retardant additive to meet the required flame spread and smoke developed ratings are not acceptable. 1-2.06. Painting and Identification. Field painting and identification shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. A complete list of materials and catalog cuts, together with detailed technical specifications, materials performance data, installation instructions, parts, devices, and accessories furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Information shall include certified test results to show compliance with UL, NFPA, and ASTM safety requirements. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Supplier Experience. A supplier shall have furnished material of the type specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the Product Delivery Requirements section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Product Storage and Handling Requirements section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS. Acceptable suppliers shall be as listed in the respective product description paragraphs. 2-2. MATERIALS. Insulation, vapor retarders, and field applied jackets shall be installed to cover piping, ductwork, equipment, fittings, and appurtenances as indicated in the Insulation Schedule.


2-2.01. Pipe Insulation. 2-2.01.01. Type PMF1 Insulation. Not used. 2-2.01.02. Type PMW1 Insulation. Not used. 2-2.01.03. Type PFC1 Insulation. Type PFC1 flexible cellular elastomeric pipe insulation shall be Armacell "AP/Armaflex" or K-Flex USA "Insul-Tube" for unslit insulation and Armacell “AP/Armaflex SS” or K-Flex USA “Insul-Lock Seam-Seal” for factory pre-slit insulation. Flexible cellular polyolefin foam insulation shall be IMCOA "Imcolock" or Plastic Technology, Inc. “Innofoam”. Type PFC1 pipe insulation shall be one-piece, molded elastomeric or polyolefin foam insulation suitable for a temperature range of -40°F to 180°F [-40°C to 82°C], and shall have a maximum thermal conductivity (k) of 0.28 Btu in/hr ft2 °F at 75°F [0.040 W/m °C at 24°C]. The insulation shall be suitable for exposure to weather and direct sunlight or, where not indicated to be jacketed, shall be given two coats of an ultraviolet-resistant finish recommended by the supplier. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C534 for elastomeric or ASTM C1427 for polyolefin. 2-2.02. Duct Insulation. 2-2.02.01. Type DMF1 Insulation. Not used. 2-2.03. Equipment Insulation. 2-2.03.01. Type EMF1 Insulation. Not used. 2-3. ACCESSORIES. 2-3.01. PVC Insulation Jackets. Not used. 2-3.02. Aluminum Insulation Jackets. Aluminum insulation jackets for insulated piping systems shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the insulation schedule herein and where indicated on the Drawings. Aluminum jackets shall be manufactured from alclad conforming with ASTM B209. The aluminum jacket shall have a nominal thickness of 0.024 in. [0.61 mm]0, with an embossed finish. Fittings in insulated piping systems and equipment where indicated in the insulation schedule shall be provided with aluminum jackets of the same aluminum jacketing material as the piping systems. The jacket shall have a factory-applied moisture retarder of at least 3 mils [76 µm] permanently bonded to the interior surface and extending the full width of the jacket. The retarder shall consist of Polysurlyn or polyethylene film and kraft paper.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. 3-1.01. General. Contractor shall install all insulation materials as specified herein for the piping systems, ductwork, and equipment that are not factory insulated. Insulation materials shall be installed in accordance with the supplier's written instructions and recommendations. Surfaces to be insulated shall be cleaned and dried. All work shall be performed within the temperature ranges recommended by the insulation product supplier. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry and shall remain in the factory container until it is installed. Packages or factory containers shall bear the supplier's stamp or label with the name of the supplier and description of materials. Seams of exposed insulation and jackets shall be in the least visible location.

3-1.02. Piping Insulation. 3-1.02.01. Type PMF1 Insulation. Not used. 3-1.02.02. Type PMW1 Insulation. Not used. 3-1.02.03. Type PFC1 Insulation. Pipe insulation shall be installed to cover all pipe, fittings, and appurtenances with all seams and joints sealed by a factory or field applied adhesive. Insulation at fittings and appurtenances shall be carefully formed and fitted. Insulation at elbows shall be mitered using segments of pipe insulation.

3-1.04. Equipment Insulation. Not used. 3-1.05. PVC Jacketing. Not used. 3-1.06. Aluminum Jacketing. Aluminum jacketing for piping systems shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Jacketing shall be held in place with stainless steel securing bands uniformly spaced at not more than 18 inches [457 mm] to produce tight joints without "bulging". The jacket shall overlap at least 2 inches [51 mm] at longitudinal and circumferential joints. Joints shall be overlapped and sealed with caulk to prevent moisture penetration, and longitudinal joints shall be placed to shed water. Exposed ends of pipe insulation shall be provided with covers constructed of the same material as the jacketing. Elbows shall be jacketed with spirally wrapped aluminum strips or individual mitered segments or gores cut to fit the insulation.


3-2. INSULATION SCHEDULE.

INSULATION SCHEDULE

Service Size Inches [mm]

Mechanical Insulation

Notes

Type Thickness Inches [mm]

PIPING - INDOOR (CONCEALED OR EXPOSED) – NOT USED

PIPING - OUTDOOR (EXPOSED)

Non-Potable Cold Water

Up to 3

4 & larger

PCF-1

PCF-1

3/4

1

(3)

(3)

Potable Cold Water

Up to 3

4 & larger

PCF-1

PCF-1

3/4

1

(3)

(3)

DUCTWORK – NOT USED

EQUIPMENT – NOT USED

Mechanical Insulation Types: FC - Flexible Cellular MF - Mineral Fiber MW - Mineral Wool


Notes:

(1) Aluminum jacket.

(2) PVC jackets shall be provided on exposed portions of insulated piping located less than 8 feet [2.4 m] above finished floor. On all other portions of the insulated piping system PVC jackets shall be provided only for fittings.

(3) Insulation shall be provided for portions of the piping system which pass through space above finished ceilings or is exposed above equipment, electrical panels, or cabinets.

(4) Insulation shall be provided for exposed portions of the piping system located less than 8 feet [2.4 m] above the finished floor or grade.

(5) Insulation shall be provided for outside air plenums and ducts that are located upstream of the heating coil or pass through unheated spaces after the heating coil, unless indicated to be internally lined.

(6) Insulation shall be provided for outside air plenums and ducts, air conditioning supply and return ducts, and dehumidifier reactivation air discharge ducts, unless indicated to be internally lined.

(7) Insulation thickness shall be sufficient to provide a cold face temperature not to exceed 150°F [66°C].

(8) The underside of all roof drains shall be insulated to a 1 foot [300 mm] radius from the center of the drain. All roof drain piping within 4 feet [1.2 m] of the drain shall be insulated.

(9) Includes 8 feet [2.4 m] of the cold water inlet piping to the water heater storage tank.

Unless otherwise indicated in the insulation schedule, all mechanical piping, ductwork, equipment, and accessories with an operating temperature in excess of 140°F [60°C] and below 60°F [15°C] shall be insulated.

End of Section


Section STS16050

ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of all equipment and materials needed for the electrical requirements of this Contract. It also covers conduit, wiring, and terminations for electrical equipment installed under Electrical Equipment Installation section. This section covers the installation and interconnection of electrical equipment furnished under other sections, except electrical items designated to be installed under those sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Electrical apparatus on all equipment shall be installed complete and placed in readiness for proper operation. Electrical materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment provided under this section. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence 1-2.02. Seismic Design Requirements. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-2.03. Coordination. Electrical work shall conform to the construction schedule and the progress of other trades. 1-2.04. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. All anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and expansion anchors shall comply with Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section, except smaller than 3/4 inch [19 mm] will be permitted to match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment. 1-2.05. Drawings. Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate locations of equipment and enclosures and provide one-line diagrams regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment.


1-3. CODES AND PERMITS. All work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with the NEC - National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, and the following standards where applicable:

ANSI American National Standards Institute.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

AWG American Wire Gauge.

Fed Spec Federal Technical Specification.

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards

NEMA National Electrical Suppliers Association.

NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

UL Underwriters' Laboratories. Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL, or by a nationally recognized third party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. If no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test shall be performed at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to be used. 1-4. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENT. 1-4.01. Seismic Design Requirements. Submit confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-5. IDENTIFICATION. 1-5.01. Conduit. Conduits in manholes, handholes, building entrance pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment shall be provided with identification tags. Identification tags shall be 19 gage [1 mm thick] stainless steel, with 1/2 inch [13 mm] stamped letters and numbers as indicated on the Drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps and shall be positioned to be readily visible. 1-5.02. Conductors. All conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be identified and color coded as described herein. 1-5.02.01. Conductor Identification Number. Except for lighting and receptacle circuits, each individual conductor in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with wire identification markers at the point of termination.


The wire markers shall be of the heat-shrinkable tube type, with custom typed identification numbers. The wire numbers shall be as indicated on the equipment supplier's drawings. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection. 1-5.02.02. Conductor Color Coding. Power conductors shall be color coded as indicated below. For conductors 6 AWG and smaller, the color coding shall be the insulation finish color. For sizes larger than 6 AWG, the color coding may be by marking tape. The equipment grounding conductor shall be green or green with one or more yellow stripes if the conductor is insulated. The following color coding system shall be used:

120/240V single-phase — black, red, and white 120/208V, three-phase — black, red, blue, and white 120/240V, three-phase — black, orange, blue, and white 277/480V, three-phase — brown, orange, yellow, and gray

Where 120/240 and 120/208 volt systems share the same conduit or enclosure, the neutral for either the 120/240 volt system or the 208 volt system shall be white with a permanent identifiable violet stripe. Control and instrumentation circuit conductors shall be color coded as indicated in the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section. 1-5.03. Motor Starters. Not used. 1-5.04. Control Stations. Control stations shall be provided with nameplates identifying the related equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends ("start", "stop", etc.) as indicated on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch [3 mm] engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the control stations. 1-5.05. Circuit Breakers. Not used. 1-5.06. Disconnect Switches. Not used. 1-5.07. Arc Flash Hazard Labels. Lighting panels, power panels, power centers, and meter socket enclosures shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include the following:


WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. SEE NFPA 70E. Equipment

must be accessed by qualified personnel only. Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment.

1-6. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the work performed by the Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Drawings and data. Operating manuals. Samples.

1-6.01. Submittal Identification. Information covering all materials and equipment shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals section. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows:

a. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the technical specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

b. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out.

c. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive literature not readily cross-referenced with the Drawings or Technical Specifications.

d. Schematics and connection diagrams for all electrical equipment shall be submitted for review. A supplier's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to show the intended connections.

Within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall furnish a submittal for all types of cable and conduit to be provided. The submittal shall include the cable supplier and type, and sufficient data to indicate that the cable and conduit meet the specified requirements. In addition to the complete technical specifications and descriptive literature, a sample of the largest size of each type of cable shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample shall include legible and complete surface printing of the cable identification.


1-6.02. Seismic Design Requirements. Submitted confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-7. PROTECTION AND STORAGE. During construction, the insulation on all electrical equipment shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metallic components shall be protected against corrosion by strip heaters, lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall be provided immediately upon receipt of the equipment and shall be maintained continuously. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. POWER SERVICE ENTRANCE. Not used. 2-2. TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE. Not used. 2-3. CABLE. All cables of each type (such as lighting cable or 600 volt power cable) shall be from the same supplier. All types of cable shall conform to the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section and as described herein. 2-3.01. Lighting Cable. Not used. 2-3.02. 600 Volt Power Cable. Cable in power, control, indication, and alarm circuits operating at 600 volts or less, except where lighting, multiconductor control, and instrument cables are required, shall be 600 volt (Figure 2-16050 XHHW-2) power cable. 2-3.03. Instrument Cable. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumentation, metering, and other signaling and control equipment shall be two- or three-conductor instrument cable twisted for magnetic noise rejection and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield. Types of instrument cables shall be (Figure 4-16050 single pair). 2.3.04. Multiconductor Control Cable. Not used.. 2-3.05. Medium Voltage Power Cable. Not used. 2-3.06. Tray Cable. Not used. 2-4. CONDUIT. Conduit and raceways shall be as described in the following paragraphs:


2-4.01. Rigid Steel Conduit. Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall, hot-dip galvanized, shall conform to ANSI C80.1, and shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 6. 2-4.02. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). Not used. 2-4.03. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, shall be covered with a moistureproof polyvinyl chloride jacket, and shall be UL labeled. 2-4.04. Utility (PVC) Duct. Not used. 2-4.05. Rigid Nonmetallic (PVC) Conduit. PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40, UL labeled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651. 2-4.06. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. The conduit shall be rigid steel. Before the PVC coating is applied, the hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with a primer to obtain a bond between the steel substrate and the coating. The PVC coating shall be bonded to the primed outer surface of the conduit. The bond on conduit and fittings shall be stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC coating. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be at least 40 mils [1000 µm]. A chemically cured two-part urethane coating, at a nominal 2 mil [50 µm] thickness, shall be applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. The coating shall be sufficiently flexible to permit field bending the conduit without cracking or flaking of the coating. Every female conduit opening shall have a PVC sleeve extending one conduit diameter or 2 inches [50 mm], whichever is less, beyond the opening. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit before coating. The wall thickness of the sleeve shall be at least 40 mils [1000 µm]. All fittings, condulets, mounting hardware, and accessories shall be PVC-coated. All hollow conduit fittings shall be coated with the interior urethane coating described above. The screw heads on condulets shall be encapsulated by the supplier with a corrosion-resistant material. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured by Ocal, Perma-Cote, or Robroy. 2-4.07. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). Not used. 2-4.08. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC). Not used.


2-5. WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS. Concealed conduit systems shall have flush-mounted switches and convenience outlets. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface-mounted switches and convenience outlets. 2-5.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or O Z Gedney. In applications utilizing aluminum conduit systems, aluminum boxes and fittings manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or O Z Gedney shall be installed.

b. Rigid PVC device boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Carlon or Cantex.

c. Sheet steel device boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton, Raco, or Steel City.

d. PVC coated device boxes shall be manufactured by Ocal, Perma-Cote, or Robroy Industries.

e. Hub arrangements on threaded fittings shall be the most appropriate for the conduit arrangement to avoid unnecessary bends and fittings.

2-5.02. Device Plates.

a. Galvanized or cadmium-plated device plates shall be used on surface mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not required.

b. Device plates on flush mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not required shall be AISI Type 302 stainless steel, Eagle "93nnn series", Hubbell "S series", or Leviton "840nn-40 series"; nylon or polycarbonate, Eagle "513nV series", Hubbell "Pn series", or Leviton "807nn-I series".

c. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to match the plate.

d. Device plates for switches outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall have provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off", and shall be Appleton "FSK-1VS", Crouse-Hinds "DS185" or O Z Gedney "FS-1-WSCA".

e. Device plates for receptacles indicated as weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK-WRD", Crouse-Hinds "WLRD1", or O Z Gedney "FS-1-WDCA.

f. Flush-mounted, weatherproof plates shall be provided with adapter plates, Appleton "FSK-SBA" or Crouse-Hinds "FS031".


g. Device plates for ground fault interrupter receptacles indicated to be weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK-WGFI", Eagle "966", or O Z Gedney "FS-1-GFCA".

2-5.03. Wall Switches. Not used.

2-5.04. Receptacles. Not used. 2-5.05. Special Outlets. Not used. 2-6. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND WIRING GUTTERS. Indoor boxes (larger than switch, receptacle, or fixture type) and gutters shall be constructed of sheet steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, and shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts. Indoor boxes and gutters in corrosive areas indicated on the Drawings and outdoor boxes and gutters shall be NEMA Type 4X, ABS or stainless steel and shall be rigidly supported by PVC-coated or stainless steel framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the supplier's instructions. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet [900 mm] square or larger, or heavier than 25 lbs [11 kg], shall have rigid handles. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet [900 by 1200 mm] shall be split. Where indicated on the Drawings, junction and pull boxes with a removable side opposite the underground conduits shall be provided over building ends of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code, including space for full size continuations of all underground conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future conduits. 2-7. LIGHTING FIXTURES. Not used. 2-8. LIGHTING PANELS. Not used. 2-9. POWER PANELS. Not used 2-10. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES. Not used. 2-11. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOTOR STARTERS. Not used. 2-12. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MANUAL STARTERS. Not used.


2-13. CONTROL STATIONS. Control stations shall be provided as indicated on the one-line diagrams or schematics or as required by the equipment furnished. Pilot devices shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oiltight construction, and shall perform the functions indicated. Pilot lights shall be full voltage type with LED lamps. Indoor control stations shall have NEMA Type 13 enclosures. Control stations outdoors or indicated to be weatherproof shall have NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures with protective caps on the control devices. Control stations in NEC Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Group D hazardous areas shall have NEMA Type 7 enclosures, or be factory sealed type, Appleton “Contender Series” or Killark “Seal-X Series”. 2-14. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS. Not used. 2-15. DISCONNECT SWITCHES. Not used. 2-16. LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS. Not used. 2-17. POWER CENTERS. Not used. 2-18. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS. Not used. 2-19. LIGHTING CONTACTORS. Not used. 2-20. PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS. Not used. 2-21. RELAY ENCLOSURES. Not used. 2-22. ALARM HORN AND BEACON. Not used. 2-23. HEAT-TRACED PIPING. Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All material, equipment, and components specified herein shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000 – NEIS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment. 3-2. ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS. Not used. 3-3. COORDINATION STUDY. Not used. 3-4. POWER AND SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-5. TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Not used.


3-6. CABLE INSTALLATION. 3-6.01. General. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable shall be installed according to the following procedures, taking care to protect the cable and to avoid kinking the conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket, contamination by oil or grease, or any other damage. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices, communication and signal circuits as indicated on the one-line diagrams shall be installed continuous and may not be spliced unless approved by the Design Engineer.

a. Stranded conductor cable shall be terminated by lugs or pressure type connectors. Wrapping stranded cables around screw type terminals is not acceptable.

b. Stranded conductor cable shall be spliced by crimp type connectors. Twist-on wire connectors may be used for splicing solid cable and for terminations at lighting fixtures.

c. Splices may be made only at readily accessible locations.

d. Cable terminations and splices shall be made as recommended by the cable supplier for the particular cable and service conditions. All shielded cable stress cone terminations shall be IEEE Class 1 molded rubber type. Shielded cable splices shall be tape or molded rubber type as required. Shielded cable splices and stress cone terminations shall be made by qualified splicers. Materials shall be by 3M Company, Plymouth/Bishop, or Raychem Electric Power Products.

e. Cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed heavily against enclosures.

f. Cable-pulling lubricant shall be compatible with all cable jackets; shall not contain wax, grease, or silicone; and shall be Polywater "Type J".

g. Cables operating at more than 2000 volts shall be fireproofed in all cable vaults, manholes, and handholes. Fireproofing shall be applied with a half-lapped layer of 3M "Scotch 77 Arc-Proofing Tape", anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M "Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Tape" or with equivalent tape by Anixter or Plymouth/Bishop.

h. Where necessary to prevent heavy loading on cable connections, in vertical risers, the cable shall be supported by Kellems, or equal, woven grips.

i. Spare cable ends shall be taped, coiled, and identified.


j. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than the minimum recommended by the supplier. For cables rated higher than 600 volts, the minimum radius shall be 8 diameters for nonshielded cable and 12 diameters for shielded cable.

k. All cables in one conduit, over 1 foot [305 mm] long, or with any bends, shall be pulled in or out simultaneously.

l. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices are indicated on the one-line diagrams. Conductors in designated numbers and sizes shall be installed in conduit of designated size. Circuits shall not be combined to reduce conduit requirements unless acceptable to Design Engineer.

3-6.02. Underground Cable Pulling Procedure. Not used. 3-6.03. Cable Insulation Test. Not used. 3-7. CONDUIT INSTALLATION. Contractor shall be responsible for routing all conduits. This shall include all conduits indicated on the one-lines, riser diagrams, and home-runs shown on the plan Drawings. Conduits shall be routed as defined in these Technical specifications. Where conduit routing is shown on plans, it shall be considered a general guideline and shall be field verified to avoid interferences. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, conduit installation and identification shall be completed according to the following procedures. 3-7.01. Installation of Interior and Exposed Exterior Conduit. This section covers the installation of conduit inside structures, above and below grade, and in exposed outdoor locations. In general, conduit inside structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit stubs may be exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. No conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible for routing the conduit to meet the following installation requirements:

a. Conduit installed in all exposed indoor locations, except corrosive areas indicated on the Drawings, and in floor slabs, walls, and ceilings of hazardous (classified) locations, shall be rigid steel. Exposed conduit shall be rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

b. Conduit installed in floor slabs and walls in non-hazardous locations shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

c. Conduit installed in all exposed outdoor locations shall be PVC-coated rigid steel, rigidly supported by PVC-coated framing materials.


Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the supplier's instructions.

d. Final connections to dry type transformers, to motors without flexible cords, and to other equipment with rotating or moving parts shall be liquidtight flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors installed without sharp bends and in the minimum lengths required for the application, but not longer than 6 feet [1.8 m] unless otherwise acceptable to Design Engineer.

e. Terminations and connections of rigid steel conduit shall be taper threaded. Conduits shall be reamed free of burrs and shall be terminated with conduit bushings.

f. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces.

g. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel, with symmetrical bends.

h. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches [150 mm] from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues.

i. Conduit installed in corrosive chemical feed and storage areas as indicated by Area Type on the Drawings shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

j. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall have supports and provisions for expansion as required by NEC Article 352.

k. Metallic conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be securely fastened by locknuts inside and outside.

l. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be secured to sheet metal device boxes using a male terminal adapter with a locknut inside or by using a box adapter inserted through the knockout and cemented into a coupling.

m. Conduits in walls or slabs, which have reinforcement in both faces, shall be installed between the reinforcing steel. In slabs with only a single layer of reinforcing steel, conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement. Conduits larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness shall be concrete encased under the slab.

n. Conduits that cross structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall be fitted with concretetight and watertight expansion/deflection couplings, suitable for use with metallic conduits and rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduits. The couplings shall be Appleton Type DF, Crouse-Hinds Type XD, or O-Z Type DX.


o. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated future openings.

p. Conduits through roofs or metal walls shall be flashed and sealed watertight.

q. Conduit installed through any openings cut into non-fire rated concrete or masonry structure elements shall be neatly grouted. Conduit penetrations of fire rated structure elements shall be sealed in a manner that maintains the fire rating as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.

r. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.

s. Exposed conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated with galvanized pipe caps.

t. Concealed conduit for future use shall be terminated in equipment or fitted with couplings plugged flush with structural surfaces.

u. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, concealed portions of conduits for future equipment shall be provided.

v. Horizontal conduit shall be installed to allow at least 7 feet [2.1 m] of headroom, except along structures, piping, and equipment or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained.

w. Conduit shall not be routed across the surface of a floor, roof, or walkway unless approved by Design Engineer.

x. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be threaded and installed as recommended by the conduit supplier's installation procedure using appropriate tools.

y. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated with acceptable fittings that will not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure.

z. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be connected to a 90 degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before it emerges. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from slabs or walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall.

aa. Power conductors to and from adjustable frequency drives shall be installed in steel conduit.

3-7.02. Underground Conduit Installation. All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to the respective sections of these Technical Specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements:


a. All underground conduits shall be concrete encased unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Concrete encasement within 15 feet of building entrances, under and within 5 feet of roadways, and within 10 feet of indicated future excavations shall be reinforced as detailed on the Drawings.

b. Concrete encased conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall. All PVC joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of the supplier.

c. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to 6 inches [150 mm] above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered.

d. Conduit and concrete encasement installed underground for future extension shall be terminated flush at the bulkhead with a coupling and a screw plug. The termination of the duct bank shall be reinforced with bars 100 diameters long that shall be terminated 2 inches [50 mm] from the bulkhead. Matching splice bars shall be 50 bar diameters long. Each longitudinal bar shall be provided with a Lenton "Form Saver" coupler and plate or a Dayton "Superior DBR" coupler at the bulkhead. The coupler shall be threaded to accept a dowel of like diameter in the future. Threads shall be protected with screw-in plastic caps. A 1-3/4 by 3/4 inch [45 by 20 mm] deep horizontal shear key shall be formed in the concrete encasement above and below the embedded conduits. After concrete placement, conduit and bar connector ends shall be cleaned and coated with two coats of thixotropic coal tar.

e. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC.

f. Underground conduit bend radius shall be at least 2 feet [600 mm] at vertical risers and at least 3 feet [900 mm] elsewhere.

g. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have at least 2 feet [600 mm] of earth cover, except where indicated otherwise.

h. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on all sides of the boxout. Water stops are specified in the Cast-In-Place Concrete section.

i. Underground nonmetallic conduits, which turn out of concrete or earth in outdoor locations, shall be connected to 90 degree elbows of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before they emerge.

j. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have one side in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with


special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

k. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to manholes.

l. Each 5 kV or higher voltage cable, each 250 kcmil [120 mm2] or larger cable, and each conduit group of smaller cables shall be supported from manhole walls by Kindorf "D-990" or Unistrut "P-3259" inserts, with Kindorf "F-721-24" or Unistrut "P-2544" brackets and Unistrut "P1753" or "P1754" fiberglass reinforced polyester cable saddles.

3-7.03. Sealing of Conduits. After cable has been installed and connected, conduit ends shall be sealed by forcing nonhardening sealing compound into the conduits to a depth at least equal to the conduit diameter. This method shall be used for sealing all conduits at handholes, manholes, and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1 inch [25 mm] and larger conduit connections to equipment. Conduits entering chlorine feed and storage rooms shall be sealed in a junction box or conduit body adjacent to the point of entrance. Conduits entering hazardous (classified) areas and submersible or explosion proof enclosures shall have Appleton "Type ESU" or Crouse-Hinds "EYS" sealing fittings with sealing compound. 3-7.04. Reuse of Existing Conduits. Existing conduits may be reused subject to the concurrence of Design Engineer and compliance with the following requirements:

a. A wire brush shall be pulled through the conduit to remove any loose debris.

b. A mandrel shall be pulled through the conduit to remove sharp edges and burrs.

3-8. WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION. Metallic and nonmetallic conduit boxes and fittings shall be installed in the following locations: 3-8.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be installed in concrete walls, ceilings, and floors; in the outdoor faces of masonry walls; and in all locations where weatherproof device covers are required. These boxes and fittings shall also be installed in exposed rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit systems.


b. Galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes shall be installed in the indoor faces of masonry walls, in interior partition walls, and in joist supported ceilings.

c. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic conduit systems.

d. PVC coated boxes and fittings shall be installed in PVC coated conduit systems.

3-8.02. Device Plates. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard-sized plates do not fully cover the wall opening. 3-8.03. Wall Switches. Not used. 3-8.04. Receptacles. Not used. 3-8.05. Special Outlets. Not used. 3-9. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the following procedures shall be used in performing electrical work. 3-9.01. Setting of Equipment. All equipment, boxes, and gutters shall be installed level and plumb. Boxes, equipment enclosures, metal raceways, and similar items mounted on water- or earth-bearing walls shall be separated from the wall by at least 1/4 inch [6 mm] thick corrosion-resistant spacers. Where boxes, enclosures, and raceways are installed at locations where walls are not suitable or available for mounting, concrete equipment pads, framing material, and associated hardware shall be provided. 3-9.02. Sealing of Equipment. All outdoor substation, switchgear, motor control center, and similar equipment shall be permanently sealed at the base, and all openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed with concrete grout to keep out rodents and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant, Dow-Corning "795" or General Electric "SCS1200". 3-10. GROUNDING. 3-10.01. General. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the following requirements:

a. All ground conductors shall be at least 12 AWG [4 mm2] soft drawn copper cable or bar, bare or green-insulated in accordance with the National Electrical Code.


b. Ground cable splices and joints, ground rod connections, and equipment bonding connections shall meet the requirements of IEEE 837, and shall be exothermic weld connections or irreversible high-compression connections, Cadweld "Exothermic" or Burndy "Hyground". Mechanical connectors will not be acceptable. Cable connections to bus bars shall be made with high-compression two-hole lugs.

c. Ground cable through exterior building walls shall enter within 3 feet [900 mm] below finished grade and shall be provided with a water stop. Unless otherwise indicated, installation of the water stop shall include filling the space between the strands with solder and soldering a 12 inch [300 mm] copper disc over the cable.

d. Ground cable near the base of a structure shall be installed in earth and as far from the structure as the excavation permits, but not closer than 24 inches [600 mm]. The tops of ground rods and ground cable interconnecting ground rods shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches [750 mm] below grade, or below the frost line, whichever is deeper.

e. All powered equipment, including lighting fixtures and receptacles, shall be grounded by a copper ground conductor in addition to the conduit connection.

f. Ground connections to equipment and ground buses shall be made with copper or high conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps. Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be made with irreversible high-compression type lugs inserted under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and inserted through enclosures, other than explosion proof enclosures, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers will not be acceptable.

g. The grounding system shall be bonded to the station piping by connecting to the first flange inside the building, on either a suction or discharge pipe, with a copper bar or strap. The flange shall be drilled and tapped to provide a bolted connection.

h. Ground conductors shall be routed as directly as possible, avoiding unnecessary bends. Ground conductor installations for equipment ground connections to the grounding system shall have turns with minimum bend radii of 12 inches [300 mm].

i.

Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch [19 mm] in diameter by 10 feet [3 m] long, with a copper jacket bonded to a steel core.


j.

Test wells and covers for non-traffic areas shall be molded high density polyethylene. Test wells for traffic areas shall be precast concrete construction rated for traffic duty with concrete or cast iron covers.

3-10.02. Grounding System Resistance. The ground system resistance shall comply with National Electrical Code. 3-10.03. Grounding System Testing. Not used. 3-11. LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-12. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-13. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT. Modifications to existing equipment shall be completed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. All existing facilities shall be kept in service during construction. Temporary power or relocation of existing power and control wiring, equipment, and devices shall be provided as required during construction. Coordination and timing of outages shall be as specified in other sections of these Technical Specifications. Electrical power interruptions will only be allowed where agreed upon in advance with Owner, and scheduling at times of low demand may be required. 3-13.01. Demolition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all cable and all exposed conduit for power and control signals of equipment indicated to be removed shall be demolished. Conduit supports and electrical equipment mounting hardware shall be removed, and holes or damage remaining shall be grouted or sealed flush. Conduit partially concealed shall be removed where exposed, and plugged with expanding grout flush with the floor or wall. Repairs shall be refinished to match the existing surrounding surfaces. Other demolished equipment shall be discarded or salvaged as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in other sections of these Technical Specifications.

End of Section

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE: ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC 70). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Wet/dry maximum operating temperature 90°C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-95-658, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658.

Cable Details

Size Number of Strands

Conductor Insulation Thickness*

Maximum Outside Diameter

AWG or kcmil

mm2

in.

µm

in.

mm

14 2.5 7 0.030 760 0.17 4.32

12 4.0 7 0.030 760 0.19 4.83

10 6.0 7 0.030 760 0.21 5.33

8 10.0 7 0.045 1140 0.27 6.86

6 16.0 7 0.045 1140 0.31 7.87

4 25.0 7 0.045 1140 0.36 9.14

2 35.0 7 0.045 1140 0.42 10.67

1 40.0 19 0.055 1400 0.48 12.19

1/0 50.0 19 0.055 1400 0.52 13.21

2/0 70.0 19 0.055 1400 0.57 14.48

4/0 95.0 19 0.055 1400 0.68 17.27

250 120.0 37 0.065 1650 0.75 19.05

350 185.0 37 0.065 1650 0.85 21.59

500 300.0 37 0.065 1650 0.98 24.89

750 400.0 61 0.080 2030 1.22 31.00

1,000 500.0 61 0.080 2030 1.37 34.80

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include supplier's name, XLP, XHHW-2, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2)

BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 2-16050

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 16 AWG (1.5 mm2), 7-strand, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90°C

dry, 75°C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 µm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 µm) minimum

thickness, UL 62, Type TFN. LAY: Twisted pair with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch (38.10 mm - 63.5 mm) lay. SHIELD: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) minimum size,

tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable

core. CONDUCTOR One conductor black, one conductor white. IDENTIFICATION: FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet

the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

Cable Details

Assembly Jacket Thickness*

Maximum Outside Diameter

in. µm in. mm

Single Pair 0.045 1140 0.34 8.64

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include supplier's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size, single pair, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Pair, Shielded Instrument Cable (600-SINGLE-PAIR-SH-INSTR)

BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 4-16050


Section STS16100

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of electrical equipment. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment specified to be installed under this section shall be erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier, unless exceptions are noted by Design Engineer. The electrical equipment identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are available. 1-2.01. Coordination. When supplier's field services are provided by the equipment supplier, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment supplier. Contractor shall give Design Engineer written notice at least 14 days prior to the need for supplier's field services furnished by others. Submittals for equipment furnished under the original procurement contract will be furnished to Contractor upon completion of review by Design Engineer. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. 1-3.01. Delivery. When sills are required for electrical equipment, they shall be shipped ahead of the scheduled equipment delivery to permit installation before concrete is placed. 1-3.02. Storage. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected by Contractor in accordance with Product Storage and Handling Requirements section, and in accordance with supplier's written instructions, until installed in the Work. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass. Contractor shall keep the equipment clean and dry at all times. Openings shall be plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) during temporary storage.


1-3.03. Handling. Electrical equipment shall be moved by lifting, jacking, or skidding on rollers as described in the supplier's instructions. Special lifting harness or apparatus shall be used when required. Lifting and jacking points shall be used when identified on the equipment. Contractor shall have required unloading equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery. 1-4. ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS. Switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, motor control line-ups, and transfer switches shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include the following information:

WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. See NFPA 70E.

Equipment must be accessed by qualified personnel only. Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All installation work shall be in accordance with supplier's written instructions. All material, equipment, and components specified to be installed according to this section shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000 – NEIS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment. Electrical equipment cubicles and vertical sections shall be installed plumb and level. Drawout equipment carriages, circuit breakers, and other removable components shall operate free and easy without binding or distortion. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all indoor floor-mounted electrical equipment and control cabinets shall be installed on concrete equipment pads four inches [102 mm] in height. Indoor metalclad switchgear shall be bolted to steel floor channels which are installed level and flush with the top of the concrete floor or equipment pad.


Outdoor metalclad switchgear and interrupter gear with integral floor channels or beams shall be secured to concrete pads with anchor bolts and clips. Motor control centers with integral floor sills shall be secured to concrete floors or equipment pads with anchor bolts. Adequate bracing shall be provided for seismic forces. The bracing shall be designed to meet the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 3-1.01. Cleaning. All deposits of oil, grease, mud, dirt or debris shall be cleaned from the electrical equipment following installation and field wiring. A detergent water based solution, or other liquid cleaners not harmful to material or equipment finishes, shall be used as recommended by the supplier.

End of Section


Section STS16220

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers single and three-phase, small (fractional) and medium (integral) horsepower, alternating current motors rated 500 horsepower and less (NEMA MG1). Motors shall be designated and coordinated with the driven equipment and shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. GENERAL. Motors furnished under driven equipment Technical Specification sections shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with Drawings, Technical Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment supplier unless exceptions are noted by the Design Engineer. Where applicable, individual motor data sheets have been developed which specify additional requirements for specific motors. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all motors, unless otherwise specified. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Seismic Design Requirements. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Motors furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the latest version of NEMA MG 1, NEMA MG 10, and IEEE 112, Test Method B. 1-2.04. Nameplates. All motor nameplate data shall conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the motor shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:


Motors Name of supplier. Type and model. Type of bearing and method of lubrication. Rated size of motor, hp [kW], and service factor. Temperature rise and insulation rating. Full load rotative speed. Net weight. Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load. Full load current. Locked rotor current. Space heater wattage, where applicable. Motor temperature switch data, where applicable.

Motor Shaft Grounding Ring data, where applicable. RTD data, where applicable. Seismic Design Requirements Confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the

Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section.

1-4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

b. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

c. Guide to troubleshooting.

d. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

e. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams.

f. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Service conditions for motors shall be as specified in the driven equipment Technical Specification sections. Motors shall be designed for special conditions such as area classification, altitude, frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment. Where site elevation and ambient temperature is not specified in


the driven equipment Technical Specification sections, the motors shall be designed for the following.

Site elevation Above 3,300 ft [1,000 m]

Ambient temperature 50 °C Unless specified otherwise, all motors shall be designed for full voltage starting and to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion according to IEEE 519. Motors utilizing a reduced-voltage, autotransformer starter shall be capable of reduced-voltage starting at a 65 percent tap setting. Motors utilizing a reduced voltage solid state starter shall be capable of starting at 50% of the specified voltage. When powered from an adjustable frequency drive (AFD), motors shall be inverter duty and specifically selected for service with an adjustable frequency type speed controller and shall be derated as required to compensate for harmonic heating effects and reduced self-cooling capability at low speed operation. Each motor shall not exceed a Class B temperature rise when operating in the installed condition at load with power received from the adjustable frequency drive. All motors driven by AFDs shall be supplied with full phase insulation on the end turns and shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31. In addition to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed to be continually pulsed at the motor terminals with a voltage of 1600 volts ac. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Design and construction of each general-purpose motor shall be as specified herein. Motor voltage, frequency, speed, service factor, and insulation class shall be as follows.

Motor voltage. 460, 3 phase for ½ horsepower and larger, 120, single phase for smaller than ½ horsepower

Frequency. 60 Hz Speed. Constant speed Service factor. 1.0 , except for AFD driven motors

which shall be 1.15 Insulation class and temperature rise above 40o C design ambient (by resistance method.

Class F with 90o C rise at 1.15 SF

Enclosure. As required for hazardous location


Main conduit box sized to include.

Main motor leads and space heater leads where space heaters are specified

2-2.01. Nameplate Horsepower. Motor nameplate horsepower [kW] shall be equal to or greater than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment. 2-2.02. Enclosures. All motors shall be self-ventilated. All self-ventilated open type motors, including those with dripproof, splashproof, and weather protected enclosures, and the fan covers of totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded machine. 2-2.02.01. Totally Enclosed Motors. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished with drain holes and rotating shaft seals. Frames, bearing brackets, external terminal housings, and fan covers for fan cooled motors shall be cast iron. External cooling fans for fan cooled motors shall be fabricated of brass, bronze, aluminum alloy containing not more than 0.2 percent copper, malleable iron, or plastic. All plastic fans shall be fabricated of a reinforced thermosetting plastic and shall be UL approved. 2-2.02.02. Outdoor Motors. Outdoor motors shall have NEMA weather protected enclosures. All exposed metal surfaces shall be protected, where practical, with a corrosion resistant polyester coating. Exposed uncoated surfaces shall be of a corrosion resistant metal. Enclosure exterior and interior surfaces, air gap surfaces, and windings shall be protected with a corrosion resistant polyester, polyurethane or epoxy coating. 2-2.02.03. Motors for Hazardous Locations. Motors for hazardous locations shall be in accordance with the NEC and of the correct type enclosures for the particular service as specified in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall meet the requirements of UL 674. 2-2.02.04. Encapsulated Windings. Not used. 2-2.02.05. Severe Duty Chemical Service Motors. Not used.Where specified in the motor data sheet(s), motors shall be provided with special corrosion-resistant finish and encapsulated windings meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1-1.27.2 and IEEE 841. 2-2.03. Main Conduit Boxes. The main conduit box shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1. The main conduit boxes shall be diagonally split for easy access to the motor leads, and designed for rotation in 90-degree increments. A gasket shall be furnished between the halves of the box. Conduit openings in the main conduit box shall match the size and quantity of conduits indicated on the one line Drawings.


The main conduit box shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. The main conduit box shall be sized for all indicated accessory leads. Motors furnished in NEMA 320 frame series and larger shall have conduit boxes designed and constructed to permit motor removal after installation without disconnecting raceways. 2-2.04. Leads. Motor power leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. Unless otherwise specified, space heater leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. All motor leads and their terminals shall be permanently marked in accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 2. Each lead marking shall be visible after taping of the terminals. All motors rated 100 horsepower [74 kW] and larger, and all vertical motors shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of rotation and supply voltage sequence. Leads for dual-voltage rated or for multispeed motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in the main conduit box for the operating voltage or for the specified speeds. Permanent instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the main conduit box or on the motor frame or nameplate. 2-2.05. Terminals. Cable type leads shall be provided with Burndy Type YA or acceptable equal compression type connectors. 2-2.06. Grounding Connections. All motors shall be furnished with a ground connection. 2-2.07. Bearings. All bearings shall be self-lubricating, shall have provisions for relubrication, and shall be designed to operate in any position or at any angle. Motor bearings shall be antifriction type with L10 life rating of 40,000 hours in accordance with ABMA Standards. All bearing mountings shall be designed to prevent the entrance of lubricant into the motor enclosure or dirt into the bearings, and shall be fitted with pipes, drain plugs, and fittings arranged for safe, easy relubrication from the outside of the motor while the motor is in service, as necessary. 2-2.07.01. Insulated Bearings. Motors over 100 horsepower controlled by an adjustable frequency drive shall be furnished with one insulated bearing. The insulated bearing shall be installed on the non-drive end of the motor.


2-2.08. Rotors. All induction motors shall have squirrel-cage rotors adequately sized to avoid overheating during acceleration of the motor and driven equipment. Rotors shall be dynamically balanced to 0.08 in./sec [2.03 mm/s] or less. 2-2.09. Shafts. Shafts shall be furnished with corrosion resistant treatment or shall be of a corrosion resistant material. 2-2.10. Torque Characteristics. Motors rated 200 horsepower [149 kW] and less shall have torques and locked-rotor current in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 12. 2-2.11. Motor Space Heaters. Motors 1 horsepower and larger shall be provided with a space heater element sized to prevent condensation on the core and windings. The space heaters shall be isolated or so located as to prevent heat damage to adjacent painted surfaces and shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply. 2-2.12. Temperature Sensing Devices. Each motor controlled by an adjustable frequency drive shall be furnished with at least one automatic reset winding temperature switch per phase. Temperature switch contacts shall be normally closed and rated 5 amps at 120 volts ac. The contacts shall be wired in series with the end leads brought out to the motor terminal box. An auxiliary conduit box shall be provided for termination of temperature switch wiring. 2-2.13. Motor Shaft Grounding Ring. Each motor controlled by an adjustable frequency drive shall be furnished with a maintenance free, conductive micro fiber, shaft grounding ring with circumferential micro fibers to discharge electrical shaft currents within the motor. Motor shaft grounding ring shall be installed on the drive end on the motor shaft. Shaft grounding ring shall be installed by the motor’s supplier in accordance with grounding ring supplier’s recommendations. 2-2.14. Assembly. All motors shall be completely assembled with the driven equipment, lubricated, and ready for operation. 2-2.15. Efficiency. Unless otherwise specified in the attached motor data sheet(s), motors shall be premium efficiency type and shall have a NEMA nominal efficiency nameplate value equal to or greater than values indicated in the following table. Efficiency shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B. Vertical motors shall have efficiency values equal to or greater than those indicated in the following table minus 0.50.


Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

0.7 1 84.0 85.5 82.5 75.0 77.0 85.5 82.5 75.5

1.1 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 78.0 84.0 86.5 87.5 80.0

1.5 2 85.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 85.5

2.2 3 85.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 87.0 89.5 89.5 86.5

3.7 5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 85.5

5.6 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 88.5 90.0 91.7 91.0 86.5

7.5 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.0 91.7 91.0 91.0

11.2 15 90.2 93.0 91.7 91.0 91.0 92.4 92.0 91.0

14.9 20 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.0 92.0 93.0 92.0 91.0

18.7 25 92.4 93.6 93.0 92.0 92.0 93.6 93.0 91.0

22.4 30 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 92.4 93.6 93.0 93.0

29.8 40 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.0 92.4 94.1 94.1 93.0

37.3 50 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0

44.8 60 93.6 95.0 94.5 94.0 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.0

56 75 94.0 95.0 95.0 94.0 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.0

74.6 100 94.5 95.4 95.0 95.0 94.1 95.4 95.0 94.0

93.2 125 95.0 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.0 94.0

112 150 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.8 95.8 94.0

149 200 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.4 96.2 95.8 94.1

186 250 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.8 94.5

224 300 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8


Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

3600 rpm

1800 rpm

1200 rpm

900 rpm

261 350 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8

298 400 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8

336 450 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

373 500 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

2-3. ACCESSORIES. 2-3.01. Special Tools and Accessories. Motors requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Each motor shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lugs and appropriate fittings for adding bearing lubricant. Grease lubricated units shall be provided with a means of venting the casing. Oil lubricated units shall be provided with constant level oilers or with sight glasses arranged to indicate operating and static oil levels. 2-4. ANCHORS. Contractor shall furnish suitable anchors for each item of equipment as required for driven equipment. 2-5. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the unfiltered vibration displacement (peak-to-peak), as measured at any point on the machine, shall not exceed the limits as required .At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or its components shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Each motor shall be installed in accordance with the Equipment Installation section.

End of Section

City of Shreveport, Louisiana

Documents

Transcript of City of Shreveport, Louisiana